Home

PARTNER® II Communications System Release 4.1

Contents

1. Cont Trans Feat MDC 9000 Base MDW 9000 Base Message Indicator Lights when someone signals you with the Message Light On feature or if you have a voice messaging system when you have a message in your mailbox On the MDW 9000 MSG appears in the handset display Volume Control Buttons all models except MDC 9000 and MDW 9000 Press amp to decrease or G to increase the volume as follows To adjust ringer volume press while the phone is idle and the handset is in the cradle To adjust speaker volume press while listening to a call through the speaker 10 adjust handset volume press while listening through the handset To adjust background music volume press while listening to music through the phone s speaker To adjust the display contrast on the PARTNER 34D and PARTNER 18D phones press x then to decrease the brightness or 9 to increase the brightness while the phone is idle and the handset is in the cradle Earpiece Volume Control Switch MDC 9000 Handset To adjust handset volume slide the switch up high or down low Volume Control MDW 9000 Handset Press to increase or to decrease the volume of the earpiece or ringer Ringer Volume Control MDC 9000 Base To adjust the volume press W or A while the phone is idle Status Button MDC 9000 Handse
2. ooo ono FI a NN L oaa oae oaae The following buttons and indicators appear on system phones Display PARTNER 34D and PARTNER 18D only Shows date day and time when phone is idle number dialed when placing a call extension number and name if programmed calling you or transferring a call to you and duration while a call is in progress When programming shows settings options and prompts To adjust the display contrast seq Volume Control Buttonsjon the next page Line Pool Programmable Buttons Used for individual outside lines or pools or if no line or pool is assigned on a button for programming telephone or extension numbers or other system features such as Last Number Redial When a line is assigned press the line button to make a call on that specific line lights show status of line When a pool is assigned press the pool button to make a call on one of the lines assigned to the pool lights show status of pool When a number or feature is programmed press the button to dial the number or use the feature The PARTNER 34D has 36 programmable buttons 32 with lights and 4 without lights the PARTNER 18D has 20 programmable buttons 16 with lights and 4 without lights the PARTNER 18 has 16 programmable buttons all with lights the PARTNE
3. Considerations An extension cannot be used for a doorphone and a hotline at the same time However hotlines and doorphones can have the same alert extensions You cannot assign doorphones to extensions 10 11 16 17 22 23 28 29 34 35 40 41 46 47 52 and 53 Remove voice messaging system mailboxes from doorphone extensions You cannot bridge two doorphones together Valid Entries Extensions 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36 39 42 45 48 51 54 57 None assigned vY Programming To program a doorphone extension 1 Press _Feature o Lo System Program System Program 6 o 4 for doorphone 1 or L Le Lo 4 for doorphone 2 Enter the doorphone extension number for example to identify extension 20 as a doorphone extension press 2 o or press _Remove to unassign an existing doorphone extension Select another procedure or exit programming mode Doorphone Extension 604 and 605 5 81 Emergency Phone Number List 406 Description This System Programming procedure creates a list of up to 10 telephone numbers that all users can dial regardless of dialing restrictions provided they have access to an outside line Typical list entries include fire police and other emergency services numbers Related Features m If an extension is programmed for Forced Account Code Entry 307 a user at the extension is required to enter an account code before dialing a number in t
4. Line Pool Programmable Buttons Any unused line button is programmable o 0 DND go Ci Fool 880 Figure 2 7 Example of PARTNER 6 phone as a Pooled Extension 2 24 Programming To program a phone from extension 10 or 11 use the following procedure 1 Place the Programming Overlay over the dialpad of the system display phone at extension 10 or 11 see The Programming Overlays earlier in this chapter for more information 2 To start programming a Press Feature 0 0 A display similar to the following appears PROGRAM EXTENSION 10 If you are programming from extension 11 11 displays instead of 10 b Press _ System Program A display similar to the following appears 10 Enter Extension Name This display is for the Extension Name Displayj feature When you are entering Centralized Telephone Programming mode skip it by moving on to Step 2c c Press _System Program The display reads SYSTEM PROGRAM d Press Central Tel Program A display similar to the following appears CENTRAL TELEPHONE PROG Extension 3 Dial the extension number of the telephone to be programmed The green lights next to buttons on which lines or pools are assigned show the current Line Ringing settings remaining buttons can be programmed with telephone numbers extension numbers or system features 4 At this point you ca
5. Figure E 2 Programming from an MLS 34D Phone Programming Mixed Telephone Types E 3 Glossary D A Account code A code of up to 16 digits that is associated with incoming or outgoing telephone calls Entry of an account code may be optional or forced If entered an account code appears on the call record for a call See also Call report Forced Account Code Entry and Forced Account Code List ASA See Automatic System Answer Auto Dial button A programmable telephone button that lets you dial a series of digits simply by pressing that button An Auto Dial button can be used to store a feature code a phone number or an account code so that it can be dialed with one touch See also Programmable button Automated Attendant Service A voice messaging system feature that answers calls and routes them to the appropriate extension based on caller responses to a recorded announcement See also and Automatic System Answer A system feature that causes incoming calls to be answered by the system if the receptionist cannot answer within a specified number of rings The system plays a brief message and places the call on hold continues ringing or disconnects the call Auxiliary equipment Telecommunications equipment other than system phones that can be connected to the control unit Auxiliary equipment includes industry standard devices that can connect directly to the public telephone network such as standard ph
6. Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode System Phone To make an announcement over the loudspeaker paging system and the idle system phones with speakers in Calling Group 1 1 Press the programmed button or _ntercom x z Lo then lift the handset 2 Speak into the handset To avoid feedback do not use the speakerphone Your voice is heard through the loudspeaker paging system and the speakers of all idle system phones in Calling Group 1 If your paging system supports announcements to zoned areas refer to the instructions packaged with the device to make zoned announcements Simultaneous paging 1 70 5 167 Standard Phone To make an announcement over the loudspeaker paging system and the idle system phones with speakers in Calling Group 1 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Dial x z o 3 Speak into the handset Your voice is heard through the loudspeaker paging system and the speakers of all idle system phones in Calling Group 1 For touch tone phones only if your loudspeaker paging system supports announcements to zoned areas refer to the instructions packaged with the device to make zoned announcements 5 168 Simultaneous Paging 70 SMDR Output Format 610 Description Call reporting often referred to as Station Message Detail Recording or SMDR provides detailed tracking of telephone usage in a printed report This System Pro
7. 1 Ask the party with whom you are speaking to hold but do not put the call on hold 2 Press the Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button The green light next to the Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button turns on Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back is activated 3 Respond to the originator of the voice interrupt on busy call The third party with whom you were originally speaking does not hear your response but you can hear that third party 4 Press the Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button again whether or not the originator has hung up to resume the conversation with the third party The green light next to the Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button turns off Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back is deactivated The originator hears two beeps if he or she did not hang up previously 5 12 Answering Calls m To answer a coverage call 1 If your phone is a covering extension and it rings check your display to see if the ringing call is a coverage call Also if you have an Auto Dial button for the originating extension the green light next to the button flutters while the coverage call is ringing at your extension and it is the next ringing call you will answer if you lift the handset Lift the handset You are connected to the coverage call The first coverage call to ring at your extension is identified in the display If more than one coverage call rings at your extension you can press the Caller ID Inspec
8. Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button Press Feature 1 4 ao fF N Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode To transfer a caller to a specific subscriber s mailbox 1 From a system phone press the programmed button or press _Feature 1 4 2 Dial the two digit extension number or press an Auto Dial button of the mailbox subscriber for whom the caller wants to leave a message The caller is routed to the mailbox and hears the recorded greeting for that mailbox 3 Hang up Voice Mailbox Transfer F14 5 203 Wake Up Service Button 115 Description This System Programming procedure identifies a button on the system phone at extension 10 to be used for scheduling wake up or reminder calls for system extensions When a wake up call is scheduled the system makes an intercom call to the target extension at the scheduled time If the first call is not answered or the called extension is busy the system makes a second attempt five minutes later Related Features Wake up time is based on System Time 103 If users answer a wake up call they hear Music On Hold 602 if it is Active If Music On Hold is Not Active users hear silence Wake up calls ring at target extensions even if Do Not Disturbjis active at the extension Wake up calls to a target extension that has Call Forwarding active ring at the
9. 5 1 2 3 4 Intercom This way the WATS line would be selected first At pooled extensions with Automatic Line Selection at its factory setting the system first searches to find an available line in the main pool pool 880 button 1 then button 2 If all outside lines in the pool are busy the system selects an idle intercom line However you can change the order to accommodate a different automatic line selection For example your boss prefers her individual line line 15 to be selected when she lifts the handset then auxiliary pool 881 which is used for making international calls To do this set Automatic Line Selection to 15 881 Intercom Standard Phone If a standard phone user intends to place intercom calls and access system features Automatic Line Selection for his or her extension must be set to intercom first for proper operation For example the setting for a standard phone in a lobby used for internal calling or making local calls on line 1 would be Intercom 1 Programming To program Automatic Line Selection for an extension 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program 2 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed for Automatic Line Selection Press x x Press the line pool or intercom buttons in the desired order For each button pressed a display similar to the following appears Automatic Line Selection 5 To exit Au
10. Caller ID Inspect F17 5 51 Caller ID Name Display F 16 Description This feature lets users with system display phones toggle the display between Caller ID number and Caller ID name Caller ID name is an optional feature of the Caller ID service provided by your local telephone company and may not be available in your area even if Caller ID number is available Related Features m To view Caller ID information for a second call while active on a call users can program Caller ID Inspect onto a button Refer to Caller ID for details on Caller ID information m This feature has no effect on Call Coverage calls Coverage calls always display the extension number of the user who is sending calls for coverage Considerations m This feature must be programmed on a button with lights on a system display phone When Caller ID Name Display is on the green light is on indicating that the Caller ID name will be displayed rather than the Caller ID number SMDR reports print only Caller ID number where available If a number is not available it is reported as IN on the call report Programming Using 5 52 To program a Caller ID Name Display button 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature 2 3 Press a programmable button with lights 4 Press Feature 1 6 5 Program an
11. m Single fax machine Good for light or moderate fax traffic This basic setup uses a published fax number m Good for light fax traffic with no need for a published fax number m Send and receive fax machines Good for high volume fax traffic One machine sends the other receives You can install both a telephone and a fax machine on the same extension see Combination Extensions in the PARTNER Communications System Installation guide This lets you receive both voice and fax calls on the same line but not at the same time If you pick up the phone and hear a fax signal push the Start button on your fax machine and then hang up If you are using the PARTNER MAIL system s Automated Attendant Service you can program PARTNER MAIL to transfer fax calls to the fax extension or a group of fax extensions automatically Use Fax Machine Extensions 601 to identify fax extensions To transfer to multiple fax machines put all of the fax extensions into a single Hunt Group any group 1 6 using Hunt Group Extensions 505 Restricting Dialing from a Fax Machine You can use dialing restrictions to restrict calling activity on a fax machine For example you can use Outgoing Call Restriction 401 to restrict the fax machine to local calls only For a more detailed discussion of dialing restrictions see Using Auxiliary Equipment 4 15 Single Fax Machine The single fax machine setup Shown in Figure 4 6
12. use Pool Line Assignment 207 and Pool Extension Assignment 314 Adding New Pools Use this section if your system is configured for Hybrid mode to create new pools If you add outside lines to your system for use in a new pool use Dial Mode 207 to assign if the new lines are rotary lines Pool Line Assignment 207 lines to the new pool Pool Extension Assignment 314 to assign the new pool to specific extensions Centralized Telephone Programming to specify when the new pool will start ringing at each extension that has the pool and Pool Access Restriction 315 to limit an extension s access to all the lines in the new pool Also use Automatic Line Selection Centralized Telephone Programming to add the new pool to the extension s Automatic Line Selection sequence Adding New Extensions If you add an extension to your system you can use Copy Settings 399 to copy the settings of an existing extension If you wish to further adjust a new extension s settings see Customizing Extensions earlier in this chapter Swapping Extensions If a user changes locations but wants to keep the same extension number you can make the change easily by changing the connection at the control unit For example if the users at extensions 29 and 32 switch offices you can disconnect the modular plug from extension jack 29 in the control unit and reconnect it at extension
13. Assigned Not Assigned vY Select button then press a programmable button to assign Automatic System Answer to that button Programming To assign or unassign an Automatic System Answer button with lights at extension 10 1 2 Press Feature o 0 System Program System Program 1 1 L4 If you want to assign Automatic System Answer to the first available button press _Next Data until a display similar to the following appears ASA Button 1 Assigned Ext10 If you want to unassign Automatic System Answer press _Next Data until a display similar to the following appears ASA Button 2 Not Assigned If you want to assign Automatic System Answer to a specific button press L2 A display similar to the following appears ASA Button 3 Select a Button Then press a programmable button with lights to assign Automatic System Answer to that button Select another procedure or exit programming mode Label the Automatic System Answer button at extension 10 5 22 Automatic System Answer Button 111 Using To turn Automatic System Answer on Press the Automatic System Answer button at extension 10 The green light is on steady and Automatic System Answer is on If calls are ringing when Automatic System Answer is turned on the calls will be answered immediately by the system To turn Automatic System Answer off Press the Automatic System Answer button at extension 10 The green light
14. Hands Free Answer on Intercom HFAI When you receive a voice signaled intercom call your phone beeps once to indicate that your speaker has been turned on automatically and you hear the caller s voice over your phone s speaker If you leave your microphone on all the time you can start talking when you hear the caller without lifting the handset This feature is called Hands Free Answer on Intercom Any user in the system can make a voice signaled call to an idle system phone by pressing Intercom then dialing an extension number or pressing an Auto Dial button programmed for voice signaling You can make a voice signaled call from either a system phone or a standard phone However if you try to make a voice signaled call to a standard phone or an MDC 9000 or MDW 9000 phone it will ring NOTES 1 The HFAI feature can be turned on or off only when your phone is idle Muting your voice while you are on a call only turns off the microphone for the duration of the call 2 If HFAl is on and you are already on a call you will not receive any voice signaled calls to your extension they will ring instead 3 Ifyou make a voice signaled intercom call to a busy extension it may result in a voice interrupt on busy call to that extension See Voice Interrupt On Busy Calls below for more information Voice Interrupt On Busy Calls A voice interrupt on busy call is a special intercom call that lets you interrupt and
15. The number being dialed will show on a display phone To use an Auto Dial button programmed with a feature code or account code follow the directions for the feature you want to use 5 16 Auto Dialing Automatic Extension Privacy 304 Description This System Programming procedure lets you either allow users to join active calls at an extension or prevent users from joining active calls at an extension When Automatic Extension Privacy is Assigned for an extension other users cannot join active calls at that extension This feature is typically used for standard phones and extensions connected to fax machines modems and credit card scanners which make and receive data calls that should not be interrupted Related Features Users cannot join calls in progress on pool buttons regardless of the setting for this procedure or the state of the Privacy button See Conference to add a party to a call in progress on a pool button To manually change an extension s Privacy state users can program the Privacy feature on a button with lights Users can then press the Privacy button to activate the feature green light on or deactivate the feature green light off when they want someone to join a call at their extension If Automatic Extension Privacy is Assigned at an extension the green light is lit automatically after programming the Privacy button to indicate that Privacy is currently active If this is the case and the Privacy
16. 1 Active incoming calls ring once wY 2 Not Active incoming calls ring repeatedly Programming To change the Abbreviated Ringing setting for an extension 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program _System Program 3 0 4 2 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed For example to program extension 12 press 1 2 3 To set Abbreviated Ringing press Next Data until the appropriate value displays 4 To set Abbreviated Ringing for another extension press _Next Item or _Prev Item until the extension number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 4 Abbreviated Ringing 305 Account Code Entry F12 Description This feature can be used only from a system phone This feature lets a user enter an account code up to 16 digits for an outside call incoming or outgoing An account code typically is used to identify a department project or client for charge back or tracking purposes Related Features m You can use Forced Account Code Entry 307 to identify system phone extensions that are required to enter an account code prior to dialing any outside number including those on the Emergency Phone Number List A forced account code must be entered at the beginning of a call however a different account code can be entered any time during the call m You can use Forced Account Code List 409 to create a list of v
17. 28 34 40 46 or 52 DIAL the alerted extension number notthe hotline or z o a to paging system To remove the hotline and alert PRESS Remove DOORPHONE 1 EXTENSION DIAL 604 DIAL an extension number 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36 39 42 45 48 51 or 54 57 To remove the doorphone extension PRESS Remove DOORPHONE 2 EXTENSION DIAL 605 0 5 81 DIAL an extension number 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36 39 42 45 48 51 or 54 57 To remove the doorphone extension PRESS _Remove o 5 80 5 80 DOORPHONE ALERT EXTENSIONS DIAL 606 DIAL an extension number except a doorphone extension 1 Not an alert 2 Doorphone 1 alert 3 Doorphone 2 alert 4 Doorphones 1 and 2 PRESS next item to identify another extension up to 48 alert extensions per doorphone DIAL z AA EXTENSIONS p 5 3 DIAL 607 DIAL an extension number 10 57 DIAL 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned PRESS next tem to assign another extension T SMDR RECORD TYPE DIAL 608 DIAL 1 All calls Y 2 Outgoing calls only SMDR OUTPUT FORMAT DIAL 610 DIAL 1 15 digits Y 2 24 digits SMDR TALK TIME DIAL 611 1 Active 2 Not Active DIAL Lucent Technologies 518 455 334 Comcode 107879231 Issue 2 August 1996
18. 3 From a system phone press intercom Press x plus a two digit extension number or use an Auto Dial button Listen for one of the following responses If you hear one beep you have reached an idle system phone You can speak after the beep Your voice is heard through the other extension s speaker If the recipient is present he or she can reply If you hear two beeps you have reached a busy system phone with Voice Interrupt On Busy Assigned You can speak after the beeps Be aware that the third party to whom the recipient is speaking probably also will hear the two beeps and the faint sound of your voice If the recipient has a Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button wait for a response If you hear a second set of beeps the recipient has ended the voice interrupt on busy call In either case hang up to end your part of the voice interrupt on busy call If you hear ringing you have reached a standard phone an idle MDC 9000 or MDW 9000 phone or a busy system phone with Voice Interrupt On Busy Not Assigned Your call is not completed until someone answers Voice Interrupt On Busy 312 5 201 Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back F18 Description This feature is available only on system phones This feature lets you program a button that is used to respond to a voice interrupt on busy call while the user is active on another call Related Procedures You must use Voice Interrupt On Busy 312 to identify
19. 3rings OUTSIDE CONFERENCE DENIAL DIAL 109 p 5 148 DIAL 1 Allowed 2 Disallowed v DIAL 119 ae SYSTEM ANSWER DIAL 1 Active v 2 Not Active DIAL 110 DIAL a ring delay number 0 9 Y 2 rings AUTOMATIC SYSTEM ANSWER MODE DIAL 121 DIAL 1 Hold Y 2 Disconnect 3 Ring DIAL and three digit procedure code Example 4 1 Lo 1 for System Date RING ON TRANSFER p 5 163 TO CYCLE THROUGH SYSTEM PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES PRESS Next Procedure Or _Prev Procedure NOTES Procedures 399 609 and 728 shown below in dashed boxes are skipped when cycling TO CYCLE THROUGH AVAILABLE SETTINGS PRESS Next Data or Prev Data TO RETURN TO FACTORY SETTING PRESS Remove GROUP CALL DISTRIBUTION DIAL 206 DIAL a group number 1 6 7 for VMS DIAL MODE DIAL 201 DIAL a line number 01 24 DIAL 1 Touch Tone 2 Rotary DIAL a line number 01 24 PRESS next item to program another DIAL 1 Assigned ine 2 Not Assigned 3 VMS Line Cover only for hunt group 7 PRESS ext Item to program another ine HOLD DISCONNECT TIME DIAL 203 p 5 106 DIAL a line number 01 24 DIAL Vv RBHEBRBHRHEHEHEHEHEHEHeBHeESBBEBEE 1 Long 450 msec a POOL LINE ASSIGNMENT 2 Short 50 msec PRESS _Next item to program another DIAL 207 p 5 157 li DIAL a line number 01 24 Ine DIAL 1 No Pool 2 Main Pool 880 v
20. 5 151 Pool Access Restriction 815 Description This procedure applies only to pooled extensions in Hybrid mode This System Programming procedure restricts a pooled extension from receiving and or making outside calls on all lines belonging to a specific pool For example you may want customer service representatives to make calls using the WATS lines that belong to auxiliary pool 881 but not receive incoming calls on the lines in that pool in this case you assign pool 881 to the customer service representative s phones and restrict the pool to Out Only Related Features m This procedure is the most extreme way to restrict dialing For example an extension set to In Only or No Access for a particular pool cannot select that pool to dial out even for numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List 406 See Dialing Restrictions and Permissions in Chapter 2 for a summary of all dialing restrictions m When a user has access to a pool for outgoing calls you can customize dialing restrictions for the user s extension by using Outgoing Call Restriction 401 and Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 m To restrict a pooled extension from receiving and or making calls on individual lines you must use Line Access Restriction 302 m You can use Pool Extension Assignment 314 to assign pools to specific extensions m You can use Pool Line Assignment 207 to assign lines to or remove lines from pools m Cal
21. 611 is set to Active the combined length of the fields for a call record will be greater than the 80 characters supported by most printers If call records wrap around to the next line reduce the font size or increase the characters per inch setting for the printer If necessary change the ouput format back to 15 digits Valid Entries 1 15 Digits Y Programming To change the maximum number of digits for dialed numbers that can print on call reports 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program _System Program 6 1 0 2 Press Next Data until the appropriate value displays 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode SMDR Output Format 610 5 169 SMDR Record Type 608 Description Call reporting often referred to as Station Message Detail Recording or SMDR provides detailed tracking of telephone usage in a printed report This System Programming procedure allows you to specify whether all calls or outgoing calls only are to be included on call reports Related Features m The date and time that appear on call reports are determined by Date 101 and System Time 103 m The call report page header prints in the Display Language 303 specified for extension 10 m f Account Code Entry optional or forced is used to enter an account code for a call for example to charge calls to specific departments or projects the account code prints on the call report If there
22. Be Indicators system telephone 3 2 Individual Calling Line Identification Intercom call making an Intercom Dial Tone 309 Intercom status 2 21 3 4 3 5 ooo Internal Hotline see Hotline 603 IROB see In Range Out of Building protectors D J Jacks 2 2 o Joining a call 5 112 4 5 113 D K Key extensions 5 115 L Labeling line and extension jacksJ2 200 SY Last Number Redial 5 114 Index IN 3 IN 4 Light patterns description of 3 4 3 5 o O Fax Management button Intercom Auto Dial button 2 21 3 443 5 Line adapter addingtosystem 2 6 2 7 CdS assigning to extensions buttons 1 8 3 2 5 118 5 121 cords B 6 CSs SSCSCsSY 5 118 15 119 coverage Line Assignment 301 Line Coverage Extension 208 Line ownership 5 122 0 Line pickup 5 67 5 69 Z O S U OO Line pools 5 115 5 152 5 154 5 157 _ __ Line Ringing 5 124 45 125 Line Selection Automatic 5 19 15 20 Lines Number of 104 5 143 __ Lists allowed phone numbers disallowed phone numbers 5 71 5 73 emergency phone numbers forced account codes 5 92 f 5 93 __ _ _ Loudspeaker Paging 5 126 j 5 127 5 167 5 168 Loudspeaker Paging system Maintenance B 1 CS Making acall 5 128 5 131 o Manual Signaling 5 132 5 133 0 Marked System Speed Dial numbers Message indicator 3 3 Message Light On Off 5 134 5 137 M
23. Call Coverage is not active m If the Call Coverage feature code and optional originating and covering extensions are programmed on a button with lights you can use the button to turn Call Coverage on and off with one touch The lights show when Call Coverage is on even if calls are covered by a different extension than the one stored on the button and you can still use the button to turn Call Coverage off Call Coverage F20 XX XX 5 37 Programming To program a Call Coverage button 1 Press Feature 0 Lo System Program System Program Central Tel Program 2 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature 3 Press a programmable button preferably a button with lights 4 At this point you can m Press Feature 2 Lo or m Press Feature 2 o and the number of the originating extension or m Press Feature 2 o the number of the originating extension and the number of the covering extension 5 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using System Phone To send calls for coverage manually 1 Press Feature 2 o 2 Dial your extension number 3 Dial the extension number of the covering extension To remove Call Coverage manually 1 Press Feature 2 o 2 Dial your extension number twice To send calls for coverage using the programmed button 1 Press the programmed button If an originating extension and a covering e
24. Considerations for Hunt Group 7 This Hunt Group is used exclusively for the extensions associated with the voice messaging system hardware Do not assign any other extensions to this group A voice messaging system requires special hardware and set up procedures refer to Voice Messaging Systems in Chapter 4 and to the documentation shipped with the voice messaging system for more information Valid Entries 1 Assigned to group 2 Not Assigned to group Y Programming To assign extensions to a Hunt Group 1 2 Press Feature o 0 System Program System Program 5 o 4 Atthe Group prompt enter a group number 1 7 For example to select group 1 press 1 A display similar to the following appears Hunt Group 1 Extension Enter the desired extension number For example to select extension 31 press 3 4 To assign or unassign the extension press _Next Data until the appropriate value displays At this point m To assign or unassign another extension press _Next Item or _Prev Item until the extension number shows on the display Then repeat Step 4 m To program another group press _Next Procedure Prev Procedure enter a new group number and repeat Steps 3 and 4 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 110 Hunt Group Extensions 505 Intercom Dial Tone 809 Description This System Programming procedure determines the type
25. The following programming procedures provide ways to override all dialing restrictions provided the user has access to an outside line or pool m Emergency Phone Number List 406 jdefines a list of up to ten numbers that can be dialed from any extension A typical number is 911 m Marked System Speed Dial Numbersjare specially identified System Speed Dial numbers which a user can dial by pressing Feature or 4 on a standard phone followed by a three digit code m System Password 403 creates a password that can be entered at any system phone except an MDC 9000 or MDW 9000 to override dialing restrictions for the duration of a call Line Access Restriction 302 Pool To override all dialing restrictions except with use to create lists of outside numbers that otherwise restricted extensions can dial Then use Allowed List Assignments 408 to assign one or more of the lists to an extension 2 10 Programming Summary Tables 2 1 and 2 2 summarize the available dialing restrictions and permissions showing how they can be combined in a variety of ways to customize an extension s dialing privileges Table 2 1 Settings that Restrict an Extension s Access to a Specific Line or Pool Type of Restrictions or Permissions for the Extension Setting for Line Assignment 801 and Pool Extension Assignment 314 Setting for Line Access Restriction 802 and Pool Access Restriction 315
26. To assign or unassign the extension press _Next Data until the appropriate value displays 4 To assign or unassign a second PARTNER Attendant extension press Next Item Or _Prev item until the extension number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode AA Extensions 607 5 3 Abbreviated Ringing 305 Description This feature applies only to system phones This System Programming procedure activates or deactivates Abbreviated Ringing at the system phone at a specific extension When a user is on a call and Abbreviated Ringing is active any incoming calls ring only once The green light next to the line or pool button flashes until the call is answered or the caller hangs up or for a transferred call until it returns to the transfer return extension This feature prevents incoming calls from distracting users when they are busy on another call To allow calls to ring repeatedly set Abbreviated Ringing to Not Active Considerations m Abbreviated Ringing typically is set to Not Active for receptionists and others who handle many calls quickly so they have an audible reminder of incoming calls m Abbreviated Ringing applies to outside transferred and intercom calls m The volume of an abbreviated ring is lower than a normal ring m Calls to a busy extension ring at a lower volume than normal even if Abbreviated Ring is set to Not Active Valid Entries
27. To use Table B 1 first locate the item you want A triangle a indicates where you can obtain it SOURCE U S Lucent Lucent Lucent Lucent Technologies Technologies Technologies Technologies Catalog Sales Authorized National Parts Sales Office sibel Sales Center system Modules and Wiring 800 451 2100 800 247 7000 800 222 7278 Expansion Processor module Line Extension module 206E 206EC Includes module two 7 ft line cords and installation instructions Line module 400E 400EC 200E Includes module four 7 ft line cords and instructions ss es ee ee oe ee Line cord D2R Connects 206E or EC and 400E or EC modules to network interface clear color Specify length 7 standard length 14 or 25 ft 267F2 bridging adapter Connects two devices to one extension In Range Out of Building IROB protector Required when installing extensions in another building from the control unit two required per PARTNER model telephone one per standard phone or device Z300A Electromagnetic Interference EMI Filter Includes filter 7 ft line cord and installation instructions 267C line adapter Splits two outside lines from an RJ14 network interface jack so that each line has its own modular plug do not use at extension jacks 355A 355AF adapter Connects call reporting device to primary processor module To locate the nearest Lucent Technologies Authorized Dealer check your local telephone directory s yellow
28. Using System Phone 1 If you want lift the handset 2 Press a button programmed with Direct Line Pickup Active Line then dial the two digit line number 01 24 of the line you want to pick up or join or dial intercom 6 8 and the two digit line number If you did not lift the handset the speaker comes on automatically Standard Phone 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Dial 6 8 and the two digit line number 01 24 of the line you want to pick up or join 5 68 Direct Line Pickup Active Line I68LL Direct Line Pickup Idle Line I8LL Description This feature allows users to access a specific outside line where LL is a line number from 01 24 when the line is not in use This feature is useful for accessing a line that is not assigned to the phone Related Features m Ifa lineis in use users cannot access it with this feature they hear busy tone For information on accessing a ringing or held call or joining a call in progress see Direct Line Pickup Active Line Line Access Restriction 302 or Pool Access Restriction 315 is set to No Access or In Only for a line assigned to an extension or lines within a pool a user at the restricted extension hears busy tone if Direct Line Pickup is used to access that line to place a call Considerations m This procedure applies to individual lines If you have a pooled extension and you want to access lines in po
29. answering machines hotline phones or doorphones or extensions assigned as External Hotline phones to a Calling Group Valid Entries 1 Assigned to group 2 Not Assigned to group Programming To create a Calling Group 1 Press Feature 0 o System Program _System Program 5 o 2 2 Atthe Group prompt enter a group number 1 4 For example to select group 1 press 1 3 Atthe Extension prompt enter the number of the extension to be programmed For example to select extension 31 press 3 4 4 To assign or unassign the extension press Next Data until the appropriate value displays 5 At this point m To program another extension press Next item or _Prev Item until the extension number shows on the display Then repeat Step 4 m To program another group press _Next Procedure Prev Procedure and repeat Steps 2 through 4 6 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Calling Group Extensions 502 5 53 Conference Calls Description This section explains how to set up conference calls using the _conf button on a system phone or the switchhook on a standard phone A conference call connects up to five parties including the conference originator in a single call Users can connect both outside and inside parties in a conference call but the call cannot include more than two outside parties Related Features You can use Outside C
30. even those on the Emergency Phone Number List 406 on all of the lines or pools assigned to that extension If 409 contains entries the system checks the account code against the list If the account code is on the list line or pool access is allowed if not line or pool access is denied Controlling Calls on Outside Lines or Pools When an extension is allowed access to an outside line or pool you can use the following procedures to control calling m Outgoing Call Restriction 401 defines the type of calls inside only local only orinside local and long distance that users can make from all lines or pools at an extension Outgoing Call Restriction Button 114 allows the receptionist at extension 10 to quickly change an extension s current Outgoing Call Restriction setting Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 creates up to four lists of numbers that cannot be dialed After creating Disallowed Phone Number Lists use Disallowed List Assignments 405 to assign one or more lists to a specific extension m Night Service with System Password 403 restricts users at extensions in the Night Service Group from dialing outside phone numbers except Emergency numbers and Marked System Speed Dial numbers unless the password is entered first Table 2 2 provides examples of settings that can be used to restrict an extension s dialing once it gets an outside line or pool Overriding Dialing Restrictions
31. for the extension m f someone changed the Pool Access Restriction setting verify that the change was an appropriate one m f no one changed the Pool Access Restriction setting go to Possible Cause 4 Possible Cause 4 The pool may not be assigned to the extension What to do Check Pool Extension Assignment 314 to see if the pool is assigned to the extension m lf the pool is not assigned assign it m Ifthe pool is assigned go to Possible Cause 5 Possible Cause 5 Not enough lines are assigned to the pool to support usage What to do Check Pool Line Assignment 207 to see if an appropriate number of lines are assigned to the pool a f an appropriate number of lines are not assigned you may need to add more lines m f an appropriate number of lines are assigned go to Possible Cause 6 In the continental U S help is available at 1 800 628 2888 Outside the continental U S call your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer 6 10 Troubleshooting Possible Cause 6 One or more local phone company lines in the pool are faulty What to do At extension 10 try to access each individual line assigned to the pool m lf the lines accessed from individual line buttons on extension 10 are still faulty refer to Possible Cause 7Jin Other Problems with Phones Trouble Making Outside Calls m Ifthe problem remains call the hotline Calls are Answered Automatically A call rings
32. long distance and long numbers the distance calls extension and can answer should not dial any call If a line or pool is not assigned to the extension a user can use Direct Line Pickup to access the line or dial the pool access code to access a line in the pool Emergency numbers Marked System Speed Dial numbers Allowed Phone numbers and numbers dialed using the System Password override all dialing restrictions if a user has access to an outside line or pool to place the call If Forced Account Code Entry is programmed for an extension the user must enter an account code before accessing an outside line or pool If there are entries in the Forced Account Code List the entered account code must match an entry on the list The Disallowed List then must be assigned to the extension using Disallowed List Assignment 405 Programming 2 11 Setting Up Groups of Extensions You can set up four types of extension groups m Pickup Group Extensions 501 assigns extensions to one of four Pickup Groups A Pickup Group lets any user in the system answer calls for any extension in that group Calling Group Extensions 502 assigns extensions to one of four Calling Groups A Calling Group lets users ring or page all extensions in that group simultaneously or transfer calls into the group Additionally Simultaneous Paging lets users make announcements over the loudspeaker paging system and the speakers of idle system pho
33. or you can simply keep spare standard phones at those extensions to serve as replacements in case of a power failure Learning About Telephones To use a system feature press in place of Feature used on system phones followed by its two digit code when you hear intercom dial tone For features that use _intercom on system phones dial only the two digit code when you hear intercom dial tone Instructions for using these features on standard phones are included in Chapter 5 Feature Reference To use a Speed Dial number press followed by its two or three digit code when you hear intercom dial tone For details see Personall Speed Dial Numbers and System Speed Dial Numbers in Chapter 5 If Call Waiting 316 is assigned to an extension with a standard phone connected the user hears a call waiting tone two beeps when a second call comes in to the extension The call waiting tone is not repeated Use the switchhook on a standard phone to place calls on hold park a call transfer a call answer a call waiting call or set up a conference call For details see Using the Switchhook on the next page or Hold pe ge eee ae Chapter 5 If the standard phone has a message waiting light use it to notify users of messages For details soap leseage Teh Ondand in Chapter 5 For a list of supported phones see in Chapter 1 Alternatively if you have a voice messaging system t
34. prompt enter the number of the extension to be programmed For example to program extension 42 press 4 2 3 To activate or deactivate Distinctive Ring for the extension press _Next Data until the appropriate value displays 4 To program another extension press _Next item or _Prev Item until the extension number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Distinctive Ring 308 5 77 Do Not Disturb F01 Description This feature is available only on system phones This feature lets a system phone user press a programmed button to prevent incoming calls for the extension from audibly alerting lights still flash When Do Not Disturb is on outside callers hear ringing while inside callers hear a busy signal This feature is recommended only if someone answers outside calls for your extension when you do not answer them Related Features Caller IDjinformation for incoming calls displays only when a call is audibly alerting at an extension This means that extensions with Do Not Disturb activated do not receive Caller ID information unless the call is answered Users with Automatic VMS Cover 310 Assigned or with VMS Cover turned on can activate Do Not Disturb to Send All Calls immediately to their voice mailbox Users with Call Coverage turned on can activate Do Not Disturb to Send All immediately to the covering extension Considerations
35. s operation from Pooled to Key Refer to Key Extensions on the previous page to assign lines to those extensions Pool Extension Assignment 314 to remove the main pool assign auxiliary pools or change the location of the button used to select an auxiliary pool at specific extensions The location of the two main pool buttons cannot be changed Pool Access Restriction 315 to prevent an extension from receiving and or making outside calls on all lines in specific pools Line Ringing Centralized Telephone Programming to specify when a line or pool will start ringing at each extension that has the line or pool By default lines are set to Immediate Ring and pools are set to No Ring For additional information on line ringing options see Programming al later in this chapter Automatic Line Selection Centralized Telephone Programming to specify the order in which the system selects an available line or pool when a user at the extension lifts the handset or presses _Spkr to make a call For extensions with standard phones set Automatic Line Selection to intercom first This enables standard phones to access equipment features including intercom calling When users lift the handsets on standard phones they hear intercom dial tone To access a pool they can dial the pool access code 880 881 882 or 883 or dial 9 to access the first available line or pool in the sequence 2 4 Programming Cust
36. the 80 characters supported by most printers If call records wrap around to the next line reduce the font size or increase the characters per inch setting for the printer If necessary change the ouput format back to 15 digits Valid Entries 1 Active 2 Not Active Programming To include the Talk field on call reports 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 6 1 2 2 Press _Next Data until the appropriate value displays 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode SMDR Talk Time 611 5 171 SMDR Top Of Page 609 Description Call reporting often referred to as Station Message Detail Recording or SMDR provides detailed tracking of telephone usage in a printed report This System Programming procedure notifies the system that the printer has been aligned to the top of a new page Use this feature after inserting paper clearing a jam or to print a new header after changing SMDR Output Format or SMDR Talk Time When this feature is used the system prints a new call report header Related Features You can use SMDR Record Type 608 to specify the type of calls to be included on call reports You can use SMDR Output Format 610 to identify whether a maximum of 15 digits or 24 digits is printed for dialed numbers on the call report You can set SMDR Talk Time 611 to Active to print on call reports the time a user spends on an incoming outside call
37. unless Call Forwarding Call Coverage or VMS Cover is used You can set SMDR Talk Time 611 to Active to include the Talk field on call reports For an incoming outside call answered by Direct Extension Dial this field shows the call duration minus the time the greeting played and the caller waited for someone to answer the call Automatic System Answer is an alternative system answering feature that aids the receptionist during busy periods Direct Extension Dial Button 113 5 59 Considerations Valid Entries On ll It is recommended that you use only one automated answering option for incoming calls either this feature the Automated Attendant Service of the voice messaging system or a PARTNER Attendant Direct Extension Dial does not transfer calls to Calling Groups This feature can handle three outside calls simultaneously If you have lines programmed for Direct Extension Dial and Automatic System Answer Direct Extension Dial answers the call first A Direct Extension Dial button must be programmed on a button with lights on the system display phone at extension 10 This feature will not work if it is programmed on a button without lights Assigned Not Assigned vY Select button then press a programmable button to assign Direct Extension Dial to that button Programming To assign or unassign a Direct Extension Dial button with lights at extension 10 1 2 Press Feature 0 0 Sys
38. 1 0 3 2 Enter a new time in 24 hour notation For example to set the time to 2 15 p m press 1 4 4 5 A display similar to the following appears System Time Data 1415 This time appears on system display phones as 2 15p 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode System Time 103 5 185 Toll Call Prefix 402 Description This System Programming procedure indicates whether users must dial a 0 or 1 before the area code to make a long distance call or just the area code and number This feature should be set to reflect the dialing patterns of your local telephone company Related Features This procedure affects the operation of dialing restrictions and permissions For more information see Allowed Phone Number Lists 407 Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 and Emergency Phone Number List 406 Valid Entries 1 O0or1 required before Area Code and Number 2 Area Code and Number Only Programming To change the Toll Call Prefix setting 1 Press Feature Lo Lo System Program L System Program Le 4 Lo 2 2 Press Next Data until the appropriate value displays 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 186 Toll Call Prefix 402 Touch Tone Enable F08 Description This feature is available only on system phones This feature lets a system phone user send touch tone signals on an outside call over a rotary line For example a u
39. 20 Follow 15 5 a Forced Account Code Entry 307 Forced Account Code List 409 Forwarding calls 400 moduei B6 o S S S S S SyS G GCD see Group Call Distribution Group Call Distribution 206 5 94 5 95 Group Calling 5 53 J5 96 5 98 _____ O Group Hunting 5 99 5 101 5 109 5 199 Group Paging 5964598 S Group Pickup 5 102 5 103 0 Groups Calling Hunt 5 99 5 101 5 109 5 110 S Night Service 5 142 0 overview Paging Pickup 5 102 5 103 5 151_ _ i i setting up 2 12 00 Co H Hands Free Answer on Intercom 37 Handset HFAI see ane tee Answer on Intercom Hold button Hold ar rs cae 5 106 OO OOOO O 2 Hold Reminder Tone 5 Hold Exclusive 584 OOS Holding a call 5 84 5 104 5 105 Cd Hotel Motel features description 2 14 o S O Outgoing Call Restriction Button 114 5 146 15 147 Wake Up Service Button 115 5 204 45 206 Hotline 603 5 107 f 5 108 _ _ S O Hotine Extemalls87 J Hotline support Hunt Group Extensions 505 Hunt Groups sani also Group Call Distribution description Hybrid nT ICLID see Individual Calling Line Identification Idle line preference see Automatic Line Selection Immediate call answering 2 20 _ Immediate ring 5 124 S o In Range Out of Building protectors 4 3 JA 3 JB 6 Incoming Caller ID 5 48 5 50 5 52 __
40. 350 BTU hour per 206 module during maximum power consumption U S Canada and other 110V countries 8 Amps maximum current at full system capacity two carriers with processor module and four 206 modules each Countries using 220V 4 4 Amps maximum current two carriers with processor module and four 206 modules each a 4 day memory backup 96 hours 68000 microprocessor 256Kbytes RAM 512Kbytes ROM Expansion Processor Module Specifications 8051 microprocessor 12mHz 8Kbytes ROM Extension J ack Specifications Ringing voltage 5VDC 140 VDC peak to peak trapezoidal wave shaping 35 to 38 Volt talk battery Ringing frequency 20 Hz PAGE J ack Specifications a Draws current on inner wire pair Provides contact closure on outer wire pair 600 Ohm impedance SMDR Output Format 1200 baud a No parity 8 data bits 2 stop bits XON XOFF protocol Carriage return Line feeds Environmental Requirements Control Unit A 2 Specifications Mount on a wall at least 2 feet 0 6 meters from the floor wall mounting required Locate within 5 feet 1 5 meters of the network interface jacks and a properly grounded electrical outlet not controlled by a switch using supplied 7 foot 2 1 meter cords a Mount the Expansion Carrier at least 6 and not more than 24 away from the Primary Carrier Operating temperature 32 to 104 F 0 to 40 C not in direct sunlight
41. 399 to program other phones of the same type For example you can program one PARTNER 18D phone then copy its settings to any other extensions that have PARTNER 18D or PARTNER 18 phones See Cony Settings Chapter 5 for a list of the programmed settings that are copied Changing Settings after Installation As your business grows or changes you will probably need to change the way your system was originally programmed This section provides some examples and lists the procedures you would use to change settings after installation For specific details on a procedure refer to the procedure name in Changing the System Clock You may need to change the system clock for daylight saving time after a prolonged power failure or after a system reset Use System Date 101 System Day 102 and System Time 103 to set the current date day and time Adding New Lines Key Extensions Use this section to add new lines to key extensions all extensions in Key mode in Hybrid mode extension 10 and any extensions set to Key P A Mode 313 orto add individual lines to pooled extensions If you add an outside line to your system you may need to adjust some line settings In particular use Dial Mode 201 if the new line is a rotary line Assignment 301 to assign the line to specific extensions Centralized Telephone Programming to specify when the line will start ringing at each extension that has the line and Line Access Re
42. 4 Assign a Night Service Button 503 at extension 10 5 Assign extensions X and Y to the Night Service Group 504 Using Auxiliary Equipment 4 23 PARTNER Attendant The PARTNER Attendant answers calls and directs them to a specified extension Calling Group or Hunt Group based on the digits the caller dials after listening to a list of choices in a recorded greeting For example the PARTNER Attendant could answer calls and tell callers to press 1 for Sales 2 for Parts 3 for Service and so on The PARTNER Attendant can be set up for immediate call handling or delayed call handling NOTE If you want calls answered and routed to designated extensions but do not require voice mail coverage you can use either the Automated Attendant Service of one of the voice messaging systems a PARTNER Attendant or the Direct Extension Diall feature It is recommended that you use only one type of automated answering option throughout the system for incoming calls Backup for Receptionist A common use of PARTNER Attendant is as a backup for the receptionist If the receptionist cannot pick up a call within a specified number of rings PARTNER Attendant handles it This prevents calls from going unanswered Figure 4 12 shows how the PARTNER Attendant would be connected to your system PARTNER Attendant Lines CONTROL UNIT Receptionists Desk Figure 4 12 Backup for Receptionist To Use Follow the instruction
43. 7 AUTOMATIC SYSTEM ANSWER Fool pe LINES 0 5 25 Poo TEES 5 Pool 883 DIAL 204 PRESS Next item to program DIAL a line number 01 24 another line DIAL 1 Assigned SERRE BBR BREE 2 Not Assigned Vv LINE COVERAGE EXTENSION DIAL 208 DIAL a line number 01 24 DIAL an extension number 10 57 PRESS new Item to program another ine PRESS _Remove to unassign ownership PRESS next item to program another line Vv DIRECT EXTENSION DIAL LINES DIAL 205 DIAL a line number 01 24 DIAL 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned PRESS ext Item to program another ine BREE RRR RRR RRR RRR ee m Procedures 207 313 314 and 315 shown in square dotted boxes w are not available when the system is configured for Key mode SERB RRR RR ERP IMPORTANT In Key mode the Number of Lines procedure changes Line Assignment 301 Line Access Restriction 302 Automatic Line Selection and Line Ringing to factory settings To change line assignments without affecting other settings use Line Assignment 301 In Hybrid mode the Number of Lines procedure changes Pool Line Assign ment 207 Pool Extension Assignment 314 and Pool Access Restriction 315 for existing pools back to factory settings Additionally it changes Line Assignment 301 Line Access Restriction 302 Automatic Line Selection and Line Ringing for individual lines back to factory settings To change pool assi
44. Busy 312 is Assigned for the recipient Considerations m The following instructions assume that system phones are set using Automatic Line Selection to automatically select outside lines or pools first and standard phones are set to select intercom first This means that when a user with a system phone lifts the handset the user hears outside dial tone if an outside line is available but when a user with a standard phone lifts the handset the user hears intercom dial tone m If you are using an MDC 9000 or MDW 9000 phone make sure the handset is on before using the following instructions Also these phones have no speaker so use the handset to make a call How to Make an Outside Call System Phone 1 Lift the handset or press Spar The green light next to a line or pool button is on steady and you hear outside dial tone 2 Dial the phone number On a system display phone the dialed number appears on the display If you are using a PBX or Centrex line you also may need to use a dial out code usually 9 before you dial a number outside the system To make an outside call on a specific line 1 Press the idle line button red and green lights are both off or dial _intercom 8 plus the two digit line number 2 If desired lift the handset 3 Dial the phone number Making Calls 5 129 To make an outside call using a specific pool 1 Press the idle pool button red and green lights are both off
45. Dial Do Not Disturb Night Service Outgoing Call Restriction Button Privacy Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back and VMS Cover all of which require programming on a button with lights Can also apply to Account Code Entry Background Music Call Coverage and Call Forwarding Call Follow Me if any of t For more information about programming these features see hem are programmed on buttons with lights Chapter 5 3 4 Learning About Telephones Continued on next page Table 3 1 Light Patterns for System Phones Continued Intercom Auto Light Pattern Line Button Pool Button Feature Dial Manual Button Signaling Button Wink A call on the line Green wink is either on hold means the call is long on short off or parked Green either on hold or wink means the parked at your call is on hold or extension parked at your Anyone who has extension Red the line can wink means the retrieve the held call is on hold or call parked at another extension Anyone who has the line can retrieve the held call Green Flutter A call is on A call on a line in Caller ID Either a call exclusive hold at the pool is on Inspect is on a transferred to the short on short off your extension exclusive hold at Wake Up extension and can be your extension Service call is programmed on retrieved only and can be being the button is now from your retrieved only scheduled from returning to your extension from your extension 10
46. Disturbljis active Do not forward your calls to any of the extensions in Hunt Group 7 which contains the extensions associated with the voice messaging system At an extension that has Call Forwarding activated if multiple calls are ringing the system forwards them one at a time This means that each subsequent call is not forwarded until the previous call is finished If you press the Call Forwarding button after a call starts to ring that call will not be forwarded You can program Call Forwarding on a button on a system phone Use a button with lights if you want a visual indication when your calls are forwarded When the green light is on your calls are forwarded when the green light is off calls ring at your extension Call Forwarding Call Follow Me F11 XX XX 5 41 m lf the Call Forwarding feature code and optional originating and destination extensions are programmed on a button with lights you can use the button to turn Call Forwarding on and off with one touch The lights show when Call Forwarding is on even if calls are forwarded to a different extension than the one stored on the button and you can still use the button to turn Call Forwarding off Programming Using 5 42 To program a Call Forwarding button 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program 2 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature 3 Press a programmable button pre
47. E E l E v J2 D 2 Z g a onference Calls Joining Calls Learning About Telephones 3 13 Dial Code Features Dial code features are features that you access by dialing a feature code at the telephone dialpad From a system phone you can press Feature or Intercom followed by the two or three digit code or press a programmed Auto Dial button from a standard phone you typically dial followed by the two or three digit code when you have intercom dial tone Some dial code features are not available on standard phones as noted by an asterisk in the following list m Account Code Entry Background Music m Call Coverage m Call Forwarding Call_Follow Me m Call Pickup m Conference Drop m Direct Line Pickup Active Line m Direct Line Pickup tdle Line m Exclusive Hold m Group Calling Ring Page m Group Hunting Ring Voice Signal m Group Pickup m Last Number Redial m Loudspeaker Paging m Message Light Off Message Light On m Personal Speed Dial Numbers m Recall m Save Number Redial Simultaneous Paging m Station Lock m Station Unlock m System Speed Dial Numbers m Touch Tone Enable m Voice Mailbox Transfer Available only on system phones t available only on system phones at extension 10 and 11 3 14 Learning About Telephones Using Auxiliary Equipment Contents Overview 4 1 m f a Device Has Trouble 4 3 An
48. Extension Diallis on callers hear ringing when the call is transferred regardless of the settings for Music On Hold 602 and Ring on Transfer 119 If the receptionist at extension 10 uses the Wake Up Service Button 115 to schedule wake up calls the recipients hear music on hold when they answer their wake up calls Considerations If Music On Hold is Not Active or if no audio source is connected callers on hold hear silence The audio source must be connected to the control unit using an RCA phono plug For more information see the PARTNER Communications System Installation guide The volume of the audio source can be adjusted using the music on hold volume adjustment screw on the primary processor module For more information see the PARTNER Communications System Installation guide If the audio source develops trouble such as a bad tape you can quickly turn it off by changing the Music On Hold setting to Not Active until you are able to solve the problem If you use Music On Hold to broadcast certain copyrighted music or material including songs or other material from radio broadcasts you may be required to obtain the permission of the copyright owner One way to obtain permission is to contact ASCAP BMI and or similar performing rights organizations to obtain a license Lucent Technologies disclaims any liability arising out of the failure to obtain such a license if required For alternative usually pr
49. Help If you have a problem with your system you may be able to solve it by following the appropriate troubleshooting procedures described in this chapter If not you can call for help in the continental U S call the hotline at 1 800 628 2888 outside the continental U S call your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer If you call have the following information ready so that the representatives can better help you m The kind of system you have for example PARTNER II Release 4 1 and its operating mode Key or Hybrid To determine the release number look at the processor module For the system s operating mode at extension 10 or 11 enter programming mode and try to access Access Mode 313 If you can your system is set for Hybrid mode If you can t your system is set for Key mode m The number of lines and extensions in your system m The type of phone system or standard and the model number if applicable System phone model numbers are located either on the upper right hand corner of the phone or on the dialpad overlay m f you followed a troubleshooting procedure and need more help tell the representative what you did Power Failure Operation When power to the system is cut off the first line on each 206 module automatically connects to the first extension on the module This allows you to make and answer calls during a power outage provided you have a standard phone conn
50. If both of these conditions occur the takes precedence For an incoming call IN appears unless the system is set up to receive Caller ID information In that case telephone numbers of incoming calls on lines with Caller ID service print in this field See Caller ID in Chapter 5 for more information Duration The duration of the call is shown in hh mm ss format where hh is the hour mm is the minutes and ss is the seconds This is the total time of the call including any time the call is on hold or being handled by the Automatic System Answer or Direct Extension Dial feature If an incoming call lasts less than one second this field contains all zeroes m Line Number This is the outside line used to make or receive the call If the system is set for Hybrid Mode and the call is on a line in a pool the number of the line in the pool prints here not the pool number Using Auxiliary Equipment 4 9 m Station Extension This usually is the extension that answered or placed the call For redirected incoming calls the ast extension on the call is shown on the report as follows For transferred incoming calls the destination extension For transferred outgoing calls the originating extension For pickup calls the extension picking up the call For forwarded calls the extension answering the forwarded call For coverage calls the extension answering the coverage call If the cal
51. If one answering machine is busy a second call will be answered by the second machine A setup such as this might be used by a movie theater to announce movie times to people calling for information Lines Ext X ANS MACH 1 ANS Ext Y IMACH 2 Figure 4 2 Multiple Answering Machines To Use m Go to the machines to manually play back messages m From any system extension make an intercom call to an answering machine extension When the machine answers dial its message retrieval code From outside the system call in on any line assigned to the machine When the machine answers dial its message retrieval code Note however when calling in from outside you can retrieve messages only from the first machine that answers To Program 1 If your system is configured for Hybrid mode use Line Access Mode 313 to change extensions X and Y from Pooled to Key Use Line Assignment 301 to assign all the lines to extensions X and Y that you want the machines to cover For extensions X and Y set Line Ringing for all lines to Immediate Ring Make sure extensions X and Y are not assigned as a Call Waiting 316 extension Pickup Group Extensions 501 Calling Group Extensions 502 Night Service Group Extensions 504 Extensions 505 Adjust both answering machines to answer on a different number of rings so they do not both try to pick up the same call For example set answering machine 1
52. Only 5 144 Outgoing Call Restriction 401 Programming To identify the types of outgoing calls that can be made on all lines at an extension 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 4 Lo L4 2 Atthe Extension prompt enter the number of the extension to be programmed For example to select extension 30 press 3 o 3 To change the type of call restriction press _Next Procedure until the appropriate value displays 4 To program another extension press _Next item or _Prev item until the extension number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Outgoing Call Restriction 401 5 145 Outgoing Call Restriction Button 114 Description This System Programming procedure identifies a button on the system phone at extension 10 to be used to change the current Outgoing Call Restriction setting for an extension This button is useful for quickly changing an extension s restriction For example after a guest s departure a hotel manager can change the Outgoing Call Restriction setting of the room phone from No Restriction to Inside Only so outside calls cannot be made from the phone after the guest checks out Conversely a receptionist can change the Outgoing Call Restriction setting of a conference room phone from Local Only which prevents users from making long distance calls to No Restriction so a client can dia
53. Overview Programming Contents Overview 2 1 Hardware Considerations 2 2 Initial System Setup 2 3 m Setting the System Clock 2 3 Assigning Lines 2 3 Key Extensions 3 4 5 2 m Customizing Extensions 2 2 7 Changing Settings to Support PBX or Centrex Services 2 8 m Recall Setting 2 8 Pooled Extensions B S Contents System Programming Options 2 9 Restricting Access to Outside Lines or Pools 2 9 Overriding Dialing Restrictions 2 10 m Hospitality Features 2 14 m Remote Programming 2 19 Backup Answering Options 2 21 Button Programming 2 21 m Changing Programming Type 2 19 Programming Overview After the system hardware is installed you can customize the system and individual telephones This chapter explains how to use programming to accomplish that There are two types of programming System Programming allows you to customize the system to meet the needs of your business When the system is first installed it uses factory settings that reflect the most commonly used options You can change system settings as needed You can perform System Programming from either extension 10 or 11 Because an extension cannot be in programming mode and handle calls at the same time consider using extension 11 for programming Doing so gives you the ability to program without disrupting call handling by the receptionist at extension 10 u Telephone Programming allows tel
54. Record Automatic System Answer 5 29 i i s s sidCY Direct Extension Dial 5 65 o Redial Reserving an outside line 5 130 Cid Resetting the system 5 181 5 182 6 17 Restriction Line Access 302 Outgoing Call 401 5 144 75 145 0 Pool Access 315 Index IN 5 Restrictions dialing disallowed phone numbers 5 70 5 71 sd forfaxmachine 4 15 sSSCSCSCid forlong distance 5 187 Cid forpooledextensions 5 152 lineaccess 5 116 _ oO ooo U U O locking an extension 5 175 5 176 Cd overriding 2 10 5 82 5 180 5 183 Cd 2 8 sd PBX Centrex operation 2 8 Ring on Transfer 1 Ring Distinctive 308 Ringer Equivalence Number REN Ringer volume controls 3 3 Ringing Line 5 124 45 125 0 Ringing patterns standard phones 3 3 9 o O system phones 3 5 __ y Ringing Idle Line Preference se Rings Call Coverage 116 5 40 _ _ Transfer Return 105 5 195 VMS Cover 117 5 198 1 10 A 1 A 3 Rotary dial 5 linas Te phones S SAC see Send All Calls Save Number Redial 5 165 ____ S SendAllCalls 5 166 o Set date day time Settings Copy 399 Setup initial Sharing an extension 3 12 o Simultaneous Paging 5 167 4 5 168 42000 sd Special dialing functions 5 173 4 5 174 IN 6 Index Specifications Speed dialing Auto Dial numbers 5 14 5 16 __ Z Forms D 2 D 3 Personal Speed Dial numbers 5 149 5 190 __ System Speed Dial nu
55. Station Select see Auto Dial buttons and Intercom Autodialer Disallowed List Assignments 405 Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 5 71 5 73 Display adjusting contrast assigning a name SE Index Display phone for programming dt aaaea for receptionist 2 20 ____ O Z O Z O O Distinctive Ring 308 5 77 __ i O Do Not Disturb 5 78 5 79 __ i i yO Doorphones description Doorphone Alert Extensions 606 5 80 lt Doorphone Extensions 604 605 DPT sed Pool o Drop Conference Dropping parties from a conference call 5 54 5 56 DSS see Autodial buttons and Intercom Autodialer DTMF signaling DXD see Direct Extension Dial e E Electrical specifications JA 2jA 3 ___ Electromagnetic Interference filter 4 3 B 6___ Emergency Phone Number List 406 5 82 15 83 EMI see Electromagnetic Interference filter Environmental requirements Exclusive Hold Expansion processor module 1 4 B 6 s SCSCidz Extension adding an swapping F FACE 5 92 ee CSCSCSCid Fax Machine Extensions 601 5 89 Fax machines dialing restrictions for 4 15 ss example setups 4 16 4 19 Cid Notify feature programming for 5 15 5 89 _ __ transferring calls to 4 14 i y Fax Management button FCC information JA 1 ooo Feature button 3 2 o Feature phones 3 11 o y O Features callhanding 3 13 0 dial code 3 14 0s overview speed dialing 2 9 2
56. Stop _Sokr Recall and _Transtr Touch Tone Enable assigned to codes 600 through 699 No number assigned to any code Programming To program System Speed Dial numbers 1 At extension 10 or 11 press Feature 0 0 A display similar to the following appears PROGRAM EXTENSION 10 Select a three digit code by pressing _Feature and dialing three digits between 600 and 699 For example to select code 600 press Feature 6 0 o If a number is assigned already to the code the number appears on the display If no number is assigned to the code a display similar to the following appears Blank 5 Lz The following display appears 5554757 To mark the System Speed Dial number precede the number by a x For example to mark the number 555 1001 press x 5 5 5 1 Lo Lo 1 The following display appears 5551001 At this point m To program another System Speed Dial number start from Step 2 m To program over an existing number enter the new number after selecting the three digit code m To remove a System Speed Dial number enter the number s three digit code and press _Mic HFAI once Press Feature 0 0 to exit programming mode System Speed Dial Numbers 5 183 Using System Phone You can lift the handset or press _Spkr before dialing 1 If you want to call on a specific line press the line button or press _In
57. The user must have access to an outside line in order to dial numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List 406 Line Assignment 301 PARTNER 34D S23 A alig 20 BL sli aCZ sli al 4 o0 oo ao oo PARTNER 18D PARTNER 18 oO o s00 aLe DCZ a aC Intercom Intercom PARTNER 6 ala sl4 alt sZ Qa Qa al sl Intercom Intercom Ext i Message Figure 5 1 Default Line Assignments Line Assignment 301 5 119 Considerations m You cannot assign a line that belongs to a pool as an individual line on that pooled extension A line must be assigned to a button with lights If a line is assigned to a button without lights you cannot access that line nor can you program anything else on the button On system phones assign only as many lines as that extension can use M ra the previous page For example PARTNER 18D phones can have up to 16 outside lines if you assign 18 lines the last two lines are assigned to buttons without lights and are not accessible In addition you cannot assign features to those buttons until the line assignments are removed PARTNER 6 MDC 9000 and MDW 9000 phones can have up to four outside lines You can assign multiple lines up to 24 to a standard phone but a single line phone can handle only one call at a time To make a call a user lifts the handset and dials 9 at intercom dial tone the system selects the first available line base
58. This feature requires a button with lights When the Do Not Disturb feature is on the light is on also indicating that the phone will not ring Use this feature when you do not want the PARTNER Attendant or the voice messaging system to transfer calls to you Use this feature if you are assigned to a Hunt Group and you leave your desk so calls to the Hunt Group will skip your extension and ring immediately at the next available extension in the group To avoid missing calls when this feature is not needed turn it off If Do Not Disturb is active at a doorphone alert extension the person at the doorphone hears signaling but the alert extension is not signaled Unanswered calls that are transferred from an extension with Do Not Disturb active will ring at that extension if they transfer return Do not use Do Not Disturb if you are covering calls for another extension because the calls will not ring at your extension 5 78 Do Not Disturb F01 Programming Using To program a Do Not Disturb button ai Press Feature Lo Lo System Program System Program Central Tel Program Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button with lights Press Feature 0 1 a fF oO N Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode From a system phone press the programmed button to turn Do Not Disturb on press it again to turn it off Use the
59. Waiting 316 extension Pickup Group Extension 501 Calling Group Extension 502 Night Service Group Extension 504 or Hunt Group Extension 505 Night Service with Auxiliary Equipment You can set up modems fax machines and answering machines to receive calls automatically after hours When Night Service is on calls ring immediately at the appropriate extensions so that no human intervention is required to transfer calls to the fax modem or answering machine When Night Service is off you can use the auxiliary equipment lines for normal business purposes so that lines are dedicated to auxiliary equipment only after hours By putting auxiliary equipment in the Night Service Group as described in this section auxiliary equipment can start ringing and answering calls whenever you turn Night Service on In other words the Night Service button at extension 10 acts like a switch turning auxiliary equipment on and off as well as putting the system into Night Service NOTE If you have a voice messaging system turning Night Service on also activates Night Service operation of the voice messaging system Figure 4 11 shows a system with a fax machine and a modem connected to separate extensions Line A is published as the fax line and line B is published as the modem line Ext x FAX CONTROL UNIT ia Y MODEM Figure 4 11 Night Service with Fax Machine and Modem To Use During the day lin
60. a call on a standard phone you can use the system phone s dialpad and fixed feature buttons to handle calls For example you can use the system phone to select a specific outside line or pool and conduct the call on the standard phone Or if someone is on a call using the standard phone someone else can put that call on hold by pressing Hold on the system phone To do this it is not necessary to lift the handset of the system phone Held calls do not ring back at a standard phone in a combination extension To retrieve a held call from the standard phone use Direct Line Pickup Active Line A standard phone s message waiting light will not light when Background Musicjis playing through the system phone s speaker If you have Caller ID only the system phone can display the Caller ID information The ringer equivalence number REN of a standard device or the combined REN of two devices cannot be greater than 2 0 The REN of a system phone is 0 0 Using Telephones Your system provides intuitive operation of basic call handling features plus dial code features that make it easy for users to handle calls flexibly and efficiently from both system and standard phones For more information on a specific feature refer to the feature name in Chapter 5 Basic Call Handling Features The following features are available from both system and standard phones ing Calls nswering Calls Par ransferring Calls S a
61. a pool are busy the user hears busy tone Automatic Line Selection can be programmed to change the way the system selects pools when a user lifts the handset to make a call To restrict an extension s access to all lines assigned to a pool use Pool Access Restriction 315 If users are not allowed outgoing access to a pool they hear reorder tone after dialing the pool access code at intercom dial tone Related Features You can store an outside number an intercom number or a feature code on a button so a user can dial the number with a single touch For information about programming and using Auto Dial buttons see Auto Dialing You can program outside numbers for one extension or the entire system so a user can dial a number by pressing Feature or on a standard phone plus a two or three digit code 80 99 for Personal Speed Dial numbers 600 699 for System Speed Dial numbers For more information see Personal Speed Dial Numbers and System Speed Dial Numbers If a user lifts the handset before pressing a line or pool button the system automatically selects the first available outside line or pool or the intercom The order in which the system makes the selection is determined by the Automatic Line Selection for the extension On either a system phone or a standard phone users also can use Direct Line Pickup tdle Linejto access a line for making an outside call Users can ring or page any
62. a programmable button PRESS Feature 0 6 CALL FORWARDING CALL FOLLOW ME PRESS a programmable button p 5 47 PRESS Feature 1 1 DIRECT LINE PICKUP ACTIVE LINE PRESS a programmable button DIAL left intercom 6 8 DIAL optional two digit originating extension number DIAL optional two digit destination extension number TO PROGRAM ANOTHER FEATURE After you program one feature continue with the instructions in the box for the next PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS DIAL a two digit code AUTO DIAL NUMBERS OUTSIDE AND INSIDE PRESS a programmable button To program an outside number DIAL the phone eee to 28 Dialing aries DIAL the new extension s number TO ERASE A FEATURE OR AUTO DIAL BUTTON PRESS the programmed button PRESS Mic HEAr TO END PROGRAMING MODE PRESS Feature Lo Lo p 5 149 DIAL ae prione eee to 28 digi nclud ial functions see Dialing Ees p 5 173 To program an extension number PRESS left intercom DIAL the extension number to ring the extension or x plus the extension number to voice signal the extension 8 473 DIRECT LINE PICKUP IDLE LINE PRESS a programmable button DIAL left intercom 8 DO NOT DISTURB p 5 78 PRESS a programmable button with lights PRESS Feature 0 1 ts EXCLUSIVE HOLD PRESS a programmable button PRESS Feature Lo 2 GROUP CALLING RING PAGE For ringing the group
63. an intercom call disconnects the call m Whenever your PBX or Centrex documentation tells you to press the switchhook when you are on an outside call use the Recall feature instead If you are already on a call most PBX or Centrex systems require that you press the switchhook to get a new dial tone then dial a feature access code to access a specific PBX or Centrex service Ona system phone press a programmed button or press Feature o 3 to use Recall On a standard phone first press and release the switchhook to get intercom dial tone then send a Recall signal by pressing o 3 Ona standard feature phone that has a Recall or Flash button first press the Recall or Flash button to get intercom dial tone then send a system Recall signal by pressing 4 o 3 You can program a Recall button on a system phone to send a Recall signal with one touch Programming To program a Recall button 1 a FF N Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button Press Feature Lo La Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode 5 160 Recall F03 Using To access a PBX central office or Centrex feature such as Call Waiting while active on an outside line System Phone 1 2 3 Press the programmed button or p
64. another system extension where XX is an extension number from 10 57 Users can activate this feature from their own extension Call Forwarding or from any other extension in the system Call Follow Me Related Features An extension s outside calls on lines or pools assigned to the extension are eligible for Call Forwarding only if Line Ringing is set to Immediate Ring or Delayed Ring and Line Access Restriction 302 or Pool Access Restriction 315 is set to No Restriction or In Only If an extension in a Hunt Group 505 activates Call Forwarding the system considers the extension unavailable when a call goes to the Hunt Group If an extension has VMS Coverjand Call Forwarding active calls ring at the Call Forwarding destination extension they are not covered by the voice messaging system If an extension has Call Coverage and Call Forwarding active calls are routed to the Call Forwarding destination extension Call Forwarding takes precedence Call Forwarding does not apply to parked calls See Call Park Considerations You can forward outside intercom and transferred calls You cannot forward group calls calls to doorphone alert extensions voice signaled calls Voice Interrupt on Busy calls coverage calls or transfer return calls Calls cannot be forwarded outside the system The phone at the extension from which calls are being forwarded beeps once each time a call is forwarded unless Do Not
65. are assigned to all system extensions You can then use Line Assignment 301 to assign lines 9 and 10 to specific extensions Valid Entries 2 lines per 206 or 200 module plus 4 lines per 400 module Programming To assign lines to the system at initial system setup 1 Press Feature o 0 System Program System Program 1 Lo 4 2 Dial two digits for the number of outside lines in the system 01 24 that you want to assign to all extensions or to the main pool For example dialing Lo e means that all extensions are assigned lines 1 through 6 or lines 1 through 6 are assigned to the main pool 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Number of Lines 104 5 143 Outgoing Call Restriction 401 Description This System Programming procedure identifies the types of outgoing calls that can be made on all lines at an extension See Dialing Restrictions and Permissions in Chapter 2 for a summary of calling restrictions Related Features m This restriction also applies to lines that a user has access to with Direct Line Pickup lidle Line To override this feature users can dial Marked and numbers from an and the Emergency Phone Number List 406 Also if a System Password is defined PARTNER model phone users can enter it to override restrictions m You can program a button on the system phone at extension 10 to be used to quickly change an e
66. are entries in the Forced Account Code List 409 only valid account codes and any other entered digits up to 16 print on the call report m Marked System Speed Dial Numbers appear on the call report as Fnnn where nnn is the Speed Dial code If you use Automatic System Answeror Direct Extension Dial you may want to set SMDR Talk Time 611 to Active to print on call reports the time a user spends on an incoming outside call from the time the user answers the call to the time the call is disconnected from the system m You can use SMDR Output Format 610 to identify whether a maximum of 15 digits or 24 digits is printed for dialed numbers on the call report m For instructions on notifying the system that the printer has been aligned to the top of a new page see SMDR Top Of Page 609 m f you use Caller ID SMDR reports include the telephone numbers of incoming calls Considerations This feature requires special hardware and or software For more information see Call Reporting Devices SMDR in Chapter 4 Valid Entries 1 All Calls outgoing and incoming vY 2 Outgoing Only Programming To identify the type of calls to include for call reporting 1 Press Feature o 0 System Program System Program e o Le 2 Press _Next Data until the appropriate value displays 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 170 SMDR Record Type 608 SMDR Talk Time 611
67. as both a hotline and a doorphone Assigning a doorphone extension as a hotline extension cancels the doorphone setting m Do not assign hotline phones to extension 10 16 22 28 34 40 46 or 52 which are reserved as power failure extensions The hotline phone can receive transferred calls but the user at that extension should not pick up the handset until the phone rings Valid Entries A hotline extension 11 15 17 21 23 27 29 33 35 39 41 45 47 51 53 57 An alert extension 10 57 or 70 for the loudspeaker paging system No hotline or alert extension assigned Example A supermarket installs a hotline phone at its meat counter When a customer uses the hotline phone the butcher s phone rings Alternatively if the loudspeaker paging system is programmed as the alert extension a sales clerk could request a price check over the loudspeaker simply by lifting the handset of the hotline phone Hotline 603 5 107 Programming To identify a hotline extension and its alert extension 1 Press Feature Lo Lo System Program System Program la 6 Lo 3 2 Atthe Extension prompt enter the hotline extension number see Valid Entries on the previous page For example to program extension 33 as the hotline press 3 3 3 AttheData prompt enter the alert extension number see Valid Entries on the previous page For example to program extension 32 as the alert ex
68. automatic fax call comes in on a line covered by the PARTNER MAIL system the Automated Attendant Service of that system may be programmed to automatically transfer the call to a fax extension or to the extension Hunt Group for the fax machines if you have multiple fax machines See the PARTNER MAIL documentation for instructions Valid Entries 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned Programming To identify a Fax Machine Extension 1 Press Feature Lo Lo System Program System Program la 6 Lo 1 2 Atthe Extension prompt enter the extension to which the fax machine is connected For example to select extension 30 press 3 0 3 To assign or unassign the extension press Next Data until the appropriate value displays 4 To identify another extension press _Next item Or Prev Item until the extension number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Fax Machine Extensions 601 5 89 Forced Account Code Entry 307 Description This feature applies only to system phones This System Programming procedure identifies specific extensions at which users must enter an account code prior to making outside calls The account code can be used to charge telephone calls to a department or client the account code prints on call reports if you are using SMDR Station Message Detail Recording or a call accounting package Related Features
69. been answered by the answering machine by joining the call from any system phone When you do so the system sends the answering machine a signal that makes it hang up The following are ways you can connect answering machines to your system m Single answering machine This basic setup can cover all the lines in the system Anyone on the system can call the machine to retrieve messages m Multiple answering machines lf you get too many calls for one machine to cover connect two or more machines to cover all calls m Personal answering machine An answering machine can share an extension with a phone to answer calls to the extension NOTE If you have an answering machine and a phone on the same extension the answering machine will be able to answer calls only when the phone is idle 4 4 Using Auxiliary Equipment Single Answering Machine The single answering machine setup Figure 4 1 serves the entire system The answering machine is connected to its own extension and can cover all the lines in the system or as many lines as you assign to it You can install an answering machine on an extension by itself or combine it with a system phone or a standard phone on the same extension see Combination Extensions in the PARTNER Communications System Installation guide Telephone optional I Lines Figure 4 1 Single Answering Machine To Use Go to the machine to manually play back
70. before pressing a line or pool button or else the call the user is active on is disconnected and the user is connected to the call on the line or pool button that was pressed m The user can inspect outside calls that appear on intercom buttons If the call is an intercom call the default display is shown m lf users are not active on a call they can press line pool and intercom buttons to view Caller ID or Call Coverage information for those lines however if they pick up the handset they will join or answer the call shown on the display Programming To program a Caller ID Inspect button 1 Press Feature Lo o System Program System Program Central Tel Program Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature 2 3 Press a programmable button with lights 4 Press Feature 1 Zz 5 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode 5 50 Caller ID Inspect F17 Using 1 While active on a call press the programmed button The green light flutters Caller ID Inspect is activated 2 Press a line pool or intercom button The Caller ID or Call Coverage information for the selected line pool or intercom displays 3 Press the programmed button to deactivate the feature The feature is deactivated automatically if you hang up the handset or press any button other than a line pool or intercom button The green light is off when the feature is deactivated
71. before the system answers it 1 2 Press Feature 0 Lo System Program _System Program 1 1 2 To change the number of rings press _Next Data until the appropriate value displays Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 62 Direct Extension Dial Delay 112 Direct Extension Dial Lines 205 Description This System Programming procedure identifies the lines on which incoming calls are to be answered for Direct Extension Dial Related Features You must program a button on the system display phone at extension 10 to turn Direct Extension Dial on and off Use Direct Extension Dial Button 113 to program the button Calls that ring on lines programmed with Direct Extension Dial are picked up after two rings as a default To change the number of rings use Extension Dial Delay 112 You must use Direct Extension Dial Record Playbackj to record a message to prompt callers to dial an extension number or Hunt Group number after the system answers an outside call You can set SMDR Talk Time 611 to Active to include the Talk field on call reports For an incoming outside call answered by Direct Extension Dial this field shows the call duration minus the time the greeting played and the caller waited for someone to answer the call Considerations All lines programmed with Direct Extension Dial should be assigned to extension 10 or its transfer return extension If a c
72. button is pressed the feature is deactivated To activate Privacy again you must press the button This feature applies only to active calls Any user can retrieve a held call unless Exclusive Hold is used Considerations m f you want to be able to intercept calls routed to an auxiliary device such as an answering machine voice messaging system or PARTNER Attendant make sure Automatic Extension Privacy is Not Assigned for the auxiliary equipment extension m Standard phones and system phones without a programmed Privacy button cannot override this feature once it is assigned to an extension Valid Entries 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned Automatic Extension Privacy 304 5 17 Programming To change the Automatic Extension Privacy setting for an extension 1 Press Feature o o System Program System Program 3 Lo 4 2 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed For example to program extension 16 press 1 6 3 To assign or unassign Automatic Extension Privacy press _Next Data until the appropriate value displays 4 To program another extension press _Next Item or Prev item until the extension number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 18 Automatic Extension Privacy 304 Automatic Line Selection Description This Telephone Programming procedure determines the line or pool a user is conn
73. code supplied by your System Manager using one of the following methods a Dial it manually using the phone s dialpad m Dial a System or Personal Speed Dial number programmed with the account code m Press an Auto Dial button programmed with the account code Press an idle line or pool button m f a Forced Account Code List exists and the account code is valid or if the Forced Account Code List is empty you hear outside dial tone Go to Step 6 m lf a Forced Account Code List exists and the account code is not valid you are denied access to an outside line Check the account code with the System Manager then repeat this procedure starting from Step 1 Make the telephone call To change the account code while on a call a Press the programmed Account Code Entry button or press Feature 1 2 b Enter a different account code c Press the programmed Account Code Entry button or press Feature 1 2 If a Forced Account Code List exists and the account code is invalid you hear denial tone Verify the account code then repeat Step 7 making sure to enter a valid account code Account Code Entry F12 5 7 Allowed List Assignments 408 Description This System Programming procedure lets you assign up to four Allowed Phone Number Lists to specified extensions Related Features You must use Allowed Phone Number Lists 407 to create the lists of allowed telephone numbers before you use this proc
74. code in Speed Dial numbers that must dial out of the PBX or Centrex system m Personal Speed Dial codes cannot be programmed onto Auto Dial buttons m You can dial Personal Speed Dial numbers on a standard phone but the numbers must be programmed from extension 10 or 11 Valid Entries Any phone number up to 28 characters consisting of the digits 0 9 x 4 and special dialing functions that you can access by pressing _Hold Pause Mic HEAI Stop _Spkr Recall and _transtr Touch Tone Enable assigned to codes 80 through 99 No number assigned to any code Personal Speed Dial Numbers 5 149 Programming To program Personal Speed Dial numbers 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program 2 Dial the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature 3 Select a two digit code by pressing Feature and dialing two digits between 80 and 99 For example to select code 81 press _Feature 8 1 If a number is assigned already to the code the number appears on the display If no number is assigned to the code a display similar to the following appears Blank 4 Enter the phone number exactly as you would dial it 5 Atthis point m To program another Personal Speed Dial number start from Step 3 m To program over an existing number enter the new number after selecting the two digit code m To remove a Personal Speed Dial number enter t
75. de ces entreprises Les r parations de mat riel homologu doivent tre effectu es par un centre d entretien canadien autoris d sign par le foumisseur La compagnie de t l communications peut demander a l utilisateur de d brancher un appareil a la suite de r parations ou de modifications effectu es par l utilisateur ou a cause de mauvais fonctionnement Pour sa propre protection l utilisateur doit s assurer que tous les fils de mise a la terre de la source d nergie lectrique des lignes t l phoniques et des canalisations d eau m talliques s il y en a sont raccord s ensemble Cette pr caution est particuli rement importante dans les r gions rurales A AVERTISSEMENT L utilisateur ne doit pas tenter de faire ces raccordements lui m me il doit avoir racours a un service d inspection des installations lectriques ou un electrician selon le cas L indice de charge IC assign a chaque dispositif terminal indique pour viter toute surcharge le pourcentage de la charge totale qui peut tre raccord e a un circuit t l phonique bouci utilis par ce dispositif La terminaison du circuit bouci peut tre constitu e de n importe quellie combinaison de dispositifs pourvu que la somme des indices de charge de l ensemble des dispositifs ne d passe pas 100 No d homolagation 230 3756A No de certification CSA LR 60486 L indice de charge 7 C 4 FCC and IC Information Speed Dial For
76. device from Extensions electrical surges System phone two Lucent Technologies IROB protectors Standard device one Lucent Technologies IROB protector plus carbon block protection System phones Lucent Technologies SYSTIMAX Bulk Nonplenum DIW cable Lucent Technologies SYSTIMAX Bulk Plenum HALAR HALAR cable or at least 2 pair 4 wire star home run not loop Other standard telecommunications equipment single line phones fax machines answering machines etc 1 pair 2 wire mounting cords Lucent Technologies D2R mounting cords recommended Bridging adapter Lucent Technologies 267F2 Range 1 000 feet 305 meters for system phones 3 000 feet 915 meters for standard devices Safety U S Meets UL 1459 Issue 2 Requirements Canada Meets CSA C22 2 225 All other countries Meets IEC950 Second Edition and EN60950 Second Edition Government U S FCC Part 68 Approvals and FCC registration number U S KF AS5 USA 61630 KF E Local Phone MF refer to FCC Reg No on side of carrier i outside line jack 0 9A per line jac Ifar manon Jack type RJ11C Loop start lines IC CP01 Issue 7 IC registration number Canada 230 3756A IC CS03 Issues 6 amp 7 Load Number 7 Loop start lines Specifications A 3 Maintenance Repair and Ordering Information Maintenance Your system is designed to provide trouble free performance without any special maintenance procedures To reduce
77. entry E Next Data and _Prev Data cycle forward and backward through the valid entries These buttons work only for fixed data such as a line or extension number They do not work for variable data such as date time password telephone numbers or doorphone assignments m Remove returns the current setting to the factory setting When using Assignment 301 removes lines from an extension when using Pool Extension Assignment 314 removes pools from an extension E Enter ends an entry of variable length such as a telephone number in an Allowed Phone Number List m System Program starts the System Programming process E Central Tel Program starts the Centralized Telephone Programming process to customize individual telephones centrally from extension 10 or 11 E Feature when followed o o0 enters or exits programming mode wid enters a wildcard a character that matches any digit dialed in telephone numbers in Allowed Phone Number Lists 407 Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 and the Forced Account Code List 409 Button Locations 2 16 When programming from a PARTNER model phone at extension 10 or 11 keep in mind that the button you press at the programming extension may be ina different location on the phone to which the programming applies Figure 2 Jon page 2 17 shows the relative location of buttons on each PARTNER model phone For example the button labeled E
78. example from a PARTNER 18D phone to a PARTNER 18 phone Pooled extension settings can be copied to key extensions except for extension 10 Key extension settings can be copied to pooled extensions Programming To copy the programmed settings from one extension to another of the same type 1 2 Press Feature Lo Lo System Program System Program la 3 9 9 Atthe Extension prompt enter the source extension to copy from For example to copy the current settings from extension 18 press 1 3 Atthe Data prompt enter the target extension to copy to any extension except the source extension is valid For example to copy to extension 22 press 2 2 At this point m To copy the same settings to another extension enter the new extension number m To copy another extension s settings press _Next Item or _ Prev Item until the extension number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Copy Settings 899 5 57 Dial Mode 201 Description This System Programming procedure identifies individual lines as touch tone or rotary You should check with your local phone company if you are not sure which type of line is being provided to you Related Features m If you are having difficulty using touch tone phones on rotary lines you may need to adjust the Rotary Dialing Timeout 108 m lf the system has rotary lines yo
79. extensions that can receive an intercom call while busy on another call Considerations Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back must be programmed on a button with lights This feature will not work if it is programmed on a button without lights Programming To program a Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program 2 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature 3 Press a programmable button with lights 4 Press Feature 1 8 5 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using To respond to a voice interrupt on busy call you hear two beeps and the originator s voice be aware that the third party to whom you are speaking probably also will hear the two beeps and the faint sound of the originator s voice 1 Ask the party with whom you are speaking to hold but do not put the call on hold 2 Press the Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button The green light next to the Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button turns on Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back is activated 3 Respond to the originator of the voice interrupt on busy call The third party with whom you were originally speaking does not hear your response but you can hear that third party 4 Press the Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button again whether or not the originator has hung up to resume the conversation with t
80. following materials are available the order numbers are in parentheses System Planner 518 455 338 provides the forms needed to plan and record how your system and telephones are to be programmed Installation 518 455 333 provides instructions for installing the system User Instruction Cards 518 455 340 contain basic instructions for using system phones PARTNER 34D Programming Overlay 847531696 helps with System Programming from a PARTNER 34D phone PARTNER 18D Programming Overlay 847531688 helps with System Programming from a PARTNER 18D phone MDW 9000 Wireless Telephone Installation 503 801 111 explains how to install the MDW 9000 wireless telephone MDW 9000 Wireless Telephone Quick Reference 503 801 110 contains basic instructions for using the MDW 9000 wireless telephone MDC 9000 Cordless Business Telephone Installation 503 801 101 explains how to install the MDC 9000 cordless telephone MDC 9000 Cordless Business Telephone Quick Reference 503 801 100 contains basic instructions for using the MDC 9000 cordless telephone PARTNER MAIL Voice Messaging System Installation and Use 585 322 101 provides instructions for installing programming and maintaining your PARTNER MAIL system PARTNER MAIL Voice Messaging System Planning Guide and Forms 585 322 501 provides the forms needed to plan and record how your PARTNER MAIL system is to be programmed PARTNER MAIL Voice Messaging System User
81. from the time the user answers the call to the time the call is disconnected from the system You can use Display Language 303 to specify the language in which the call report page header should print Considerations This feature requires special hardware and or software For more information see Call Reporting Devices SMDR in Chapter 4 This procedure is skipped in the sequence of programming procedures when cycling To use this procedure enter the code directly Make sure the paper in the printer is aligned at the top of a new page Press Feature 0 Lo System Program System Program 6 Lo 2 The system responds by printing the call report header Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 172 SMDR Top Of Page 609 Special Dialing Functions Description This feature lets you add special characters for System Speed Dial numbers Personal Speed Dial numbers and Auto Dial numbers as follows Function Button Display Description Pause Hold P Inserts a 1 5 second pause in the dialing sequence to wait for a response such as a dial tone or computer voice message Recall Ls R Sends a timed switchhook flash needed to alert the system on the other end such as a PBX or Centrex system and to use some local telephone company custom calling features such as Call Waiting Use Recall only as the first entry in an Auto Dial or Speed Dial number Stop moma S Stops the dial
82. in this guide See also Industry standard device rr R RAU Remote Administration Unit An auxiliary device that lets you perform system programming from a remote location Recall A system feature that sends a timed switchhook flash to let you recall a dial tone to make another call or to access a PBX or Centrex service Use Recall only on an outside call using Recall on an intercom call disconnects the call Ringer Equivalence Number REN A measure of the power it takes to ring a phone or other telecommunications device usually shown on a label on the bottom of the device GL 6 Glossary CM S Send All Calls Lets you send calls immediately to Call Coverage or to the voice messaging system Simultaneous Paging A feature that lets you make announcements over the loudspeaker and all idle system phones with speakers in Calling Group 1 See also Loudspeaker paging system SMDR Station Message Detail Recording See Call reporting Speed dialing A feature that lets a user dial a telephone number quickly by dialing a short code Standard phone An industry standard touch tone or rotary phone such as you might have in your home Some standard phones include special feature buttons for frequently used calling functions See also Feature ron ana Industry standard device Station See Extension Station Lock A feature that lets a user lock his or her extension to prevent other users from making out
83. incoming call when active on a call Outgoing Call Restriction 401 to prevent the extension from making certain types of outgoing calls on all system lines Disallowed List Assignments 405 to assign one or more Disallowed Phone Number Lists to the extension Use Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 to create the lists of outside numbers that extensions cannot dial Allowed List Assignments 408 to assign one or more Allowed Phone Number Lists to the extension Use Allowed Phone Number Lists 407 to create the lists of outside numbers that otherwise restricted extensions can dial Pickup Group Extensions 501 Calling Group Extensions 502 Night Service Group Extensions 504 Hunt Group Extensions 505 to place the extension in any of these groups See Setting Up Groups of Extensions later in this chapter for more information External Hotline 311 or Hotline 603 to identify the extension as one of these equipment types Setting Up Auxiliary Equipment later in this chapter provides an overview of the procedures you use for setting up devices such as voice messaging systems and call reporting devices Also Chapter 4 provides detailed information and example applications for auxiliary equipment Programming 2 5 Copy Settings The recommended way to set up your system is to program one extension for each type of phone in the system then use Copy Settings
84. is good for moderate traffic The fax machine has its own line line A the number of which is published as the fax number The fax line can be used by other phones when all other lines are busy The fax machine is connected to its own extension extension X Fax Line A CONTROL UNIT Figure 4 6 Single Fax Machine To Use The fax machine automatically answers all calls that come in on the fax line If a call comes in on another line you can transfer the call to the fax extension see Transferring a Call to the Fax Machine If you have programmed a Fax Management button you can transfer a call to the fax machine with a single touch as well as monitor the status of the fax machine csel Ma eaen earlier in this chapter When you send a fax the system automatically selects the fax line To Program 1 If extension X is a key extension use Line Assignment 301 to assign only line A to extension X If extension X is a pooled extension use Pool Line Assignment 207 to remove line A from all pools and then use Line Assignment 301 to assign only line A to extension X 2 Set Automatic Line Selection for extension X to select line A only Set Automatic Line Selection to select line A last on all other extensions 3 Set Line Ringing for line A on extension X to Immediate Ring On all other extensions set line A to Delayed Ring or No Ring 4 Set Automatic Extension Privacy 304 for exten
85. is ringing or select a specific line or pool if more than one is ringing When the telephone is ringing lift the handset You are connected to the incoming call If more than one line or pool is ringing you are connected to the line or pool that has been ringing for the longest time If the call is an intercom call and you have a display phone the caller s extension number and name if programmed appear on your display until you pick up the handset or turn on the speakerphone To answer a call on a specific line or pool 1 Press the line pool or intercom button for the call you want to answer 2 Lift the handset or press _spxr You are connected to the call To answer a call when you are already on a call 1 Press Hold The call you are on is placed on hold 2 Press the button for the new call You are connected to the new call 3 To return to the first call put the second call on hold then press the line pool or intercom button for the first call To answer a voice signaled call your phone beeps and you hear the caller s voice Ifthe microphone is on you can speak after the beep lf the microphone is not on press _Mic HFA or lift the handset To respond to a voice interrupt on busy call you hear two beeps and the originator s voice be aware that the third party to whom you are speaking probably also will hear the two beeps and the faint sound of the originator s voice
86. it does for outside calls m If the device works properly the problem is solved m If the problem remains call the hotline Standard Device Does Not Dial Out Properly Possible Cause A standard device with autodialing such as a modem does not recognize the intercom dial tone generated by the system What to do Change the setting for Intercom Dial Tone 309 for the extension to Machine so the system generates outside line dial tone for the extension m If the device works properly the problem is solved m If the problem remains call the hotline Poor Transmission Quality on Modem Possible Cause A high speed modem is connected through an extension jack on the control unit to a standard central office telephone line but the line quality is not sufficient to generate a clear signal when the modem transmits through the system interface What to do Either connect the modem directly to the network interface jack for a line or contact your local telephone company for information about upgrading the line quality m f the device works properly the problem is solved m If the problem remains call the hotline Call Records Wrap on SMDR Printout Possible Cause SMDR Talk Time 611 is set to Active andj SMDR Output Format 610 Jis set to 24 digits causing the combined length of the fields for a call record to be greater than the 80 characters supported by your printer What to do Reduce the font size or incre
87. item until the pool number shows on the display Then repeat Step 4 m To restrict another extension press _Next Procedure _Prev Procedure and begin at Step 2 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Pool Access Restriction 315 5 153 Pool Extension Assignment 814 Description This feature applies only to pooled extensions in Hybrid mode This System Programming procedure identifies the pools that are assigned to buttons at a pooled extension The system uses two buttons to represent the main pool 880 and one for each auxiliary pool 881 882 883 Up to five pool buttons can be assigned per extension Related Features You should use Pool Line Assignment 207 prior to this procedure to assign lines to or remove lines from pools You can use Line Assignment 301 to assign individual outside lines to buttons on a pooled extension Users must have access to an outside line or pool in order to dial numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List 406 You can use Automatic Line Selection to change the order in which the system selects lines or pools when the user at that extension lifts the handset or presses _Spkr to make a call Note that auxiliary pools 881 882 and 883 are not automatically added to an extension s Automatic Line Selection You can use Line Ringing to identify when each pool and individual line assigned to an extension should start ringing the factory setti
88. jack 32 Likewise reconnect the cord that was connected to extension jack 32 at its new location extension jack 29 Then the users can take their respective phones to their new locations keep the same extension numbers and retain the phones programmed settings Programming 2 7 Changing Settings to Support PBX or Centrex Services This section applies only if you use PBX or Centrex services with your system If it does not apply go to the next section System Programming Options m PBX services are provided by a private telephone switch m Centrex services are provided by your local telephone company from a Central Office CO outside your premises These services include the Centrex lines connected to your control unit modules and some set of features such as hold conference or transfer that are available on those lines Centrex services may be offered in your area under a different name For specific Centrex features to be available to you your company must subscribe to those features For specific information on using Centrex see the Centrex documentation provided by your local telephone company Some of the issues you should consider when setting up your system to work effectively behind a PBX or Centrex system are discussed below Chapter 5 explains how to use the programming procedures discussed here Recall Setting To set up your equipment to work properly with a PBX or Centrex system first set Recall
89. lets you identify extensions where PARTNER Attendants are connected to the system Doing so lets the system notify users with display phones when they are receiving a call that has been transferred from the PARTNER Attendant This procedure applies only to PARTNER Attendants do not use it with the Automated Attendant Service of a voice messaging system Related Features m For each PARTNER Attendant extension use Transfer Return Extension 306 to identify the extension to which a call should be routed if the destination extension does not answer Set Automatic Extension Privacy 304 to Not Assigned for the PARTNER Attendant extension if you want to be able to intercept calls routed to the device Considerations E Chapter 4 provides information on using PARTNER Attendants with the system m On system display phones AA or Automated Attendant displays when a call is being transferred from a PARTNER Attendant Transfer from AA or Transfer from Auto Att displays when a call transferred by a PARTNER Attendant was not answered and is being returned to your extension Valid Entries 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned Programming To identify an extension where a PARTNER Attendant is installed 1 Press Feature 0 o System Program System Program 6 Lo Zz 2 Enter the extension number to which the PARTNER Attendant is connected For example to select extension 27 press 2 z 3
90. light clears the next time the machine transmits or receives a call If the machine takes longer than four rings to answer the light shows fax trouble when the machine does answer the light changes to fax busy red steady Red steady Fax busy The fax machine is busy transmitting or receiving a call Green flash Fax calling The green flash indicates that the fax machine extension is calling you A fax machine with the Notify feature can call you automatically after it receives a transmission See Using the Fax Machine s Notif Feature on the next page Green flutter Fax transfer return A call you transferred to the fax machine was not answered and is returning to you Using Auxiliary Equipment 4 13 Transferring a Call to the Fax Machine There are two situations in which you would want to transfer a call to your fax machine m You answer an outside call and hear a fax machine signaling A fax signal is a single beep sequence beep beep beep If you hear this you should transfer the call immediately to the fax machine extension m You are on a call with a person who wants to send you a fax using the fax machine that is connected to his or her phone You can receive the fax by transferring the call to your fax extension Tell the other party to wait until he or she hears the fax signal before pressing the Start button on their fax machine In addition if you have a PARTNER MAIL sys
91. lists of up to 10 telephone numbers each Related Features m After completing this procedure you must use Allowed List Assignments 408 to assign the Allowed Phone Number Lists to specific extensions Allowed Phone Number Lists override Restriction 302 or Night Service with a System Password 403 There are other ways of overriding restrictions see Marked Emergency Phone List Numbers 406 jand for more information m The entries you must make to permit or restrict long distance calls differ depending on the setting for Toll Call Prefix 402 This setting tells the system whether a 0 for operator assisted calls or 1 for direct dial calls is required when users make long distance calls Considerations m Each list entry can include up to 12 digits You can use the wildcard character by pressing the Hold button on a system phone to match any single digit it appears as on the telephone display m f you are restricting an extension from placing long distance calls do not place numbers beginning with a 0 on an Allowed Phone Number List for the extension Once a user is active on an operator assisted call the user will be able to avoid dialing restrictions by asking the operator to dial restricted numbers m f you want to go to another programming procedure when entering phone numbers in a list you must use _Next Procedure Or _Prev Procedure to d
92. m For instructions on making outside calls ring directly in a Hunt Group see Group Call Distribution 206 m Hunt Group calls are not eligible for Call Coveragejor VMS Cover Related Features for Hunt Group 7 m This Hunt Group applies only to the voice messaging system For more information see Group Call Distribution 206 jLine Coverage Extension 208 J Automatic VMS Cover 310 VMS Hunt Delay 506 VMS Hunt Schedule 507 VMS Cover Rings 117 Voice Mailbox Transfer and VMS Cover m After you assign the extensions associated with the voice messaging system hardware to Hunt Group 7 you should set ne an F Return Extension 306 for those extensions to extension 10 or another extension with a person who can assist the caller Considerations for Hunt Groups 1 6 m Any number of extensions can be assigned to each Hunt Group In addition extensions can be in more than one Hunt Group m You can include multiple fax machines or answering machines in a Hunt Group m If you have a PARTNER MAIL system and multiple fax machines you can assign the fax machines to a Hunt Group Then you can program the PARTNER MAIL system so that when an automatic fax call comes in ona line covered by the PARTNER MAIL system s Automated Attendant Service the PARTNER MAIL system recognizes that it is a fax call and automatically transfers it to the first available fax machine in the group Hunt Group Extensions 505 5 109
93. m You can use Group Call Distribution 206 to assign outside lines to a Hunt Group Doing so allows outside calls on those lines to route directly into that Hunt Group instead of being transferred by the receptionist m Hunt Group calls are not eligible for Call Coverage or VMS Cover Considerations m Extensions can be in more than one Hunt Group Outside calls can be answered and transferred to a Hunt Group The voice messaging system PARTNER Attendant and the Direct Extension Dial feature also can transfer calls to a Hunt Group m Calls cannot be transferred to a Hunt Group if all extensions in that group are busy m f only one extension in a Hunt Group is available and that extension does not answer an incoming call the call returns to the extension that transferred the call or to that extension s transfer return extension after the programmed number of transfer return rings Group Hunting Ring Voice Signal I77G I 77G 5 99 Examples You can program a Group Hunting button on a system phone to ring or voice signal a specified Hunt Group with one touch If you have a voice messaging system you can program Hunt Group 7 intercom z z z on a button to retrieve messages with one touch Here are some useful applications for a Hunt Group m Place the extensions of employees who work in a department sharing calls such as a customer service group in a Hunt Group so that when a call comes in to the rece
94. name and extension number of the person assigned to the extension that did not answer the transferred call Line Ringing Line Ringing defines when each outside line or pool rings at a phone For each line or pool at an extension you can specify Immediate Ring Delayed Ring phone rings after a 20 second delay or No Ring The factory setting for line buttons is Immediate Ring the factory setting for pool buttons is No Ring Programming 2 19 Personal Speed Dialing Personal Speed Dial numbers are outside phone numbers that a user dials by pressing Feature or on a standard phone plus a two digit code Unlike System Speed Dial numbers which are available to all users in the system Personal Speed Dial numbers are available only at the extension for which they are programmed Users can store up to 20 Personal Speed Dial numbers Programming Telephone Buttons Telephone buttons without lines or pools assigned to them can be programmed for system features such as Exclusive Hold or Conference Drop or for telephone numbers so you can use the feature or dial the phone number with one touch Once programmed these buttons are called Auto Dial buttons because simply pressing the button automatically dials the feature code or telephone number A user who has a system phone with programmable buttons should consider programming them with a combination of frequently used features and outside and intercom telephone numbers Programmi
95. no one answers or the call is refused press the switchhook again to reconnect to the caller Transferring Calls 5 191 Transfer Return Extension 806 Description By default transferred calls return to the originating extension if they are not answered This System Programming procedure can be used to identify a different return extension for the extension that transfers a call Related Features m You can use Transfer Return Rings 105 to define the number of times all system extensions should ring with transferred calls before they return to their transfer return extensions m The transfer return extension for any extensions associated with PARTNER Attendant or voice messaging system hardware should be extension 10 or another extension with a person who can assist the caller AIT 607 is used to identify the extensions associated with the PARTNER Attendant hardware and Hunt Group Extensions 505 is used to identify the extensions associated with the voice messaging system hardware m If an extension has VMS Coverjactive unanswered calls to that extension are routed to the voice messaging system rather than to the transfer return extension m For transferred calls that are sent to a covering extension with Call if the covering extension does not answer within the specified number of the call rings the specified number of Transfer Return Rings 105 before it transfer returns If the covering extension has Do No
96. number of the person who activated the feature rather than Caller ID information m lf Coverage Call for XX does not display call the hotline In the continental U S help is available at 1 800 628 2888 Outside the continental U S call your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer 6 4 Troubleshooting Some Caller ID Information Does Not Display Possible Cause Not all calls on Caller ID lines will be displayed This varies by local phone company What to do If Caller ID information for a large number of calls is not displayed contact your local telephone company Intercom Autodialer Does Not Work Properly Possible Cause 1 Telephone cord is plugged into wrong jack on bottom of Intercom Autodialer What to do Plug the modular telephone cord into the correct jack see the PARTNER Communications System Installation guide for instructions m lf the Intercom Autodialer works properly the problem is solved m Ifthe problem remains go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 Intercom Autodialer is not receiving auxiliary power What to do Make sure the Intercom Autodialer is plugged into an electrical outlet m lf the Intercom Autodialer works properly the problem is solved m lf the problem remains go to Possible Cause 3 Possible Cause 3 The cord is defective What to do Unplug the cord from the base of the Intercom Autodialer and the wall jack Replace the cord with a cord that y
97. once then disappears as if it were answered Possible Cause 1 Automatic System Answer or Direct Extension Dial is turned on What to do Check to see if Automatic System Answer or Direct Extension Dial is turned on m f Automatic System Answer or Direct Extension Dial is turned on turn it off by pressing the programmed button at extension 10 m f Automatic System Answer or Direct Extension Dial is not turned on go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 An auxiliary device answers when it should not this could occur with a fax machine voice messaging system answering machine or modem What to do Be sure the device is set to answer correctly If the device answers before it should adjust it to answer on a later ring If the device should not answer calls at all turn off its auto answer feature Refer to the device s user manual m For every auxiliary device connected to your system either set the device itself to answer on a later ring when the Line Ringing for the device s extension is set to Immediate Ring or set the extension s Line Ringing to Delayed Ring For a voice messaging system check all of the settings associated with it Seelpage liora summary of procedures associated with the voice messaging system and Chapter 5 for complete details on each feature If the auxiliary device no longer answers calls automatically the problem is solved m Ifthe problem remains call the hotline In the continent
98. or 11 Overlays are provided with the system documentation Replacements can be ordered from the Lucent Technologies GBCS Publications Fulfillment Center See Reference Materials under Product Ordering Information in Appendix B on page 2 15 illustrates the Programming Overlays for the PARTNER model phones 2 14 Programming Prev Procedure Next Next Next Remove Procedure ltem Data Prev Prev Prev Enter Procedure Item Data Central Tel Program ON zH TIL I System Program i PARTNER 34D On OE TIL PARTNER 18D Figure 2 3 Programming Overlays for PARTNER mode l Phones Programming 2 15 During System Programming the normal functions of several buttons on the display phone at extension 10 or 11 change For example the left _intercom button becomes _System Program and the right _intercom button becomes Central Tel Program The Programming Overlay identifies these buttons You use the following special buttons while programming Em Next Procedure and _Prev Procedure cycle forward and backward through the programming procedures You can use these buttons to select a procedure E Next item and _Prev item cycle forward and backward through a procedure s parameters A parameter is typically an outside line a pool an extension or a telephone list
99. or press _intercom plus the three digit pool access code 880 881 882 or 883 2 If desired lift the handset 3 Dial the phone number To reserve a busy line or pool so your phone beeps when the line or pool becomes free this is useful when you share a line such as a WATS line with other people 1 Press the busy line or pool button red light is on steady without lifting the handset or pressing Sokr 2 When the line is free and your phone beeps lift the handset and dial the number If more than one person reserves a line all their phones beep when the line is free The first person to pick up the phone after the beep gets the line and the other reservations are canceled Standard Phone 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Dial _9 to get an outside line You hear outside line dial tone 3 Dial the phone number If you are using a PBX or Centrex line you also may need to use a dial out code usually 9 before you dial a number outside the PBX or Centrex system To make an outside call on a specific line 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Dial 8 plus the two digit line number 3 Dial the phone number To make an outside call using a specific pool 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Dial the three digit pool access code 880 881 882 or 883 3 Dial the phone number How to Make an Intercom Call An intercom call or insi
100. outside line for a total of one outside and four inside parties Related Features You can use Automatic Extension Privacy 304 to prevent other extensions from joining calls on a specific extension This is especially useful for answering machines fax machines modems and credit card scanners because trying to join one of these devices could interfere with its operation Users can program Privacylonto a system phone button to allow or prevent others from joining their calls as needed Caller IDjinformation displays if you join a call however you cannot join a Privacy call at any extension that has Privacy activated If a line is not assigned to a user s extension and access to that line is not restricted for that extension the user can use Direct Line Pickup Active Line to join a call on that line You can join a call answered by Automatic System Answer or Direct Extension Dial xtension Dial by pressing the line button and lifting the handset The message stops playing when you join the call Pooled extension users can add other parties to a call by pressing pool buttons See Considerations 5 112 You cannot join a call by pressing a pool button You cannot join an intercom call or a conference call at another extension You cannot join a call on an extension that has a voice interrupt on busy call in progress You can join a call that is being answered by the voice messaging system but only if Au
101. pages Table B 1 Sources of Additional Equipment and Replacement Parts U S B 6 Maintenance E To use Table B 1 first locate the item you want A triangle a indicates where you can obtain it SOURCE U S Lucent Lucent Lucent Lucent Technologies Technologies Technologies Technologies Catalog Sales Authorized National Parts Sales Office Dealer Sales Center PARTNER 34D corded telephone PARTNER 18D corded telephone PARTNER 18 corded telephone PARTNER 6 corded telephone MDW 9000 wireless telephone MDC 9000 cordless telephone PARTNER CA48 Intercom Autodialer Button label package specify telephone model Button label package PARTNER CA48 Intercom Autodialer Handset AB1A Standard for PARTNER model phones Amplified handset K6S Optional for hard of hearing users with PARTNER model phones Handset cord 9 ft coiled Connects handset to telephone Telephone mounting cord D4BU Connects phone to wall jack jack panel or 206E or EC module ext jack Specify length 2 7 or 14 ft Modular telephone extension cord 8 connector Extends the D4BU mounting cords Specify length 14 25 50 75 or 100 ft To locate the nearest Lucent Technologies Authorized Dealer check your local telephone directory s yellow pages Table B 1 Sources of Additional Equipment and Replacement Parts U S Maintenance B 7 FCC and IC Information Federal Communications Commissi
102. pool a user at the restricted extension hears busy tone if Direct Line Pickup is used to answer a call on that line which is ringing at another extension but the user can join a call or access a held or transferred call on the line m Direct Line Pickup cannot be used to access an active call at an extension that has Privacy activated or that is part of a Conference Call or a held call Exclusive Hold at an extension that used m Calls picked up with this feature get Caller ID information unless Line Access Restriction 302 or Pool Access Restriction 315 is used to prevent users at specific extensions from viewing Caller ID for ringing calls Considerations m This feature is useful when users are requested or paged to pick up a call on a specific line that does not appear on their phone m Users cannot access conference calls using this feature m You can program a Direct Line Pickup Active Line button on a system phone to pick up a line by pressing the button then dialing the two digit line number Programming To program a Direct Line Pickup Active Line button 1 Press Feature Lo Lo System Program System Program Central Tel Program Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button 2 3 4 Press left intercom 6 8 5 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Direct Line Pickup Active Line I68LL 5 67
103. rapidly press and release the switchhook Pressing the switchhook for 1 4 to 1 second sends a signal over the line called a switchhook flash However do not press the switchhook too quickly If you press the switchhook and nothing happens try again and press it a little longer NOTE If your feature phone has a button labeled Recall or Flash use the button instead of pressing the switchhook If you use the system with PBX or Centrex lines your PBX or Centrex documentation may tell you to press the switchhook to access features Use the Recall feature instead See Recall in Chapter 5 Limitations 3 10 Each standard device requires one touchtone receiver to be available in order to dial a call intercom or outside Each 206 module has one touchtone receiver each 400 module has two touchtone receivers The combination of modules in your system determines the number of standard devices that can dial simultaneously For example if you have two 206 modules and two 400 modules six standard devices can dial out at the same time If seven standard devices try to dial out simultaneously the seventh device will not get dial tone until one of the other six finishes dialing Also because standard phones do not have system line or pool buttons feature buttons or dedicated function buttons basic call handling procedures are sometimes different from those for system phones In addition the following actions cannot be perf
104. ring or page a Calling Group or to transfer a call to a Calling Group with one touch Examples Here are some useful applications for this feature m Group page employees for general announcements this feature is an inexpensive alternative to a paging system Remember to install system phones with built in soeakers all models except the MDC 9000 and MDW 9000 where you want employees to hear announcements m Put the extensions of people with similar responsibilities in a Calling Group so when a caller needs to talk with anyone in the group the receptionist can transfer the call to the group instead of making separate intercom calls 5 96 Group Calling Ring Page I7G I 7G For example a car dealership puts all extensions for the sales staff into Calling Group 1 To let a prospective customer talk to any salesperson the receptionist simply transfers the call to the group by dialing _Transtr z 1 All phones in Calling Group 1 ring and the customer is connected to the first salesperson to answer Alternatively the receptionist can page the group through the speakers of their system phones by pressing _ntercom x Z hd Programming Using To program a Calling Group button k A VN Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button If you want calls to ring the
105. rings or more to ensure that Caller ID information is captured Considerations This feature works independently of Line Ringing which determines how an outside call rings at the extension immediately after a 20 second delay or not at all Automatic System Answer Delay specifies the number of rings a caller hears before the system answers the call Valid Entries 0 9 0 rings answered immediately 2v Programming To change the number of times an incoming call rings at extension 10 before the system answers it 1 2 Press Feature o Lo System Program System Program 1 1 Lo To change the number of rings press _Next Data until the appropriate value displays see Valid Entries above Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 24 Automatic System Answer Delay 110 Automatic System Answer Lines 204 Description This System Programming procedure identifies the lines on which incoming calls should be answered by the Automatic System Answer feature Related Features a After a call is answered Automatic System Answer plays a greeting then either places the call on hold provides continuous ringing or disconnects the call depending on the setting of Automatic System Answer Mode 121 m You must program a button on the system display phone at extension 10 to turn this feature on and off Use Automatic System Answer Button 111 to program the button m Calls tha
106. s message waiting capability m 2500 YMGL Single Line Analog Telephone Set m 2500 YMGK Single Line Telephone with Message Waiting Light and Recall Button m 8101 Analog Telephone m 8102 Analog Telephone m 8110 Analog Telephone m 7102 Plus Analog Voice Terminal Check with your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer to find out if other standard phones with message waiting lights will work NOTE For message waiting capability you must connect standard phones with LED compatible message waiting lights to Release 3 1 R3 1 or later 206 modules and equip the system with an R3 1 or later primary processor module This message waiting capability does not apply to standard phones with neon type message waiting lights Overview 1 9 Auxiliary Equipment You can connect many types of telecommunications devices to your system without expensive adapters or additional phone lines Many industry standard single line devices will work with the system regardless of the manufacturer m Touch tone rotary and cordless telephones such as those you might have in your home m Fax machines m Answering machines m Modems m Credit card scanners There are several other devices that may be compatible with the system For more information refer to the list in Chapter 4jor contact your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer Also see Chapter 4 for advice on setting up auxiliary equipment to
107. s Quick Reference 585 322 701 contains basic instructions for using the PARTNER MAIL system PARTNER MAIL VS Voice Messaging System Installation and Programming 518 322 105 provides instructions for installing programming and maintaining your PARTNER MAIL VS system Using the PARTNER MAIL VS Voice Messaging System 518 322 106 contains basic instructions for using the PARTNER MAIL VS system To order these materials call the Lucent Technologies BCS Publications Fulfillment Center at 1 800 457 1235 or 1 317 361 5353 Some of these materials also are available in Spanish and French For more information contact the Lucent Technologies BCS Publications Fulfillment Center or your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer B 4 Maintenance Hardware Components Ordering additional telephones and modules accessories and replacement parts for your system is convenient Table B 1 on the next two pages shows where you can buy system components in the United States To take full advantage of your system the sources shown below also can provide you with the optional equipment you might want for your system such as Lucent Technologies fax machines answering machines standard phones voice messaging systems modems paging systems doorphones headsets bells lights strobes music on hold systems and printers d You can obtain most items from more than one source either directly from Lucent Technologies o
108. starting with the bottom row of buttons On an extension basis you can change which lines are assigned and which buttons are used to select the lines if desired All extensions in a system configured for Key mode are referred to as key extensions Hybrid Mode Hybrid mode offers users flexibility in accessing outside lines from their phones As in Key mode individual lines can be assigned to system extensions Additionally multiple outside lines can be grouped together in pools The system can have up to four pools including a main pool and three auxiliary pools Each pool is identified by a poo access code 880 881 882 and 883 respectively Pools are represented on system phones by pool buttons Unlike line buttons pool buttons give users access to multiple lines from a single button Each auxiliary pool is associated with only one pool button Since the main pool typically contains most of your company s outside lines it is associated with two pool buttons This setup allows the user to place a call using one of the main pool buttons put that call on hold and make another call using the second main pool button Or the user can establish a conference call using lines in the main pool The main pool and each auxiliary pool can be assigned to an extension for a maximum of five pool buttons System phone users can press any of the available pool buttons on their phones or they can enter the pool access code at intercom dial tone
109. telephone numbers for a Disallowed Phone Number List in Step 4 of Programming m Specific Telephone Numbers Enter the phone number exactly as you would dial it For example to prevent calls to the local number 555 5678 press 5 5 5 5 Le z La a All Telephone Numbers in One Area Code The following list entries prevent calls to the 900 area code Toll Call Prefix required 1900 and 0900 Toll Call Prefix not required 900 and 0900 All Telephone Numbers in One Exchange The following entries prevent calls to the 976 exchange Toll Call Prefix required 976 Prevents local calls 1 976 Prevents direct dial calls to all area codes O 976 Prevents operator assisted calls to all area codes 1976 Prevents direct dial toll calls in the same area code needed only when 0 or 1 is required for toll calls in the same area code 0976 Prevents operator assisted toll calls in the same area code needed only when 0 or 1 is required for toll calls in the same area code Toll Call Prefix not required 976 Prevents local calls 101976 Prevents calls to area codes with 0 as the second digit such as 203 111976 Prevents calls to area codes with 1 as the second digit such as 212 m International Long Distance To prevent international calls enter the international prefix numbers 011 m Long Distance To prevent long distance calls after using one of the local telephone company features that co
110. that answers Do Not Disturb A feature that prevents incoming calls from ringing at an extension See al so Send All Calls DXD See Direct Extension Dialing D Expansion carrier The optional component of the control unit that can be connected to the primary carrier to expand your system s line and extension capacity See also Primary carrier Expansion processor module The main module of the expansion carrier which must be installed in the center slot of the expansion carrier This Lucent Technologies module extends the primary carriers management capabilities to the 206 and 400 modules installed in the expansion E A E T Extension An endpoint in the system numbered 10 57 that connects telephones or standard devices which can be dialed using the intercom button See also Programming extension Extension jack The location on 206 modules that allows you to connect extension wiring to the control unit for phones or other telecommunications devices Extension number The number assigned to each extension jack on a 206 module Extension numbers run consecutively from 10 through 57 for a two carrier configuration and are used for intercom calling Extension Name Display A feature that lets users assign a name to their extension The name appears along with the extension number on system display phones when users make an intercom call or a group call or transfer a call Extension Programming A method of
111. the answering machine to answer on the third or fourth ring so that it does not answer calls before someone else can If the answering machine is to cover transferred or coverage calls make sure the number of rings is less than the amount of transfer return or call coverage rings set for the extension This assures that the answering machine will pick up transferred or coverage calls before they return to the transfer return extension or they are sent to the covering extension If you intercept a call from the answering machine you will hear a click to notify you that the answering machine has turned off Using Auxiliary Equipment 4 7 Programming 4 8 Call Reporting Devices SMDR SMDR Station Message Detail Recording is a call reporting feature that provides records of call activity Call reporting information provides you with the ability to Detect unauthorized calls Bill clients or projects Bill back by department Reduce telephone costs by identifying the need to change telecommunications services like adding a WATS line for calls to a particular area code Print Caller ID information Call reporting information is recorded after each call is completed For outgoing calls the system records information for each call that lasts more than 10 seconds The timing begins when you lift the handset or press _Spxr to access an outside line For incoming calls the timing begins when the call is answered Timing stops when th
112. the display Then repeat Step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 158 Pool Line Assignment 207 Privacy F07 Description This feature is available only on system phones This feature lets system phone users press a programmed button to turn Privacy on and off preventing or allowing other users to join calls at the user s extension as needed Related Features a f Automatic Extension Privacy 304 is Assigned for an extension that extension normally is private However if a user sometimes needs to have co workers join conversations the user can program a Privacy button to turn Privacy on and off as needed Once a Privacy button is programmed the user must use the button to turn Privacy on and off even though Automatic Extension Privacy 304 is Assigned Privacy applies to active calls any user can retrieve a held call unless the call is placed on hold with Exclusive Hold If you have Caller ID you can use Privacy at your extension to prevent other users from joining your call and from accessing the Caller ID information displayed for active calls at your extension Considerations m Privacy must be programmed on a button with lights Users cannot dial the Privacy code manually or use a programmed button without lights to activate this feature When Privacy is on the button light at the extension is also on indicating that others cannot join calls Privacy can be turned on
113. then _System Program Remote Programming The system permits programming from a remote location using an auxiliary device called the Remote Administration Unit RAU Remote programming requires the installation of two RAUs one at your site and one at the location from which the programming is to be done For more information on remote programming see the PARTNER Communications System Remote Administration Unit Installation and Use guide Telephone Programming Options System telephones are ready to use when they are installed but they can be customized to meet the needs of your business and individual users This customization is accomplished through Telephone Programming Automatic Line Selection When a user lifts the telephone s handset or presses _Spkr the system chooses an idle line or pool automatically Automatic Line Selection determines the order in which the system looks for an idle line or pool You can set the system to look for lines or pools in any desired order For standard phones or for any phone used mainly to call other extensions select an inside intercom line first Extension Name Display With Extension Name Display users can assign a name up to 20 characters long to their extension Then when those users make an intercom call group call or transfer a call their name and extension number appears on the display phone receiving the call Similarly users receiving a transfer return call see the
114. time and target extension number Press the Wake Up Service button to exit Repeat Steps 1 through 4 to review wake up times for other extensions To cancel a scheduled wake up call 1 aN Press the Wake Up Service button at extension 10 Dial the two digit target extension number or use an Auto Dial button Press Repeat Steps 1 3 to cancel a scheduled wake up call for another extension 5 206 Wake Up Service Button 115 Troubleshooting Contents When You Need Help Power Failure Operation Problems with System Phones 6 1 i 6 1 6 2 m System Phone Does Not Ring 6 2 m System Phone Does Not Work 6 3 m Display Shows Only 16 Characters Per Line 6 4 Display is Incorrect 6 4 m Display Does Not Show Caller ID Name Number 6 4 m Some Caller ID Information Does Not Display 6 5 m Intercom Autodialer Does Not Work Properly 6 5 6 6 Problems with Standard Phones 6 m Standard Phone Does Not Ring 6 m Standard Phone Rings Back After Intercom Call with No One at Other End 6 7 m Standard Phone s Message Waiting Light Does Not Light 6 7 Other Problems with Phones 6 8 m Trouble Making Outside Calls 6 8 m Trouble Making Outside Calls from Pool Buttons on Pooled Extensions 6 9 Problems with Combination Extensions 6 13 m Phone Does Not Work Properly 6 13 6 i Contents System Problems 6 15 m Call on Hold Hangs Up but Line Does Not Disconnect 6 16 Troubleshooting When You Need
115. to make an outside call Standard phone users must dial 9 or enter the pool access code at intercom dial tone to access a pool since their phones do not have pool buttons After the user presses a pool button or enters a pool access code the system selects a free line from the pool for the user to make the call A user can access a pool as long as there is at least one available line in the pool 1 6 Overview A major benefit of Hybrid mode is that it allows users who have system phones with fewer buttons to have access to multiple outside lines and various types of pools You can make efficient use of outside lines by grouping those of a similar type or function together For example you can create an auxiliary pool of WATS or international lines and assign the pools to different groups of users Additionally individual lines can be assigned to a manager s extension so that he or she always has access to an outside line In Hybrid mode extension 10 always operates like an extension in Key mode This means that every outside line in the system is associated with a specific line button at extension 10 All other extensions can be set up with access to only lines only pools or a combination of lines and pools m Those extensions that have pool buttons even if they also have individual line buttons are called pooled extensions m Those extensions that have only line buttons including extension 10 are called key extensions Key exte
116. transfer return extension if it is not answered until the transfer originator hangs up Valid Entries 0 9 0 rings no return 4 Y Programming To change the number of times a transferred call rings before returning to the transfer return extension 1 2 Press Feature 0 Lo System Program _System Program 1 Lo 5 Enter a setting 0 9 For example to set a Transfer Return of 5 rings press Next Data until a display similar to the following appears Transfer Return 5 Rings Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 194 Transfer Return Rings 105 VMS Cover F15 Description This feature applies only if you have a voice messaging system It is available only on system phones This feature lets system phone users press a programmed button to turn VMS Cover on and off routing unanswered intercom and transferred calls for their extension to the Call Answer Service of the voice messaging system after the specified number of rings factory setting is three rings Related Features If Automatic VMS Cover 310 is Assigned to an extension that extension normally is covered by the voice messaging system For greater flexibility the user can use this feature to program a VMS Cover button to turn coverage on and off as needed Once a VMS Cover button is programmed the user must use the button to turn VMS Cover on and off even though Automatic VMS Cover 310 is Assigned
117. use Line Assignment to assign additional lines to specific extensions For example if five lines were assigned to all extensions using Number of Lines 104 and there are eight lines in the system use Line Assignment 301 to assign lines 6 7 and 8 to specific extensions m After you finish Line Assignment you can use Line Ringing to identify when each outside line assigned to an extension should start ringing If you add a line to the system its factory setting is Immediate Ring m You can use Automatic Line Selection to determine the order in which the system selects a line for an extension when the user at that extension lifts the handset or turns on the speaker to make a call If you add a line to the system it becomes the last line in the selection sequence m Remove all outside lines from Hotline 603 and Doorphone 604 605 extensions to prevent calls from being made or received on them m If you want to prevent a user at an extension from accessing a line make sure you restrict the line for that extension using Line Access Restriction 302 even if the line is not assigned to that extension so it cannot be accessed using Similarly If you want to prevent a user at an extension from accessing all the lines in a pool make sure you restrict the pool for that extension using Pool Acess Restriction aaaiieven if the pool is not assigned to that extension so it cannot be accessed using the pool access code m
118. who may be authorized by the FCC In the event repairs are needed on this equipment please contact the Lucent Technologies Helpline at 1 800 628 2888 For warranty information see Appendix B m Rights of the Local Telephone Company If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network the local telephone company may discontinue your service temporarily If possible they will notify you in advance But if advance notice is not practical you will be notified as soon as possible You will also be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC Your local telephone company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or procedures that affect the proper functioning of this equipment If they do you will be notified in advance to give you an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted telephone service Hearing Aid Compatibility All system phones are compatible with inductively coupled hearing aids as prescribed by the FCC C 2 FCC and IC Information IC Notification and Repair Information The Industry Canada IC label identifies certified equipment This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective operational and safety requirements The IC does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user s satisfaction Before installing the equipment users should ensure that it is permissible to connect it to the facilities of the local telecommunications company
119. 5 201 Voice interrupt on busy call description respondingtoa 5 202 0 0 Voice Interrupt of Busy Talk Beni 5 202 ss i siszr Voice Mail 5 32 5 195 1 5 199 5 203 __ Voice Mailbox a Voice messaging s stems 5 32 5 195 15199 5203 azample LAB 14 BL nn reference materials sending calls 5 summary of rocedures 2 13 SSS O Voice signaling 3 7 5 96 5 101 et Volume controls 3 3 Ww Wake Up Service Button 115 Warranty Information Wildcard character Wireless phones 3 3 B 4 B 7 CS Wiring specifications k amp amp amp CCC Z Z300A see Electromagnetic Interference filter Index IN 7 Centralized Telephone Programming Quick Reference Place the Programming Overlay on the dialpad of the system display phone at extension 10 or 11 TO ENTER PROGRAMMING MODE PRESS Feature Lo Lo AT THE SAME EXTENSION PRESS System Program System Program Central Tel Program feature TO CHANGE SETTINGS FOR ANOTHER EXTENSION PRESS Central Tel Program DIAL the extension number to be programmed Buttons on which lines or pools are assigned for the extension light up to show the current Line Ringing setting remaining buttons can be programmed with Auto Dial numbers or features I i 7 NOTE Program Automatic Line Selection or Extension Name Display first EXTENSION NAME DISPLAY PRESS left _intercom Enter the character_cod
120. 556666 5 82 Emergency Phone Number List 406 Programming To create an Emergency Phone Number List 1 Press Feature 0 o System Program _System Program 4 Lo 6 2 Select a list entry 01 10 For example to select the third entry press o 3 A display similar to the following appears Emergency List 03 Data Sas tessraes Enter the telephone number To save the telephone number in memory you must press _Enter 5 Atthis point m To enter other phone numbers press Next item to select a different list entry and repeat Steps 3 and 4 m To change the phone number you just entered press _Remove and repeat Steps 3 and 4 m To delete the phone number you just entered press _Remove 6 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Emergency Phone Number List 406 5 83 Exclusive Hold F02 Description This feature is available only on system phones This feature prevents other extensions from picking up outside calls placed on hold at a specific extension with a system phone Related Features m You can use the Hold button to put calls on regular hold any extension can pick up the held call m Placing a call on Exclusive Hold prevents other users from accessing Caller ID information for the held call at that extension Considerations m You can program an Exclusive Hold button on a system phone to use the feature with one touch For system phones if a ca
121. 57 1235 in the continental U S or 1 317 361 5353 outside the continental U S For information about ordering other system reference materials replacement parts accessories and other compatible equipment refer to Product Ordering information jin Appendix B Support Telephone Number In the continental U S Lucent Technologies provides a toll free hotline 24 hours a day Call the hotline at 1 800 628 2888 if you need assistance when programming or using your system Outside the continental U S contact your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer CC n ny Contents About This Guide v 2 Programming i 2 i m Changing Settings to Support PBX or Centrex Services 2 8 3 Learning About Telephones m System Telephones m Combination Extensions 2 3 i 3 1 3 1 Contents 4 Using Auxiliary Equipment 4 i m Overview 4 1 m Call Reporting Devices SMDR 4 8 ee 5 Feature Reference 5 i 6 8 m Other Problems with Phones m Problems with Combination Extensions 6 13 m Problems with Auxiliary Equipment 6 15 m System Problems 6 15 A Specifications A 1 C ii B Maintenance Repair and Ordering Information B 1 ii o Ey Contents C FCC and IC Information C 1 E D Speed Dial Form D 1 EE Se E Programming Mixed Telephone Types E 1 GL Glossary GL 1 IN Index IN 1 E Programming Quick References s About This Guide Purpose This gu
122. 6 15 o programming for 2 12 f 2 14 _ SS with Night Service 4 22 4 23 O O O Background Music Backlit displa Backplane 1 4 B 6 __ S Bed and Breakfast features description 2 14 Outgoing Call Restriction Button mm 5 146 Wake Up 5 208 Bridging calls 5 112 Busy extension indication seqLight patterns Busy Lamp Fields BLF feature seq Light patterns Light patterns Button label sheets Buttons Be Auto Dial intercom 1 8 3 2 line pool 5 154 f 5 156 o Z o ooo OO system telephone 1 8 3 2 _ o ooo y y o C Call accounting 5 169 5 172 S S O Call Assistant intercom Auodialer ee ets o Call Coverage 5 32 5 36 5 40 5 122 5 166_ Call Coverage Rings Fe 05 lt 4 Call Follow Me 5 Call Forwarding Components system 1 200 Cs Conference call making a Conf button Drop 5 56 limit outside participants outside restriction Control unit Copy Settings 399 Cordless phones 1 8 3 3 B 7 Cid Coverage 5 36 5 122 5 196 5 198 5 200 5 204 _ Index IN 1 IN 2 Covering calls 5 36 5 39 Cd Creditcardscanners4 12 __ O Cycle programming method 2 18 _ D DGC see Direct Group Calling Dial Mode 201 5 58 ___ S Dial pulse signaling 5 164 Dial tone Button 113 Delay 112 Lines 205 5 Direct Pool Termination se pee Direct programming method 2 2 18 o S Direct
123. A48 Intercom Autodialer 1 9 2 22 5 14 PARTNER phones se PARTNER 34D telephone buttons andindicators 3 200 Z O for receptionist programming overlay 2 Placing a call Playback Automatic System Answer 5 29 sid Direct Extension Dial 5 65 Pool Access Restriction 315 5 152 5 153 Pool buttons Pool Extension Assignment 314 5 154 5 156 Pool Line Assignment 207 5 157 5 158 Pooled extensions 5 157 5 158 515400 assigning lines assigning pools 5 154 buttons 5 154 5 156 Programmable buttons Programming see also System Programming and after installation auxiliary equipment 2 12 centralized telephone changing system 2 1 2 6 2 14 Privacy Automatic_Extension 304 Problems solving 6 1 changing type 2 19 2 26 dial code features orto buttons extension for PBX Genirox od overlays 2 ai a phone numbers on a button 2 20 5 15 programmable buttons 2 20 3 2 5 15 _ quick reference charts End of book receptionist extension restrictions and issions 2 9 system 2 1 2 9 J2 14 o telephone 2 1 2 19 2 23 o Pulse dial 5 58 5 164 __ S y O Q Quick Reference charts End of book k amp amp R Recall programming feature on a button 5 160 programming function in phone number 5 173 Receptionist extension
124. Account Code Entry provides instructions for entering forced account codes You can use Forced Account Code List 409 to create a list of valid account codes If a Forced Account Code List exists the system checks the list whenever a user enters a forced account code If a forced account code is valid the system provides access to an outside line If a forced account code is invalid the system denies access to an outside line to dial out the user must repeat the procedure for entering a forced account code Extensions programmed with this feature are restricted from dialing outside phone numbers on all lines at the extension including numbers in the Emergency Phone Number List 406 lntl an account code is entered If a Forced Account Code List exists the account code must match an entry on the list for the user to get an outside line Account codes can be entered manually or using System Speed Dial iNumbers Personal Speed Dial Numbers and Auto Dialing but not Marked System Speed Dial numbers Automatic Line Selection does not apply for an extension programmed with this feature the user must manually select a line or pool after entering an account code Do not assign Forced Account Code Entry to an External Hotline 311 extension If alSystem Password 403 is required to override dialing restrictions for an extension users must enter it before entering the account code Considerations If SMDR is used
125. Assigned m f you want to assign Wake Up Service to a specific button press 3 A display similar to the following appears Wake Up Service Button 3 Select a Button Then press a programmable button with lights to assign Wake Up Service to that button 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 4 Label the Wake Up Service button at extension 10 Using To schedule a wake up call for a specific extension 1 Press the Wake Up Service button at extension 10 The green light next to the Wake Up Service button flutters Wake Up Service is activated and a display similar to the following appears Wake Up Call 2 Dial the two digit extension number of the desired extension or use an Auto Dial button For example to schedule a wake up call for extension 32 press 3 2 A display similar to the following appears Wake Up Call 32 3 Enter the wake up time in 24 hour notation For example to set the time to 2 15 p m press 1 4 1 4 When you have finished entering the time a display similar to the following appears Wake Up Call 32 14 15 The wake up call is scheduled and the green light next to the Wake Up Service button turns off Wake Up Service Button 115 5 205 To review a scheduled wake up time for a specific extension 1 2 3 4 5 Press the Wake Up Service button at extension 10 Dial the two digit target extension number or use an Auto Dial button Review the displayed wake up
126. Automatic System Answer and wait for any calls in the process of being answered by these features to be completed Lift the handset of the system display phone at extension 10 or 11 Press the Intercom button Dial 8 2 2 A display similar to the following appears DXD l Record 2 Play Press 2 The following display appears Message Playback After the message is played back you hear a confirmation tone and a display similar to the following appears DXD l Record 2 Play At this point m To re record the message follow the instructions from Step 5 for recording a message m To play back the message follow the instructions from Step 5 directly above m To exit the procedure hang up the handset 5 66 Direct Extension Dial Record Playback 1892 Direct Line Pickup Active Line I68LL Description This feature allows users to access a ringing or held call or to join a call in progress on a specific outside line where LL is a line number from 01 24 This feature is useful for picking up a ringing or held call or for joining a call on a line that is not assigned to the phone Related Features m Ifa lineis idle users cannot access it with this feature they hear busy tone For information on accessing an idle line see Direct Line Pickup ldle a f Line Access Restriction 302 or Pool Access Restriction 315 is set to No Access or Out Only for a line assigned to an extension or lines within a
127. Call reporting A feature that provides records of call activity Call reporting also is referred to as Station Message Detail Recording or SMDR Glossary GL 1 Call Waiting A feature that lets standard phone users receive notification of a second incoming call when they are busy on a call The user can press the switchhook to put the first call on hold and answer the second call Caller ID A feature that displays an incoming caller s number or name on a system display phone To get Caller ID you must subscribe to the service if it is available from your local phone company and connect Caller ID lines to the appropriate system modules Caller ID Inspect A feature that allows you to view incoming Caller ID or Call Coverage information on other lines while active on a call without placing the call on hold or hanging up Caller ID Name Number A feature that allows you to toggle between a callers Caller ID name and Caller ID number Caller ID service A subscription service available from some local telephone companies providing the telephone number and or name of the caller on lines that have the service Calling Group A group of extensions that can be called simultaneously by dialing a group calling code See also Calling restriction A feature that lets you control telephone use at specific extensions Carrier Plastic housing made up of a backplane and cover that holds system modules Your configuration cons
128. Can receive and place intercom inside calls only Cannot use a specific outside line or pool All outside lines and pools not assigned Outside line or pool not assigned No access for all lines and pools No access for that line or pool Can only monitor call activity and pick up held calls on a specific line Outside line assigned No access for that line Can only receive calls on a specfic line or pool Can only place outgoing calls on a specific line or pool Outside line or pool assigned Outside line or pool may be assigned Incoming only for that line or pool Outgoing only for that line or pool Table 2 2 Settings that Restrict an Extension s Dialing Once It Gets an Outside Line or Pool Type of Setting for Line Setting for Line Setting for Setting for Restrictions or Assignment Access Restriction Outgoing Call Disallowed Permissions for 801 or Pool 302 or Pool Restriction Phone the Extension Extension Access Restriction 401 Number Assignment 314 315 Lists 404 Can place Outside line or pool No restriction Local only Any local intercom and may be assigned numbers the local calls only extension and can answer should not dial any call Can place Outside line or pool No restriction No restriction Any local and intercom local may be assigned
129. Chapter 4 System Speed Dial codes cannot be programmed on Auto Dial buttons System Speed Dial numbers can be programmed only from extension 10 or 11 but can be used from any extension Refer to a completed System Speed Dial form for the list of numbers to be programmed After programming the numbers distribute a copy of the completed form to users See Appendix D for a blank form If the system is connected to a PBX or Centrex system and a dial out code usually 9 is needed to place calls outside the PBX or Centrex system include the dial out code and one or more pauses if available in Speed Dial numbers that must dial out of the PBX or Centrex system If you program 911 or other emergency numbers as Speed Dial numbers and want to place test calls you should 1 perform such activities in the off peak hours such as early morning or late evening and 2 remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call before hanging up You can use multiple Auto Dial buttons and Speed Dial numbers during the course of a single call For example you can use an Auto Dial button or Speed Dial number to dial the Account Code Entry feature code and another Speed Dial number to dial the account code 5 182 System Speed Dial Numbers Valid Entries Any phone number up to 28 characters consisting of the digits 0 9 x 4 and special dialing functions that you can access by pressing Hold Pause Mic HFAI
130. Coverjturned on can Send All Calls immediately to their covering extension or voice mailbox by activating Do Not Disturb Considerations m Only one owner can be assigned to a specific line However multiple lines can be owned by the same extension m This feature provides an alternative method of routing outside calls to the voice messaging system for Call Answer Service m This feature has no effect on the CO Line Ownership procedure in PARTNER MAIL or PARTNER MAIL VS Valid Entries Line number 01 24 Extension number 10 57 No lines owned by an extension vY 5 122 Line Coverage Extension 208 Programming To change the Line Coverage setting for an extension 1 Press Feature o o System Program System Program 2 Lo 8 Enter the desired line number For example to program line 24 press 2 4 Enter the number of the extension to be assigned ownership of the line At this point FO LN m To delete the current setting press Remove m TO program another line press _Next Item or Prev Item until the line number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Line Coverage Extension 208 5 123 Line Ringing Description This Telephone Programming procedure determines how each outside line or pool assigned to an extension rings A line or pool can ring immediately ring with a 20 second delay or not ring at all Delay
131. Description Call reporting often referred to as Station Message Detail Recording or SMDR provides detailed tracking of telephone usage in a printed report This System Programming procedure allows you to indicate whether or not you want to include a Talk field on call reports The Talk field records talk time for all incoming outside calls For Automatic System Answer and Direct Extension Dial calls talk time does not include the time during which the greeting plays or the time that the caller spends waiting for someone to answer the call For all other calls talk time is the same as call duration Related Features Talk time is most helpful for Automatic System Answer or Direct Extension Dialjcalls m You can use SMDR Record Type 608 to specify the type of calls to be included on call reports m You can use SMDR Output Format 610 to identify whether a maximum of 15 digits or 24 digits is printed for dialed numbers on the call report m When you change this feature to Active the next call record that prints includes talk time as the last field on the call report To print a new header use SMDR Top of Page 609 Considerations m This feature requires special hardware and or software For more information see Call Reporting Devices SMDR jin Chapter 4 m If talk time is set to Active andjSMDR Output Format 610 is set to 24 digits the combined length of the fields for call record will be greater than
132. Entries 01 through 80 25 to 2000 msec in 25 msec increments 18 450 msec vY Programming 5 162 To change the duration of the Recall Timer signal 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 1 o Lz A display similar to the following appears Recall Timer Duration 18 450 msec 2 Enter a different Recall Timer setting by pressing _Next Data or _Prev Data For example to increase the Recall Timer setting to 750 msec press Next Data until a display similar to the following appears Recall Timer Duration 30 750 msec Alternatively you can enter the setting number directly For example to set the Recall timer to 750 msec press 3 o Select another procedure or exit programming mode If you are using Recall to access PBX or Centrex features test the new Recall Timer setting m Ifa callis disconnected shorten the time m Ifthe Recall signal has no effect lengthen the time Recall Timer Duration 107 Ring on Transfer 119 Description This System Programming procedure lets you specify what callers hear while they are being transferred If Ring on Transfer is set to Active callers hear ringing as they are being transferred it it is set to Not Active callers hear silence unless Music On Hold is activated and an audio source is connected to the primary processor module If this is the case callers hear music while the call is being transferred to the destinat
133. Features You must use Pickup Group Extensions 501 to assign extensions to Pickup Groups Considerations m Extensions can be in more than one Pickup Group m You can program a Group Pickup button on a system phone to pick up calls in a Pickup Group with one touch Example Here are some useful applications for a Pickup Group m Put all system extensions in a Pickup Group except the boss private extension so anyone on the system can answer a ringing call except calls to the boss m Put the extensions of people who work near each other and who can hear each other s phones ring but who don t have each other s lines on their phones in a Pickup Group For example a group of typists work in a large room separated by cubicles and all of their extensions are in Pickup Group 1 When a typist leaves the room and the typist s phone rings anyone else in the system who can hear the call ring can pick it up simply by dialing the Pickup Group code for that group intercom e 6 1 Programming To program a Pickup Group button 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button Press left intercom 6 6 Dial a Pickup Group number 1 4 oo A fH Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode 5 102 Group Pickup I66G Using Sys
134. Humidity 15 90 noncondensing For proper ventilation and easy replacement of modules provide at least 6 15 2 cm clearance at the top and sides and 2 feet 0 6 meters at the front and bottom of the control unit Locate in an area free of excess moisture corrosive gases dust and chemicals Electrical U S and Canada 90 130 VAC 50 60 Hz 3 prong outlet separate ground separately fused at Requirements 15 Amps Other countries 90 264 VAC fused at 10 Amps Outlet must not be controlled by an on off switch Grounding to comply with Underwriters Laboratories UL 1459 A An insulated grounding conductor that is not smaller in size and equivalent in insulation material and thickness to the grounded and ungrounded branch circuit supply conductors except that it is green with or without one or more yellow stripes is to be installed as part of the circuit that supplies the product or system B The grounding conductor mentioned in item A is to be connected to ground at the service equipment C The attachment plug receptacles in the vicinity of the product or system are all to be of a grounding type and the grounding conductors serving these receptacles are to be connected to earth ground at the service equipment Requirements for Installation of a telephone or other standard tip ring device in another building requires the Out of Building following In Range Out of Building IROB protectors to protect the control unit and
135. IAL an extension number 10 57 DIAL 1 Assigned to group 2 Not Assigned to group PRESS next tem to assign another extension NIGHT SERVICE BUTTON DIAL 503 DIAL 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned 3 Select button then press a programmable button to assign Night Service to that button If you use option 3 after a Night Service button has been assigned the Night Service button moves from the old button to the new button you select VY Factory setting 71 Button with lights required NIGHT SERVICE GROUP EXTENSIONS DIAL 504 DIAL an extension number 10 57 1 Assigned to group DIAL PRESS _Next item to assign another 2 Not Assigned extension to group HUNT GROUP EXTENSIONS DIAL 505 DIAL a group number 1 6 7 for VMS DIAL an extension number 10 57 DIAL 1 Assigned to 2 Not Assigned group to group PRESS Next item to assign another extension VMS HUNT DELAY DIAL 506 DIAL 1 Immediate 2 Delayed Z VMS HUNT SCHEDULE DIAL 507 DIAL 1 Always Y 2 Day Only 3 Night Only Auxiliary Equipment FAX MACHINE EXTENSIONS DIAL 601 DIAL an extension number 10 57 DIAL 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned PRESS _Next item to identify another extension MUSIC ON HOLD DIAL 602 DIAL 1 Active 2 Not Active HOTLINE o 5 107 DIAL 603 DIAL the hotline extension number not ext 10 16 22
136. Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations PARTNER II Communications System Release 4 1 Programming and Use 518 455 334 Comcode 107879231 Issue 2 August 1996 Copyright 1996 Lucent Technologies Lucent Technologies 518 455 334 All Rights Reserved Issue 2 Printed in U S A August 1996 Notice Every effort was made to ensure that the information in this book was complete and accurate at the time of printing However information is subject to change Federal Communications Commission FCC Interference Notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits of a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of FCC rules For additional FCC information see Appendix C of this book Canadian Emissions Requirements This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Industry Canada IC For additional IC information see of this book Le present appareil numerique n emet pas de bruits radioelectriques depassant les limites applicables aux appareils numeriques de la classe A prescrites dans le Reglement sur le brouillage radioelectrique edicte par le ministere des Industrie Canada Vous trouverez des renseignements compl mitaires a la annexe C de ce manuel Security Toll fraud the unauthorized use of your telecommunications system by an unauthorized party for example persons other than your compa
137. Manual Signaling button labeled MS Bill is programmed to signal the target extension When the button is pressed the user at the target extension will hear a tone for as long as the button is pressed This feature is typically used by a receptionist to alert the boss of an important incoming call when the boss is already on a call The lights of a Manual Signaling button work like an Auto Dial button to show the status of the target extension Additionally a Manual Signaling button can be used to place intercom calls Manual Signaling applies only to system phones S DEREN Chapter 5 for more information NOTE You can have only one button for a target extension per extension The button can be programmed as a Manual Signaling button or as an Auto Dial button for intercom ringing or voice signaling m Fax Management A button labeled Fax 29 is programmed as a Fax Management button for the fax machine connected to extension 29 The lights next to the button show what is happening at the fax machine for example red broken flutter indicates that the fax machine is not responding for example when it is out of paper For more information see Fax Management Feature in Chapter 4 ol aa pied jee Meee ees do Phone O ASA INR SNK VM Megs VM Box Night Svc a o o o o o abla oA aC aC Ext 23 Ext 24 Fax 29 MS Bill Grp Fage Sales D o o o o a n d al a ae E a E e eel Ext 17 Ext 18 Ext 19 Ext 20 E
138. No Ring 4 Set Automatic Extension Privacy 304 for extension X to Assigned to 4 18 Using Auxiliary Equipment 5 Make sure extension X is not assigned as a Call Waiting 316 extension Pickup Group Extension 501 JCalling Group Extension 502 Night Service Group Extension 504 or Hunt Group Extension 505 To monitor the fax machine at extension X use Fax Machine Extensions 601 to identify extension X as a fax extension and program a Fax Management button by programming the fax machine extension number on an Auto Dial button To Program Fax 2 Receive Ext Y 1 If extension Y is a key extension use Line Assignment 301 to assign only line A to extension Y If extension Y is a pooled extension use Pool Line Assignment 207 to remove line A from all pools and then use Line Assignment 301 to assign line A and any other individual lines to extension Y If the fax machine has the Notify feature set it to select intercom first If the fax machine does not have the Notify feature and you want it to be able to dial out when fax 1 is unavailable set Automatic Line Selection fet extension Y to select outside lines and pools used for outgoing calls line A selected last Set Line Ringing for line A at extension Y to Immediate Ring set all other lines and pools at extension Y to No Ring For all other extensions set line A to No Ring or Delayed Ring Set Automatic Ext
139. Only Lucent Technologies Authorized Personnel can modify the processor module to accommodate Hybrid mode The mode for your system must be decided upon before installation and in the continental U S the mode must be registered with the Federal Communications Commission FCC see FCC Registration later in this section Overview 1 5 Key Mode When the system operates in Key mode individual outside lines are assigned to users extensions for making and receiving calls At extensions with system phones each individual line Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 etc assigned to the extension is represented by its own line button Users can press any of the available line buttons on their system phones to make outside calls Standard phone users must dial 9 at intercom dial tone to make an outside call since their phones do not have line buttons Key mode enables users to easily join calls since each line button can be labeled using a unique line number For example if you are requested to join a call on Line 2 you simply press the line button labeled Line 2 Key mode also lets users monitor call activity using the lights next to the line button everyone who has a specific line assigned to their extension can tell when an incoming call is ringing on that line when a call on that line is on hold and when that line is in use At installation the system assigns outside lines to the buttons on all system phones from left to right
140. PRESS a programmable button PRESS left intercom z DIAL a Calling Group number 1 4 For paging the group PRESS a programmable button PRESS left intercom z DIAL a Calling Group number 1 4 GROUP HUNTING RING VOICE SIGNAL For ringing the first available extension PRESS a programmable button PRESS left intercom z z DIAL a Hunt Group number 1 7 For voice signaling the first available extension PRESS a programmable button PRESS left intercom x z z DIAL a Hunt Group number 1 6 GROUP PICKUP PRESS a programmable button PRESS left intercom 6 6 DIAL a Pickup Group number 1 4 LOUDSPEAKER PAGING PRESS a programmable button PRESS left intercom z o SN 1 J I LAST NUMBER REDIAL PRESS a programmable button PRESS Feature 0 5 Factory setting Button with lights required Button with lights recommended System Features Continued MANUAL SIGNALING PRESS a programmable button PRESS Feature 1 3 DIAL the two digit extension number to ring extension or DIAL x plus the two digit extension number to voice signal the extension MESSAGE LIGHT OFF PRESS a programmable button PRESS Feature 1 Lo DIAL optional two digit extension number MESSAGE LIGHT ON PRESS a programmable button PRESS Feature o 9 DIAL optional two digit extension number PRIVACY p 5 159 PRESS a programmable button with light
141. Pool Extension Assignment 314 to assign the pools you want the fax machine to use to extension X Also use Line Assignment 301 to assign any individual lines you want the fax machine to use to extension X 2 If extension X is a key extension set Automatic Line Selection for extension X to line A B C If extension X is a pooled extension set Automatic Line Selection for extension X to Pool D line A B C 3 Set Line Ringing for all lines and pools on extension X to No Ring 4 Set Automatic Extension Privacy 304 for extension X to Assigned Make sure extension X is not assigned as a Call Waiting 316 extension Pickup Group Extension 501 Calling Group Extension 502 Night Service Group Extension 504 or Hunt Group Extension 505 6 To monitor the fax machine use Fax Machine Extensions 601 to identify extension X as a fax extension and program a Fax Management button by programming the fax machine extension number on an Auto Dial button Using Auxiliary Equipment 4 17 Send and Receive Fax Machines If your business has high volume fax traffic you can set up two fax machines one that only sends and the other that only receives For example in Figure 4 8 fax 1 is the send machine fax 2 is the receive machine Line A is the fax line the number of which is published as the fax number If fax 2 doesn t answer line A fax 1 will Fax Line A Ext X FAX1 S
142. R 6 MDC 9000 and MDW 9000 have 4 programmable buttons all with lights Intercom Buttons Press to make or answer a call to or from another extension in the system Feature Press to change programmed settings or use system features Conf Press to add other parties to your call Transfr labeled Trans on MDC 9000 and MDW 9000 Press to pass a call to another extension Hold Press to put a call on hold Spkr all models except MDC 9000 and MDW 9000 Press to turn on and off the speaker and microphone if available so you can dial and have a conversation without lifting the handset The light next to this button shows when the speaker is turned on Mic HFAI all models except MDC 9000 and MDW 9000 Press to turn the microphone on and off The light next to this button shows when the microphone is turned on Leave on to use the Hands Free Answer on Intercom HFAI feature 3 2 Learning About Telephones MDC 9000 MDW 9000 PARTNER 6 Handset Earpiece Volume mr Line Pool Programmable Control Switch 8c Buttons 4 ei ne a 3838 ag or Volume Contro eaa e ec Intercom Buttons 2 MDW 9000 Line Pool Programmable Buttons 4 _ MDC 9000 Status On Off Hold r Message Light N Handset Display OE Buttons 2 MDW 9000 Mute Onor Hold
143. Related Features m Voice Interrupt on Busy 312 is an alternative feature that lets a user signal then speak to a user who is active on a call You can use the Manual Signaling button instead of dialing the two digit extension number required for these features Forwarding Call Follow Me Message Light On Message Light Off To transfer a call to an extension for which you have a Manual Signaling button press _Transfr before pressing the Manual Signaling button See Transferring Calls Considerations A PARTNER or MLS model phone is required at both extensions to use this feature You must program the Manual Signaling feature code and the target extension number on a button Use a button with lights if you want to view the status of the target extension similar to an Auto Dial button You can have only one button per extension either on the system phone or on the Intercom Autodialer for a target extension The button can be programmed as a Manual Signaling button or as an Auto Dial button The lights next to the button show calling activity see Lights in Chapter 3 for more information If you signal an extension that has an Auto Dial or Manual Signaling button programmed for your extension the green light next to that button flutters to identify your extension as the signaling extension You can signal the target extension while you are on an outside call This does not initiate a one touch tran
144. System Program again The display reads SYSTEM PROGRAM Specify a programming procedure in one of two ways m Direct Method to dial the code for that procedure System Programming procedures in this guide are identified by anda three digit code for example System Date is 101 This method is best when you are using only a few procedures during a programming session and you know the codes m Cycle Method cycle through the procedures in numerical order Press _Next Procedure and _Prev Procedure to cycle forward and backward through the programming procedures This method is best when you are using multiple procedures during a programming session or if you do not know the codes To exit programming mode you can press _Feature 0 Lo or lift the handset off hook then place it back in the cradle NOTE You can talk on the phone while you program This is useful if you need to call for support while programming However you must call before you enter programming mode and you must use the handset to talk not the speaker and microphone Programming Changing Programming Type When you are in programming mode you can move between System Programming and Centralized Telephone Programming To change to Centralized Telephone Programming when you are in System Programming press Central Tel Program TO move back to System Programming when you are in Centralized Telephone Programming press _Central Tel Program
145. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection In some cases the company s inside wiring for single line individual service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly telephone extension cord The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or any equipment malfunctions may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system if present are connected This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas A CAUTION Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves but should contact the appropriate electrical inspection authority or electrician as appropriate To prevent overloading the Load Number LN assigned to each terminal device denotes the percentage of the total load to be connected to a telephone loop used by the device The termination on a loop may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the total of the Load Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 100 IC Ce
146. Timer Duration 107 to match the setting used by your PBX or Centrex system usually 800 msec or 32 This setting affects the length of a Recall signal sent by the control unit to access PBX or Centrex services Dialing Restrictions Outgoing Call Restriction 401 is an equipment restriction intended to limit an extension s dialing to inside calls only using the _intercom buttons on system phones or to inside and local calls only allowing calls within the PBX or Centrex system and local calls outside the PBX or Centrex system However if users in your system use a dial out code 9 on most PBX or Centrex systems before dialing numbers outside the PBX or Centrex system the equipment will not be able to prevent toll calls for extensions restricted to inside and local calls only unless you use Disallowed Phone Number Lists to prevent dialing to specific classes of numbers If your PBX or Centrex system includes dialing restrictions use those instead of the equipment restrictions If you have PBX or Centrex dialing restrictions on a line and also program equipment restrictions both the PBX or Centrex system and equipment restrictions apply However equipment dialing permissions will not override PBX or Centrex system restrictions Speed Dial and Auto Dial Numbers When you program numbers outside the PBX or Centrex system as Speed Dial and Auto Dial numbers include the PBX or Centrex system dial out code 9
147. VMS Cover also applies to outside calls on lines assigned ownership with Line Coverage Extension 208 Use VMS Cover Rings 117 to change the number of times intercom and transferred calls or outside calls on lines assigned ownership ring at system extensions before they are sent to the voice messaging system A user can turn on VMS Cover while a call is ringing to send that call immediately to his or her voice mailbox See Send All Calls Users with VMS Cover already turned on can activate Do Not Disturb to Send All Calls immediately to their voice mailbox If an extension has VMS Cover and active calls ring at the covering extension for the specified number of If the covering extension does not answer the call is routed to the voice mailbox of the extension that activated Call Coverage after the specified number of VMS cover rings If an extension has VMS Cover and Call Forwarding active calls ring at the call forwarding destination extension they are not covered by the voice messaging system Considerations This feature must be programmed on a button with lights This feature does not apply to coverage calls forwarded calls group calls parked calls transfer return calls Voice Interrupt on Busy calls or voice signaled calls VMS Cover F15 5 195 Programming To program a VMS Cover button 1 or e od Using From Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Prog
148. Voice Interrupt On Busy 312 Description This feature is available only on system phones This System Programming procedure identifies extensions that can receive voice interrupt on busy calls A voice interrupt on busy call is a special intercom call that lets a user the originator interrupt and speak to another user the recipient who is busy on an intercom or outside call with one other party When voice interrupt on busy is initiated the recipient hears two beeps before hearing the originator s voice The originator and the recipient should be aware that the third party to whom the recipient is speaking probably will hear both the beeps and the faint sound of the originator s voice This feature typically is used by the receptionist to alert the boss to an important incoming call or event when the boss is already on a call Related Features m Making Calls and Transferring Calls provide more instructions for making and transferring voice interrupt on busy calls m The recipient can use a Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk Back button to respond to the originator of the voice interrupt on busy call The recipient s response will not be heard by the third party m Users cannot receive voice interrupt on busy calls if is active at their extension They are part of a joined call They are part of al Conference Call Considerations m The voice interrupt on busy tone two beeps is unique to distinguish it from a voic
149. ailbox A storage area for greetings and messages ina voice messaging system Voice messaging system VMS An optional call routing and messaging device that provides call coverage by answering calls and routing them to caller designated extensions It also lets callers leave messages at unanswered extensions and lets subscribers retrieve their messages The system supports either the PARTNER MAIL system or the PARTNER MAIL VS system W Wake Up Service A special application feature that lets the receptionist at extension 10 schedule wake up or reminder calls for specific extensions Glossary GL 7 AA Extensions 607 Abbreviated Ringing Allowed Phone Number Lists 407 5 9415 10 Amplified handset 4 3 B 7 Cid Answering a call at your extension 5 12 O O O ringing at another extension 5 46 5 102 5 103 Answering machines 4 4 4 7 ASA see Automatic System_Answer pane pace ie see PARTNER Attendant Author ed Forced Account Code Entr Autodialer Intercom 1 9 2 22 5 14 e Automated attendant extensions Automated attendants se Automatic Extension Privacy 304 5 17 45 18 Automatic Line Selection 5 19 5 20 Automatic System Answer Button 111 5 Delay 110 5 24 S O Lines 204 5 25 5 26 __ _ Mode 121 5 27 5 28 __ o Record Playback 5 29 75 31 O Automatic VMS Cover 310 5 Auxiliary equipment example setups overview 1 100 problems with 6 14
150. al U S help is available at 1 800 628 2888 Outside the continental U S call your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer Troubleshooting 6 11 Trouble Hearing Called Party Answer Possible Cause 1 lf you are using a speakerphone there may be environmental factors that affect the performance of the speaker or microphone for example too much background noise What to do See Speakerphone Performance Tips in Chapter 3 for suggestions on the proper use of the speakerphone If the problem is not solved go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 lf the system is set for touch tone dialing you may have a faulty phone or cord See System Phone Does Not Work If the system is set for rotary dialing the Rotary Dialing Timeout interval is too long What to do Reset the interval using Rotary Dialing Timeout 108 m lf you can hear the called party answer the problem is solved m If the problem is not solved call the hotline Using the Recall Feature Has No Effect Possible Cause Recall Timer Duration setting is too short What to do Increase the Recall Timer Duration 107 by 100 milliseconds m lf the Recall feature works the problem is solved m Ifthe Recall feature still does not work continue increasing the Recall Timer Duration by increments of 100 milliseconds until the problem is solved Using the Recall Feature Disconnects Call This problem applies when the system is instal
151. alid account codes which should be distributed to the appropriate users If a Forced Account Code List exists the system checks the list whenever a user enters a forced account code If the code is valid the system provides the user access to an outside line If the code is invalid the system denies the user access m For faster entry of frequently used account codes you can program an account code on an Auto Dial button or as a System or Personal Speed Dial number but not as a Marked System Speed Dial number See Auto Dialing System Speed Dial Numbers and iNumbers for programming instructions Considerations m When an account code is entered during a call the caller on the other end does not hear the digits dialed m f SMDR is used the account code assigned to incoming or outgoing calls prints on call reports See Call Reporting Devices SMDR in Chapter 4 for more information on call reporting m f an account code is entered for an outgoing call and the call is transferred to another extension the call report shows the originating extension as the owner of the call Conversely if an account code is entered for an incoming call and the call is transferred to another extension the call report shows the destination extension as the owner of the call m Account codes can be changed during a call However only the person who entered the original account code can enter a different account code SMDR prints c
152. all record The call record is a line of information that includes the fields shown in Figure 4 4 DATE TIME NUMBER DUR LINE STN ACCOUNT C 04 26 97 11 34 101028819085556036 00 04 28 02 32 1725 I 04 26 97 13 35 IN 00 02 12 01 10 I 04 26 97 13 38 9085559111 00 01 22 12 15 TALK 00 02 12 00 00 55 Figure 4 4 Sample Call Report Each page includes 59 records The report has the following fields m Call Type C indicates outgoing calls I indicates incoming calls SMDR Record Type 608 defines if incoming calls are reported m Date The date of the call is shown in mm dd yy format where mm is the month dd is the day and yy is the year The system uses the date set with System Date 101 Time The time of the connection is shown in hh mm format where hh is the hour and mm is the minute The system uses the time set with System Time 103 and is shown in 24 hour military time m Number For an outgoing call this is the dialed number or the speed dial code of a Marked System Speed Dial number preceded by an F This field holds a maximum of either 15 or 24 digits depending on the setting of SMDR Output Format 610 The Number field in Figure 4 4 is set to hold 24 digits A character prints as the last digit of a dialed number if the called party hangs up before the system user a prints if the number of digits dialed exceeds the 15 or 24 digits that this field can hold
153. aller enters an invalid extension number or does not enter one at all the call is transferred to the receptionist at extension 10 or to the designated transfer return extension for extension 10 To intercept a call while the message is playing the red light next to the line button is on steady press the line button and lift the handset The message stops playing when the call is retrieved Valid Entries 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned Direct Extension Dial Lines 205 5 63 Programming To identify the lines on which outside calls should be answered for Direct Extension Dial 1 Press Feature 0 o System Program System Program 2 o 5 2 Enter the desired line number 01 24 For example to specify line 1 press Lo 1 3 To assign or unassign Direct Extension Dial press _Next Data until the appropriate value displays 4 To specify another line press _Next Item or _Prev Item until the line number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for all desired lines 6 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 64 Direct Extension Dial Lines 205 Direct Extension Dial Record Playback 1892 Description This feature lets you record and play back the message that callers hear when a call is answered by the Direct Extension Dial feature The maximum length of the message is 20 seconds Related Features Direct Extension Dial aff
154. ally they can m Insure that incoming calls are answered and directed to destination extensions correctly and efficiently using immediate or delayed call handling Immediate call handling sends calls directly to the voice messaging system while delayed call handling allows the receptionist to answer Calls first m Answer and route calls during the day and after normal business hours Alleviate the problem of inaccurate or incomplete messages by allowing callers to leave detailed confidential messages for subscribers m Allow subscribers to assign a password to their mailbox change their personal greeting and retrieve messages The PARTNER MAIL system also offers advanced voice mail features such as outcalling group lists broadcast messages and fax management For complete details contact your Representative or local Authorized Dealer or refer to the documentation provided with the voice messaging system Delayed Call Handling Figure 4 13 shows a PARTNER MAIL system that provides delayed call handling This setup allows the receptionist at extension 10 to provide personalized service by answering calls during normal business hours The PARTNER MAIL system connected to extensions Z1 and Z2 handles calls when the receptionist is busy or not available so calls do not go unanswered The PARTNER MAIL system also answers calls received outside of business hours and prompts callers to leave messages in the receptionist s mailbo
155. amming to program features or store telephone numbers for individual extensions from extension 10 or 11 Most features also can be programmed on a system phone at the user s extension Keep in mind the following exceptions Automatic Line Selection and Line Ringing always must be programmed using Centralized Telephone Programming m lf auser has a standard phone Personal Speed Dial Numbers for the extension can be programmed only by using Centralized Telephone Programming m lf auser has a standard phone or a non display system phone Extension Name Displayjfor the extension can be programmed only by using Centralized Telephone Programming During Centralized Telephone Programming the display phone at extension 10 or 11 takes on the characteristics of the telephone being programmed including any System Programming settings and lines assigned to the phone If you have any 34 button phones in the system you must use a 34 button display phone to program since an 18 button phone cannot be used to program a 34 button phone Also if your system has both PARTNER model and MLS model phones it is recommended that you use a PARTNER model display phone at the programming extension Programming 2 23 PARTNER 18D Phone a o a asl Recall o m ia Line ol__ Programmable Buttons ae Any unused line button is programmable Figure 2 6 Example of PARTNER 18D phone as a Key Extension PARTNER 6 Phone
156. an turn on Do Not Disturb to send that coverage call and all subsequent calls immediately to the covering extension If there is no answer at the covering extension the calls go to your voice mailbox after the number of rings specified with Cover Rings 117 Use Line Coverage Extension 208 to identify an extension as the owner of a specific outside line To send a covered call immediately to the covering extension If Call Coverage is not turned on while the call is ringing press the Call Coverage button The ringing call is sent immediately to the covering extension subsequent calls go to the covering extension after the specified number of Call Coverage Rings If Call Coverage is turned on press the Do Not Disturb button All covered calls are sent immediately to the covering extension until you turn off Do Not Disturb To send a call immediately to the voice messaging system If VMS Cover is not turned on while the call is ringing press the VMS Cover button The ringing call is sent immediately to your voice mailbox subsequent calls go to your voice mailbox after the specified number of VMS Cover Rings If VMS Cover is turned on press the Do Not Disturb button All covered calls are sent immediately to the voice messaging system until you turn off Do Not Disturb To send covered calls immediately to coverage when Call Coverage and VMS Cover are both on press Do Not Disturb All calls go to the covering exte
157. and off at any time even during a call Users cannot join calls using pool buttons regardless of the Automatic Extension Privacy setting or the state of the Privacy button Programming Using To program a Privacy button 1 2 3 4 5 Press Feature Lo Lo _System Program _System Program Central Tel Program Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button with lights Press Feature o z Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode From a system phone press the programmed button to turn Privacy on press it again to turn it off Use the button like a switch when the light is on Privacy is on Privacy F07 5 159 Recall F03 Description This feature causes the system to send a timed switchhook flash over the telephone line to recall a new dial tone or to access a PBX central office or Centrex feature such as Call Waiting Related Features m f users have trouble with Recall use Recall Timer Duration 107 to adjust the length of the Recall signal Your local phone company can tell you the correct setting for most Centrex systems the correct setting is 800 msec or 32 You can press Spkr to insert a Recall signal in an Auto Dial or Speed Dial number provided it is the first character in the stored number For examples see Special Dialing Functions Considerations m Using Recall on
158. appears on the display Continue programming or exit programming mode Line Ringing 5 125 Loudspeaker Paging 170 Description This feature accesses the loudspeaker paging system if you have one connected to the system through the PAGE jack on the primary processor module Related Features m Users can make Simultaneous Paging announcements over the loudspeaker paging system and the idle system phones assigned to Calling Group 1 See Calling Group Extensions 502 to program Calling Group 1 m You can specify the loudspeaker paging system as a hotline alert extension so that the hotline phone can be used to make announcements over the loudspeaker For more information see Hotline 603 Considerations m You can program a Loudspeaker Paging button on a system phone to access the loudspeaker with one touch m If the loudspeaker paging system is in use a user attempting to make an announcement hears a busy tone Programming To program a Loudspeaker Paging button 1 Press Feature 0 Lo System Program System Program Central Tel Program Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature 2 3 Press a programmable button 4 Press left intercom Z o 5 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using System Phone To make an announcement over the loudspeaker paging system 1 Press the programmed button or _intercom z Lo then lift the ha
159. ar ringing after Step 2 above If no one answers the call rings back at your extension unless a different transfer return extension is programmed for your extension lift the handset and you are reconnected to the caller Transferring Calls 5 189 m To make a voice signaled transfer to a system phone in Step 2Jof the procedure on the previous page press x plus the two digit extension number Then listen for one of the following responses If you hear one beep you have reached an idle system phone You can speak after the beep Your voice is heard through the other extension s speaker If no one answers or the call is refused press the line or pool button next to the winking green light to reconnect to the caller If the call is accepted hang up If you hear two beeps you have reached a busy system phone with Voice Interrupt On Busy Assigned You can speak after the beeps Your voice is heard through the recipient s handset or speaker Be aware that the third party to whom the recipient is speaking probably also will hear the two beeps and the faint sound of your voice Be brief and discreet in your interruption If the recipient has a Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button wait for a response If the call is accepted hang up to complete the transfer The call rings at the recipient s extension If the call is refused press the line or pool button next to the winking green light to reconnect to the caller
160. ase the characters per inch setting for the printer m lf the call records print without wrapping to the next line the problem is solved m If the problem remains change the output format back to 15 digits In the continental U S help is available at 1 800 628 2888 Outside the continental U S call your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer 6 14 Troubleshooting Zeroes Print in Station or Duration Field on SMDR Printout Possible Cause lf zeroes print in the Station field a caller is hanging up before someone answers the call If zeroes print in the Duration field the user is attempting to answer a call but disconnecting it inadvertently What to do If zeroes print in the Station field frequently you may want to observe how long calls are ringing before they are answered If zeroes print in the Duration field instruct the user at the extension answering the call to press the button corresponding to a ringing line and speak to the caller without pressing any other button System Problems Call Rings Continuously When Answered No One At Other End Possible Cause Automatic System Answer or Direct Extension Dial is used on a system that does not support far end disconnect What to do Call your local phone company and find out whether they support far end disconnect If the local phone company does not support far end disconnect you should not set the Automatic System Answer Mode 121 to
161. assignment of features to programmable buttons Telephone Programming can be done either centrally or from the user s own extension See a so Centralized Telephone Programming and 200 module The Lucent Technologies equipment component that has line jacks for connecting up to two outside lines to the control unit 206 module The Lucent Technologies equipment component that contains jacks for connecting up to two outside lines and up to six extensions to the control unit o V Verification of Account Codes See Forced Account Code List VMS Voice Messaging System See Voice messaging system VMS o VMS Hunt Group Hunt Group 7 reserved by the system to identify extensions that are associated with the voice messaging system hardware See also Group Call Distribution and Hunt Group Voice Interrupt On Busy A special intercom call that lets a user interrupt then speak to another user who is busy on a call See also Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back A feature that lets the recipient of a voice interrupt on busy call respond to the originator of that call See also Voice Interrupt On Busy Voice Mail coverage A voice messaging system feature that provides Call Answer Service when a call is not answered b a covered extension See a so Call Answer Service Voice Mail Service A voice messaging system feature that lets users retrieve messages and record greetings Voice m
162. at the end of this guide after the appendixes If the form is missing send your comments and recommendations for changes to Publications Manager Lucent Technologies 211 Mount Airy Road Room 2W 226 Basking Ridge NJ 07920 FAX 1 908 953 6912 About This Guide Overview Contents Important Safety Instructions Features and Capabilities System Components m Control Unit 1 4 System Modules 1 4 System Capacit System Mode Intercom Autodialers Standard Telephones Auxiliary Equipment 1 10 m Requirements 1 10 m Connecting Standard Devices 1 10 5 1 5 1 5 1 9 1 9 Important Safety Instructions l ii WARNING The following list provides basic safety precautions that should always be followed when using your telephone equipment 1 2 3 Read and understand all instructions Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product Unplug all telephone connections before cleaning DO NOT use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners Use a damp cloth for cleaning This product should be serviced by or taken to a qualified repair center when service or repair work is required DO NOT use this product near water for example in a wet basement location DO NOT place this product on an unstable cart stand or table 7 Never push objects of any kind into slots or openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in a risk of fire or electric sho
163. ations Using Call Park typically is used for pooled extensions in Hybrid mode because it allows users to retrieve calls without having to know which line the call is on It is recommended that you park only one call at a time from your extension to ensure that you know which caller you are talking to when you pick up the parked call Call Park is useful for standard phone users because they can retrieve a parked call without concern for which line the call is on System Phone To park a call 1 While on a call press _Transtr and dial your two digit extension number or press the Auto Dial button programmed for your extension Hang up If the call is not picked up within three minutes it rings back at your extension If you used an Auto Dial button the green light next to the button flutters To retrieve a parked call using Call Pickup 1 2 Dial Intercom 6 Dial the extension number or press an Auto Dial button for the extension where the call is parked 5 44 Call Park Standard Phone To park a call 1 While on a call press the switchhook or _Recai J The call is put on hold and you hear intercom dial tone Dial your two digit extension number Hang up If the call is not picked up within three minutes it rings back at your extension If you are on another call when the parked call returns you will not receive notification even if Call Waiting is Assigned to your extension The park
164. ause it will prevent the outside number from being dialed Remove external hotlines from Night Service Group Extensions 504 Calling Group Extensions 502 and Hunt Group Extensions 505 Do not assign Forced Account Code Entry 307 to the external hotline Considerations Under certain conditions of heavy telephone usage the external hotline may be unable to dial the programmed number immediately for example if many of the standard devices connected to your system dial out at the same time See Using for more information A standard phone without a dialpad is recommended for use as the external hotline You can identify several extensions as external hotlines Do not assign an external hotline to extension 10 16 22 28 34 40 46 or 52 which are reserved as power failure extensions External Hotline 311 5 87 Valid Entries Extensions 11 15 17 21 23 27 29 33 35 39 41 45 47 51 and 53 57 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned vY Programming To identify an external hotline extension 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 3 1 4 2 Atthe Extension prompt enter the external hotline extension number see Valid Entries on the previous page For example to program extension 30 as the external hotline press 3 o 3 To assign or unassign the extension press _Next Data until the appropriate value displays 4 To program another extension
165. available for users at other extensions when all other lines are busy CONTROL UNIT Figure 4 10 Send and Receive Modem To Use Calls on the modem line line A ring only at extension X Also line A is the ast line selected by all other extensions so the modem line is unavailable for the modem only when all other lines in the system are being used To Program 1 If extension X is a key extension use Line Assignment 301 to assign one or more lines to extension X including line A If extension X is a pooled extension use Pool Line Assignment 207 remove line A from all pools Then use Pool Extension Assignment 314 to assign pools to extension X Also use Line Assignment 301 to assign line A and any other individual lines to extension X 2 For extension X set Automatic Line Selection to select pools and outside lines first line A selected last For all other extensions set Automatic Line Selection so that line A is the last line in the select sequence That way the modem line is used for outgoing voice calls only when all other lines are busy 3 Set Line Ringing for line A at extension X to Immediate Ring Set all other lines or pools assigned to extension X to No Ring For all other extensions set line A to No Ring to Using Auxiliary Equipment 4 21 4 Set Automatic Extension Privacy 304 for extension X to Assigned 5 Make sure extension X is not assigned as a Call
166. because it changes Pool Line Assignment 207 Pool Extension Assignment 314 JPool Access Restriction 315 Automatic Line Ringing for existing pools back to factory settings Additionally it changes 302 Automatic Line Selection and for individual lines back to factory settings To change pool assignments without affecting other settings use Pool Line Assignment 207 and Pool Extension Assignment 314 In Key mode do not use this procedure if you add lines to the system after initial setup because it changes Line Assignment 301 Line Access Restriction 302 Automatic Line Selection and Line Ringing for existing lines back to factory settings To change line assignments without affecting other settings use Line Assignment 301 Considerations m You can use this feature to tell the system how many lines are actually connected at the control unit For example if some line jacks do not have lines connected use this procedure to indicate the number of jacks that actually have lines connected otherwise the line numbers associated with empty jacks would be assigned to phones as though there were actually lines connected m You can use this procedure to limit the number of lines that are automatically assigned to all extensions For example if there are ten lines connected at the control unit you can use this procedure to set the number of lines to eight so that only the first eight lines
167. ble Cause 3 Phone is plugged into the wrong jack of the system phone or the bridging adapter What to do Plug the phone into the correct jack see the PARTNER Communications System Installation guide for instructions m If the phone works properly the problem is solved m Ifthe problem remains go to Possible Cause 4 Possible Cause 4 Wrong bridging adapter is used in combination extension What to do First unplug the bridging adapter from the wall jack Then unplug the phone from the adapter and plug the phone directly into the wall jack m lf the phone works there is a problem with the bridging adapter Replace the bridging adapter use only a Lucent Technologies 267F2 bridging adapter If the problem persists call the hotline m If the phone still does not work properly call the hotline In the continental U S help is available at 1 800 628 2888 Outside the continental U S call your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer Troubleshooting 6 13 Problems with Auxiliary Equipment Standard Device Does Not Answer Possible Cause A standard device Such as a fax machine or answering machine does not answer intercom calls or transferred calls because it does not recognize the distinctive ringing pattern used by the system What to do Change the extension s setting for Distinctive Ring 308 to Not Active so the extension uses the same ringing for intercom and transferred calls as
168. button like a switch when the light is on Do Not Disturb is on Do Not Disturb F01 5 79 Doorphone Alert Extensions 606 Description This System Programming procedure identifies up to 48 extensions that are to signal when a doorphone button is pressed When a person uses the doorphone it signals all alert extensions at the same time If the alert extension is a system phone the call signals with a unique ding dong sound to distinguish it from other calls Additionally if you have two doorphones they signal with different tones so you can distinguish between them Related Features m You must use Doorphone Extensions 604 and 605 to identify the extensions to which doorphones are connected m f Do Not Disturbjis active at a doorphone alert extension the person at the doorphone hears signaling but the alert extension is not signaled Considerations You cannot bridge two doorphones together Valid Entries 1 Not an Alert Extension 2 Doorphone 1 Alert Extension 3 Doorphone 2 Alert Extension 4 Doorphones 1 and 2 Alert Extension Programming To identify doorphone alert extensions 1 Press Feature Lo Lo System Program System Program la 6 Lo Le 2 Enter the first alert extension number 10 57 For example to identify extension 10 press 1 0 To change the alert status press Next Data until the appropriate value displays 4 To identify another alert extension p
169. can identify coverage calls Coverage Call for XX appears on the display when a coverage call rings at a covering extension rather than Caller ID information if available m If the covering extension has an Auto Dial button for the originating extension the light shows green flutter while the coverage call is ringing at the covering extension If the user at the extension lifts the handset he or she will be connected to this call m Intercom transferred and outside calls on lines assigned ownership can be covered Group calls forwarded calls transfer return calls voice signaled calls Voice Interrupt on Busy calls Wake Up Service calls and calls to doorphone alert extensions cannot be covered m Do not designate any of the extensions in Hunt Group 7 which contains the extensions associated with the voice messaging system as a covering extension m A single extension can cover multiple extensions however an extension programmed for Call Coverage can have only one covering extension Only one Call Coverage button can be programmed per extension m The user at an extension who has activated Call Coverage can intercept an outside call routed for coverage by pressing the outside line button m You can program Call Coverage on a button on a system phone Use a button with lights if you want a visual indication when your calls are being covered When the green light is on your calls are being covered when the green light is off
170. ce rapidly The first party is now on hold You hear intercom dial tone To add an outside party dial 9 or a pool access code plus the outside number If the number is busy or does not answer hang up and the first party rings back To add an inside party dial the two digit extension number If the extension is busy or does not answer press the switchhook down once rapidly and you are reconnected with the first party When the second party answers press the switchhook down once rapidly You are now connected with both parties Repeat Steps 2 through 4 to add one or two more parties Conference Calls 5 55 Conference Drop F06 Description This feature drops the last outside party added to a conference call without disconnecting the other parties Related Features m For instructions on setting up conference calls see Conference Calls m You can use Outside Conference Denial 109 to disallow conference calls with multiple outside parties Considerations You can program a Conference Drop button on a system phone to use the feature with one touch Programming To program a Conference Drop button 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button Press Feature Lo 6 ao fF DN Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using System Ph
171. cedure repeat above steps DIAL 405 DIAL PRESS _Next item to assign another list To program another extension PRESS Next Procedure Prev Procedure enter a new extension number and repeat above steps EMERGENCY PHONE NUMBER LIST DIAL 406 DIAL a list entry 01 10 To add entry DIAL DISALLOWED PHONE NUMBER LISTS DIAL the telephone number up to PRESS Enter PRESS Remove to remove a list entry PRESS Remove to remove a list entry PRESS _Next Item to program another PRESS _Next item to program another enter a new list number and DISALLOWED LIST ASSIGNMENTS DIAL an extension number 10 57 DIAL a list number 1 4 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned PRESS Enter PRESS Remove to remove a list entry PRESS _Next tem to program another DIAL the telephone number up to 12 digits list entry ALLOWED PHONE NUMBER LISTS DIAL 407 DIAL a list number 1 4 DIAL alist entry 01 10 To add entry DIAL DIAL the telephone number up to 12 digits PRESS list entry To program another list PRESS Next Procedure Prev Procedure enter a new list number and repeat above steps TO CYCLE THROUGH AVAILABLE SETTINGS PRESS Next Data Or Prev Data TO RETURN TO FACTORY SETTING Remove ALLOWED LIST ASSIGNMENTS DIAL 408 DIAL an extension number 10 57 DIAL a list number 1 4 1 Ass
172. cedure specifies the number of times 0 9 an incoming call should ring before it is answered by the Direct Extension Dial feature Related Features m Direct Extension Dial affects incoming calls only on lines identified using Direct Extension Dial Lines 205 You must program a button on the system display phone at extension 10 to turn Direct Extension Dial on and off Use Direct Extension Dial Button to program the button You must use Direct Extension Dial Record Playback to record a message to prompt callers to dial an extension number or Hunt Group number after the system answers an outside call You can set SMDR Talk Time 611 to Active to include the Talk field on call reports For an incoming outside call answered by Direct Extension Dial this field shows the call duration minus the time the greeting played and the caller waited for someone to answer the call If you use Caller ID make sure Direct Extension Dial Delay is set to 2 rings or more to ensure that Caller ID information is captured Considerations This feature works independently of Line Ringing which determines how an outside call rings at the extension immediately after a 20 second delay or not at all Direct Extension Dial Delay specifies the number of rings a caller hears before the system answers the call Valid Entries 0 9 0 rings answered immediately 2v Programming To change the number of times an incoming call rings at extension 10
173. ches away from the edge of your desk If you have difficulty hearing the other party try increasing the speaker volume If you have background noise try turning off the microphone when the party at the other end is speaking and turning it on when you speak If the difficulty persists lift your handset to continue the conversation In conference rooms a separate speakerphone such as the Lucent Technologies S203 Speakerphone is recommended since the built in speaker on a system phone is designed for individual use Standard Telephones 3 8 In addition to system phones you can connect industry standard touch tone or rotary dial phones and even some feature phones which have built in calling features directly to the system You can also combine standard phones on the same extension with system phones or other devices without using expensive adapters or connectors Standard phones can do many of the things that system phones can do and you can save money by using them in certain situations when a system phone is not needed Follow these guidelines when using standard phones m Use standard phones as power failure backups In the event of a power failure standard phones at extensions 10 16 22 28 34 40 46 and 52 connect to lines 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 and 15 respectively for continued operation but system phones will not work You can connect standard phones in combination with system phones at power failure extensions
174. ck Never spill liquid of any kind on the product 8 Avoid using the telephone during an electrical storm There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning 9 DONOT use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak 10 The product is provided with a three wire grounding type plug This is a safety feature DO NOT defeat the safety purpose of the grounding type plug DO NOT staple or otherwise attach the power supply cord to building surfaces A CAUTION DO NOT block or cover the ventilation slots and openings They prevent the product from overheating DO NOT place the product in a separate enclosure unless proper ventilation is provided SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Overview Features and Capabilities The following list provides an overview of the system s features Full line of system phones some with displays showing date time and programming and feedback messages All system phones can provide access to multiple outside lines and system features m Two modes of system operation for ease in accessing outside lines individual lines can be assigned one per button or multiple lines can be grouped together and accessed using a single button m Programmable buttons on system phones providing one touch access to system features simply by pressing the button m Intuitive operation of basic call handling capabilities including transfer conference and hold m Intercom inside calling to
175. continental U S help is available at 1 800 628 2888 Outside the continental U S call your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer Troubleshooting 6 17 Specifications Capacities System 24 outside lines via line jacks on four 206 plus four 400 modules 48 extensions via extension jacks on eight 206 modules 1 loudspeaker paging system via PAGE jack on processor module a 1 audio source via MUSIC ON HOLD jack on processor module RCA phono plug required 1 call reporting device via SMDR jack on processor module 355A F adapter required 2 doorphones using 2 extension jacks 1 voice messaging system PARTNER MAIL which connects to either 3 or 5 extension jacks or PARTNER MAIL VS which occupies a slot in the control unit and uses 2 extension jacks 206 Module a 2 outside lines 6 extensions 400 Module 4 outside lines Extension J ack a Maximum 2 devices per extension jack total REN on jack not to exceed 2 0 System phone REN is 0 0 zero No more than one system phone per jack For programming a system display phone must be connected to extension 10 or 11 Dimensions Primary Proc Mod 11 D x 17 H x 1 5 and Weights Exp Proc Mod 11 D x 17 H x 1 5 W approx 206 module 11 D x 17 H x 1 5 400 module 11 D x 17 H x 1 5 a Backplane amp cover 12 D x 19 H x 11 W PARTNER 34D phon
176. control unit is the heart of the system it is made up of one or two carriers and it houses the system modules You can use either the primary carrier or the primary carrier and the expansion carrier if you need more lines and extensions Each carrier housing includes a backplane and a cover All system modules slide into the backplane which channels power to the system The cover slides onto the front of the backplane after all the system modules have been installed A WARNING There are no customer serviceable components inside the system modules or backplane There are hazardous voltages within that can cause severe or fatal personal injury DO NOT OPEN THE MODULES System Modules The following system modules can be installed in your system Primary Processor Module provides the software intelligence that controls the system s features It has jacks for a music on hold audio source a loudspeaker paging system and a call reporting SMDR device such as a printer It also has a green wire grounding screw to properly ground the primary carrier Expansion Processor Module extends the primary processor module s software capabilities to the lines and extensions located on modules in the expansion carrier It has a green wire grounding screw to properly ground the expansion carrier 206E Module has jacks to connect a maximum of two outside telephone lines and six extensions to the system You can connect telephones and other teleco
177. coverage you selected A written explanation of Lucent Technologies types of maintenance coverage may be obtained from Lucent Technologies by calling 1 800 247 7000 in the continental U S only If you purchased your system from a Lucent Technologies Authorized Dealer contact your reseller for the details of the maintenance plan applicable to your system This Lucent Technologies limited warranty covers damage to the system caused by power surges Unless otherwise expressly agreed to in a written agreement signed by Lucent Technologies Lucent Technologies will not be responsible under this limited warranty for damages resulting from m Failure to follow Lucent Technologies installation operation or maintenance instructions Unauthorized system modification movement or alteration Unauthorized use of common carrier communication services accessed through the system m Abuse misuse or negligent acts or omissions of the customer and persons under the customer s control or Acts of third parties and acts of God LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES OBLIGATION TO REPAIR REPLACE OR REFUND AS SET FORTH ABOVE IS YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDY EXCEPT AS SPECIFICALLY SET FORTH ABOVE LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES ITS AFFILIATES SUPPLIERS AND DEALERS MAKE NO WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Limitation of Liability Except as provided below the liability of Lucen
178. d Marked System Speed Dial Numbers Dialing restrictions for extensions not in the Night Service Group remain the same as during normal daytime operation Programming To program a System Password 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 4 Lo 3 A display similar to the following appears Set System Password Data 2 Enter a four digit password or press Remove to delete the existing password 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Using 1 Before lifting the handset or turning on the speaker at a PARTNER or MLS model phone press _Hoid 2 Enter the password The System Password does not appear on display phones 3 Press an outside line button or press _Intercom 8 and a two digit line number or a pool button or press intercom and a three digit pool access code and lift the handset 4 Dial the number The password is in effect until you hang up the phone 5 180 System Password 403 System Reset Programming Saved 728 Description This System Programming procedure resets the system while retaining the currently programmed settings Reset the system only when it fails to function correctly after a power failure or down period Related Features After a power failure or system reset 7 and return to the status on or off that they were in immediately prior to the power failure or system reset m The VMS Cover bu
179. d for both the control unit and system phones Business Day service is performed during normal business hours However if you need 24 hour service protection during the warranty period on the control unit in case there is a major system failure you can purchase an Around the Clock service contract from your local Lucent Technologies sales office 1 800 247 7000 in the continental U S only Around the Clock service is not available for phones If you purchased or leased your system through a Lucent Technologies Authorized Dealer contact your dealer for repairs Post Warranty Repairs If you purchased your system from Lucent Technologies and you have a post warranty service contract Lucent Technologies service is provided under the terms of that contract To significantly reduce unexpected repair costs after the warranty period you can purchase a post warranty service contract from Lucent Technologies If you do not have a contract Lucent Technologies service is provided on a time and materials basis by calling the hotline A contract provides to you within the applicable coverage period and response times service calls with no charge for parts and labor on covered repairs Both Business Day and Around the Clock coverages of varying lengths are available To order a post warranty service contract call 1 800 247 7000 in the continental U S only If you leased your system from Lucent Technologies Business Day service is included in
180. d on the Automatic Line Selection programmed for the extension Alternatively the user can use Direct Line Pickup to access a specific line Valid Entries 1 Assigned 2 3 Not Assigned Select Button then press a line button to assign the line to that button Programming To assign lines to a specific extension 1 2 Press Feature o 0 System Program System Program 2 Lo L4 Enter the extension number to be programmed 10 57 For example to program extension 15 press 1 5 The red light next to each button that has a line assigned is on steady the red light next to each button that has a pool assigned flashes To remove all existing line assignments press Remove before selecting a line Enter the line number 01 24 to be assigned For example to select line 1 press o 1 5 120 Line Assignment 301 At this point If you want to assign the line to the first available button with lights press _Next Data until a display similar to the following appears Line Assignment 15 LO1 1 Assigned If you want to remove a line assignment press _Next Data until a display similar to the following appears Line Assignment 15 L01 2 Not Assigned If you want to assign the line to a specific button press 3 A display similar to the following appears Line Assignment 15 L01 3 Select a Button Then press a button with lights to assign the line to that button If you us
181. de call is a call between two extensions without using an outside line There are two ways you can signal the extension you are calling by ringing or by voice 5 130 Making Calls System Phone You can lift the handset or press _Spkr before dialing then as Press an idle intercom button red and green lights are both off You hear intercom dial tone and the green light next to the intercom button is on steady To ring the extension dial the two digit extension number or To voice signal a system phone at the extension press x plus the two digit extension number and listen for one of the following responses m If you hear one beep you have reached an idle system phone You can speak after the beep Your voice is heard through the other extension s speaker If the recipient is present he or she can reply m lf you hear two beeps you have reached a busy system phone with Voice Interrupt On Busy Assigned You can speak after the beeps Be aware that the third party to whom the recipient is speaking probably also will hear the two beeps and the faint sound of your voice If the recipient has a Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button wait for a response m If you hear ringing you have reached an idle standard MDC 9000 or MDW 9000 phone or a busy system phone with Voice Interrupt On Busy Not Assigned Your call is not completed until someone answers Standard Phone 1 Lift the handset You hear int
182. de line so the extension can activate Call Coverage for that line An extension s owned line is eligible for coverage only if Line Ringing is set to Immediate Ring or Delayed Ring and Access Restriction 302 or Pool Access Restriction 315 is set to No Restriction or In Only m You can use Call Coverage Rings 116 to specify the number of times a covered call rings at an extension before it is sent to the covering extension m f Call Coverage and Do Not Disturbjare active covered calls are routed immediately to the covering extension without ringing the extension first m You can turn on Call Coverage while a call is ringing to send a call immediately for coverage Similarly if Call Coverage is on and a call begins to ring you can turn on Do Not Disturb to send that call immediately for coverage See Send All Calls m If an extension has Call Coverage and VMS Cover active covered calls ring at the covering extension for the specified number of Call Coverage Rings Then If the covering extension does not answer the call is routed to the voice mailbox of the extension that activated Call Coverage after the specified number of VMS Cover Rings 117 If the covering extension has Do Not Disturb active the call is routed immediately to the voice mailbox of the extension that activated Call Coverage m If an extension has Call Coverage active without voice mail coverage covered calls ring at the cov
183. dividual extension or to a group Program the fax machine to dial x plus the extension number for a voice signaled call z anda group number 1 4 for a call to a Calling Group z z and a group number 1 6 for a call to a Hunt Group m Program the fax machine to turn on the message light at someone s extension by dialing 4 o 2 plus the extension number m Program the fax machine to dial z o to make its recorded announcement over your loudspeaker paging system 4 14 Using Auxiliary Equipment m Program the fax machine to dial z Lo to make its recorded announcement over your loudspeaker paging system and the speakers of idle system phones in Calling Group 1 For all of these examples program the fax machine extension s Automatic Line Selection to select intercom first followed by whatever outside lines or pools you want to assign to it If you set the fax extension to select intercom first and the machine has an auto dial feature program a 9 and one of more pauses if available before each Auto Dial number In Hybrid mode if the call is to be placed using a specific pool program the pool access code and a few pauses before each auto dial number When manually making a call dial 9 to get an outside line or pool For instructions on how to set Rae tare see Chapter 5 Setting Up Fax Machines There are many ways to set up fax machines The following configurations are basic and easy to use
184. dure to assign outside lines to Hunt Group 7 for Automated Attendant Service Callers hear a greeting and are prompted to enter digits to transfer to a specific extension or group without the assistance of the receptionist Valid Entries 1 Assigned for hunting to groups 1 6 or to group 7 for the voice messaging system s Automated Attendant Service 2 Not Assigned 3 VMS Line Cover available only for Hunt Group 7 Programming 1 Press Feature Lo Lo System Program System Program la 2 Lo 6 2 Atthe Group prompt enter a group number 1 6 7 for the voice messaging system For example to select group 1 press 1 3 Atthe Line prompt enter the desired line number For example to select line 1 press 0 1 4 To assign or remove a line for groups 1 6 or to assign or remove a line or use VMS Line Cover for group 7 press _Next Data until the appropriate value displays 5 At this point m TO program another line press Next Item or _Prev Item until the line number shows on the display Then repeat Step 4 m To program another group press _Next Procedure _Prev Procedure enter a new group number and repeat Steps 3 and 4 6 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Group Call Distribution 206 5 95 Group Calling Ring Page 17G 1 7G Description This feature lets users ring page or transfer calls simultaneously to all of the extensions in any o
185. e PARTNER 18D phone PARTNER 6 phone MDC 9000 phone MDW 9000 phone PARTNER CA48 2 75 D x 9 8 D x 3 75 H x 9 3 W 9 8 D x 3 75 H PARTNER 18 phone 9 8 D x 3 75 H x 7 9 W 9 8 D x 3 75 H x 6 17 W 9 4 D x 3 4 H x 7 x 7 9 W Ss Te asa DS W or 27 9 x 43 2 x 3 8 cm or 27 9 x 43 2 x 3 8 cm W or 27 9 x 43 2 x 3 8 cm W or 27 9 x 43 2 x 3 8 cm or 30 5 x 48 3 x 27 9 cm or 24 9 x 9 5 x 23 6 cm or 24 9 x 9 5 x 20 1 cm or 24 9 x 9 5 x 20 1 cm or 24 9 x 9 5 x 15 5 cm W or 23 9 x 8 6 x 17 8 cm 6 H x 4 W or 24 8 x 15 2 x 10 1 cm 8 D x 3 75 H x 6 1 W or 24 9 x 9 5 x 15 5 cm 4 0 lbs or 1 8 kgs 4 0 lbs or 1 8 kgs 4 5 lbs or 2 0 kgs 4 0 lbs or 1 8 kgs 5 5 lbs or 2 5 kgs 2 7 lbs or 1 2 kgs 2 4 lbs or 1 1 kgs 2 3 Ibs or 1 0 kgs 1 9 lbs or 0 9 kgs 2 8 Ibs or 1 3 kgs 2 25 lbs or 1 0 kgs 1 5 lbs or 0 7 kgs Autodialer The two devices combined on an extension jack can be a system phone with a standard device or two standard devices DO NOT connect two system phones to the same extension jack If a device lists two RENs use the higher number when adding RENs Specifications A 1 Switch Fabric Full digital nonblocking Electrical Specifications Primary Processor Module Specifications 10 Watts 35 BTU hour per 400 module normal and maximum power consumption 65 Watts 225 BTU hour per 206 module during normal operation 100 Watts
186. e option 3 after a line has been assigned the line moves from the old button to the new button you select At this point To program another line for this extension press _Next item or _Prev Item until the line number shows on the display Then repeat Step 4 To program another extension press _Next Procedure Prev Procedure and begin at Step 2 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Line Assignment 301 5 121 Line Coverage Extension 208 Description This System Programming procedure identifies an extension as the owner of a specific outside line so the extension can activate Call Coverage or VMS Cover for that line Related Features m An extension s owned line is eligible for coverage only if Line Ringing is set to Immediate Ring or Delayed Ring and Line Access Restriction 302 is set to No Restriction or In Only m Use Call Coverage to redirect an extension s calls on owned lines to the covering extension m Use Call Coverage Rings 116 to specify the number of times a call rings at an extension before it is sent to the covering extension m Use VMS Cover or Automatic VMS Cover 310 to redirect the extension s calls on owned lines to the voice messaging system m Use VMS Cover Rings 117 to specify the number of times a call rings at the owner s extension before it is sent to the voice messaging system m Users with Call Coveragejor VMS
187. e call came in is free to place and receive other calls However to use Centrex transfer you must be able to dial the extension directly using the Centrex extension number if a Centrex line is shared by several extensions you cannot use Centrex transfer to direct the call to a specific extension For more information on such features see the documentation for your PBX or Centrex system When your Centrex or PBX documentation tells you to use a switchhook flash use the system Recall feature instead On a system phone a transferred call rings with an intercom ring ring BEEP until the originator hangs up then it changes to a transfer ring ring BEEP BEEP On a standard phone a transferred call rings with an intercom ring ring ring until the originator hangs up then it changes to a transfer ring ring ring ring How to Transfer a Call System Phone To pass a call to another extension 1 While on a call press _transtr The call is put on hold and you hear intercom dial tone The green light next to the line or pool button winks 2 Dial the extension number or z z and a Hunt Group number or z and a Calling Group number to which you want the call transferred 3 When someone answers announce the call then hang up If no one answers or the call is refused press the line or pool button next to the winking green light to reconnect to the caller If you do not wish to announce the call hang up as soon as you he
188. e call is disconnected The system sends the information through a 1200 baud serial interface to either a serial printer or a call accounting device The device connects directly to the SMDR jack on the primary processor module Use the following programming procedures for call reporting SMDR Record Type 608 to specify the type of calls that you want to record for call reporting either all calls or outgoing calls only SMDR Top of Page 609 to notify the system that the printer has been aligned to the top of a new page SMDR Output Format 610 to identify whether a maximum of 15 digits or 24 digits is printed for dialed numbers on the call report SMDR Talk Time 611 to include a field on the call report that records the time a user spends on an incoming outside call from the time the user answers the call to the time the call is disconnected from the system Forced Account Code Entry 307 to identify extensions that are required to enter an account code prior to making outside calls and Forced Account Code List 409 to create a list of valid account codes Display Language 303 to specify the language to be used for display messages The call report header is printed in the same language as is specified for extension 10 Using Auxiliary Equipment Call Reports A call report is a page of information that begins with a header The header includes field names that describe the information in each c
189. e length of the Rotary Dialing Timeout 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 1 Lo 8 2 Press Next Data until the appropriate value displays 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 164 Rotary Dialing Timeout 108 Save Number Redial F04 Description This feature is available only on system phones This feature saves into temporary memory the last outside number up to 28 digits dialed from an extension with a system phone Users can use this feature to save a number before they hang up on a busy or non answering call Once saved the number can be redialed again at any time The number stays in memory until a different one is saved Related Features m Unlike Last Number Redial this feature lets the user make other calls before redialing the saved number m System Speed Dial Numbers cannot be saved using this feature Considerations m This feature redials all digits dialed on the outside call for which the feature was used except account codes m You can program a Save Number Redial button on a system phone to access the feature with one touch If you do you can press the button to save the number and press the button later to redial the number m You can program this feature on more than one button to save more than one number Programming Using To program a Save Number Redial button 1 Press Feature Lo Lo System Program Syste
190. e licensed sources of music to use with this feature you may wish to contact Telephonetics International Inc at 1 800 446 5366 Or you can purchase a Magic On Hold system from Lucent Technologies which does not require you to obtain a license 5 138 Music On Hold 602 Valid Entries 1 Active Y 2 Not Active Programming To change the setting of the MUSIC ON HOLD jack 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 6 0 2 2 To activate or deactivate the MUSIC ON HOLD jack press _Next Data until the appropriate value displays 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Music On Hold 602 5 139 Night Service Button 503 Description This System Programming procedure identifies a button on the system phone at extension 10 to be used to turn Night Service on and off When Night Service is on all lines and pools assigned to the phones of the users in the Night Service Group ring immediately regardless of their normal Line Ringing settings Night Service is useful if you want phones to ring after regular business hours For example although Shipping Department workers do not answer calls directly during the day you want them to answer incoming calls after hours Related Features Night Service affects only the extensions identified using Night Service Group Extensions 504 If you program a System Password 403 the password must be entered when tu
191. e message follow the instructions from Step 5 above m To play back the message follow the instructions from Step 5 below m To exit from the procedure hang up the handset 5 30 Automatic System Answer Record Playback 1891 To play back an Automatic System Answer message 1 Turn off Automatic System Answer and Direct Extension Dial and wait for any calls in the process of being answered by these features to be completed Lift the handset of the system display phone at extension 10 or 11 Press the intercom button Dial e 2 4 A display similar to the following appears ASA 1 Record 2 Play Press 2 A display similar to the following appears Message Playback After the message is played back you hear a confirmation tone and a display similar to the following appears ASA 1 Record 2 Play At this point m To re record the message follow the instructions from Step 5 for recording a message m To play back the message follow the instructions from Step 5 directly above m To exit from the procedure hang up the handset Automatic System Answer Record Playback 1891 5 31 Automatic VMS Cover 310 Description This feature applies only if you have a voice messaging system This System Programming procedure lets you automatically route an extension s unanswered intercom and transferred calls to the Call Answer Service of the voice messaging system after a specified number of rings default for all
192. e message light on system phones and standard phones that have message lights See Standard Telephones in Chapter 1 for a list of standard phones that have message lights For message waiting capability standard phones with message waiting lights must be connected to an R3 1 or later 206 module and the system must be equipped with an R3 1 or later primary processor module On a standard phone the message light flashes only when the phone is idle to indicate that the extension has received a message Do not use this feature for an extension that is covered by the voice messaging system The voice messaging system automatically turns on the message light at a subscriber s extension when a message is left in the mailbox If you use this feature to signal someone at a doorphone extension you must use Message Light Off to turn off the light You can program a Message Light On button on a system phone to turn the message light on at a specific extension with one touch Programming To program a Message Light On button 1 2 3 4 5 Press Feature o 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button Press Feature 0 9 Optionally dial the two digit extension number of your most common destination or skip to Step 6 if you want only the feature code on the button Program another button f
193. e phone number you just entered press Remove and repeat Steps 4 and 5 m To delete the phone number you just entered press Remove m To enter other phone numbers in this list press Next Item and repeat Steps 4 and 5 m To create another list press Next Procedure Prev Procedure and go to Step 2 7 Select another procedure using _Next Procedure Or Prev Procedure or exit programming mode 5 10 Allowed Phone Number Lists 407 Answering Calls Description This section describes how users can answer calls ringing at their own extensions Additional features enable users to pick up calls ringing at other extensions see Related Features below Related Features A user can join a call in progress at another extension as long as Privacy is not on for that extension see Joining Calls A user can answer a call ringing at another specific extension or at an extension in a group For more information see Call Pickup and Group A user can use Direct Line Pickup Active Line to answer calls on lines not assigned to the user s phone A user can program the Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk Back feature on a button with lights to respond to_a voice interrupt on busy call Also see Voice Interrupt On Busy 312 You can use Call Waiting 316 to specify standard phone extensions that can receive a call waiting tone to indicate a second incoming call Considerations Calls
194. e signaled intercom call tone one beep m If a voice interrupt on busy call is made to an idle extension the originator and the recipient hear a voice signaled intercom call tone one beep instead m f you receive a voice interrupt on busy call and press Hold the third party is put on hold and the originator hears two beeps that indicate you have ended the voice interrupt on busy call At this point To talk to the originator if the green light next to the intercom button is flashing press intercom You cannot use the Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button once a voice interrupt on busy call has ended Toresume your conversation with the third party press the line or pool button next to the winking green light m Any party involved in a voice interrupt on busy call cannot be involved in a second voice interrupt on busy call until the first is finished 5 200 Voice Interrupt On Busy 312 Valid Entries 1 2 Assigned Not Assigned vY Programming Using To change the Voice Interrupt On Busy setting for an extension 1 2 3 Press Feature o o System Program System Program 3 1 2 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature To assign or unassign Voice Interrupt On Busy press _Next Data until the appropriate value displays Select another procedure or exit programming mode To initiate a voice interrupt on busy call 1 2
195. e waiting lights you must connect those phones to extension jacks on Release 3 1 R3 1 or later 206 modules Additionally you need an R3 1 or later primary processor module System Capacity The combination of 206 and 400 modules installed determines the number of available lines and extensions The system allows up to 24 lines and up to 48 extensions however these maximums cannot be achieved simultaneously m For maximum line capacity 24 lines install four 206 modules and four 400 modules This arrangement allows up to 24 extensions m For maximum extension capacity 48 extensions install eight 206 modules This arrangement allows up to 16 lines System Mode The system supports two modes of operation The mode of operation determines how users access outside lines from their phones m Key Mode Users access individual outside lines to make and receive calls m Hybrid Mode Users can access individual outside lines as in Key mode However you also can create up to four groups or pools of multiple outside lines When the user accesses a pool to make a call the system selects an available line from the pool Since multiple lines are associated with the pool the user does not know which line within the pool is being used to make the call System mode is determined by the configuration of the processor module By default the system is configured for Key mode Changing to Hybrid mode requires modifying the processor module
196. ear nothing at all m You hear a dial tone but the dial tone continues as you try to dial m You hear a dial tone and the dial tone cuts off when you try to dial m You hear a reorder or busy signal if you try to dial a pool access code 880 881 882 or 883 at intercom dial tone m You notice that the red light next to a pool button is on steady most or all of the time indicating that the pool is busy In the continental U S help is available at 1 800 628 2888 Outside the continental U S call your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer Troubleshooting 6 9 Possible Cause 1 Forced Account Code Entry is assigned to the extension What to do Find out if Forced Account Code Entry 307 is assigned to the extension If it is enter a valid account code m If you can make a call the problem is solved m f Forced Account Code Entry is not assigned go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 Dial Mode is set incorrectly What to do Find out if you have touch tone or rotary service Then set the Dial Mode 201 to Touch Tone or Rotary as appropriate for all lines in the pool m If you can make a call the problem is solved m lf the Dial Mode is set correctly go to Possible Cause 3 Possible Cause 3 Someone changed the Pool Access Restriction setting for the extension What to do If calls could be made without trouble before find out if someone changed the Pool Access Restriction 315
197. eceptionist is not available to answer calls This feature also activates night service operation of the voice messaging system See also Password we O One touch Intercom Calling button See Intercom Auto Dial button Outside line See Line Outside pool See Pool SO P Park See Call Park PARTNER Attendant An optional call routing device that answers calls and routes them to the appropriate extension based on caller responses to a recorded announcement PARTNER Model Telephones See System phones PARTNER CA48 Intercom Autodialer See ntercom Autodialer Password A four digit code assigned by the System Manager that users can enter from a PARTNER or MLS model phone to override dialing restrictions and to turn Night Service on and off See also Night Service Pickup Group A group of extensions for which calls to any extension in the group can be picked up from any extension in the system by dialing a group pickup code Pool A group of outside lines used for making and receiving calls on pooled extensions A pool typically contains lines of a similar type or purpose WATS FX etc and is identified by a pool access code The system supports four pools a main pool and three auxiliary pools See also Pool access code and Pool Access Code A three digit code used to access outside lines ina specific pool The main pool and each auxiliary pool are known to the system as 880 881 882 and 883
198. ected to after lifting the handset or turning on the speaker to make a call The system looks for lines or pools in the order specified by this procedure and selects the first available line or pool For example if you specify outside lines or pools first for an extension but all outside lines or pools are busy the user will hear the intercom dial tone after lifting the handset or turning on the speaker Related Features To copy the Automatic Line Selection setting as well as other system settings to other extensions you can use Copy Settings 399 If Forced Account Code Entry 307 is assigned to an extension Automatic Line Selection for that extension does not apply This means the user must rnanually select a line or pool after entering a required account code For an extension identified as a Hotline 603 or Doorphone Extension 604 605 program the extension to select only the intercom with no outside lines in the selection sequence For an extension identified as an External Hotline 311 program the extension to select outside lines or pools first Considerations This feature must be programmed from extension 10 or 11 only using Centralized Telephone Programming Individual users cannot program this feature directly You should program Automatic Line Selection when you first enter Centralized Telephone Programming before programming any other features However if you want to program both Automatic Line Se
199. ected to any of these extensions During a power failure standard phones can only make and receive calls other system features are not available Troubleshooting 6 1 The system can stay programmed for approximately four days after it stops receiving power After four days elapse all of the system s programmed settings return to the factory settings The following sections describe various difficulties that might occur possible causes for the difficulty and procedures you can follow to try to solve the problem Programming procedure names are shown in boldface type for more information on a specific procedure refer to the procedure name in Chapter 5 Problems with System Phones System Phone Does Not Ring Possible Cause 1 Ringer volume is set too low What to do Press the volume control button while the phone is idle and the handset is in the cradle m lf the phone rings increasingly louder the problem is solved m If the phone still does not ring go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 The Do Not Disturb or Call Forwarding feature is turned on What to do Check to see if Do Not Disturb or Call Forwarding is turned on m f Do Not Disturb or Call Forwarding is turned on turn it off m f Do Not Disturb or Call Forwarding is not turned on go to Possible Cause 3 Possible Cause 3 Line Ringing is programmed for No Ring or Delayed Ring What to do Check the Line Ringing setting for the extension m If Li
200. ects incoming calls only on lines identified using Direct Extension Dial Lines 205 You must program a button on the system display phone at extension 10 to turn Direct Extension Dial on and off Use Direct Extension Dial Button to program the button Calls that ring on lines programmed with Direct Extension Dial are picked up after two rings as a default To change the number of rings use Direct Extension Dial Delay 112 You can set SMDR Talk Time 611 to Active to include the Talk field on call reports For an incoming outside call answered by Direct Extension Dial this field shows the call duration minus the time the greeting played and the caller waited for someone to answer the call Considerations You should record a message before using Direct Extension Dial since there is no default message You can record only one message for this feature If you do not record a message for Direct Extension Dial callers will not know to enter an extension or Hunt Group number when the call is answered You must record the Direct Extension Dial message from the system display phone at extension 10 or 11 You cannot record or play a message while Direct Extension Dial or Automatic System Answer is answering a call When you want to record or play a message turn off Direct Extension Dial and Automatic System Answer and wait for any calls in the process of being answered by the system to be completed Programming To rec
201. ed Dial number if any assigned to a button displays when the button is pressed Blank displays if nothing is programmed 5 74 Display Related Features The System Date 101 iSystem Day 102 and System Time 103 settings are shown as the default display You can use Display Language 303 to identify the language in which messages appear if the extension has a system display phone Users can assign a name to their extension Then when that extension is used to make an intercom call group call or transferred call the name and extension number appear on the system display phone receiving the call Similarly users receiving a transfer return call see the name and extension number of the person assigned to the extension that did not answer the transferred call See Extension Name Display for more information Considerations The call timer records the time a user is active on a call It begins when the handset is lifted out of the cradle and ends when either the handset is placed back in the cradle or the call is placed on hold This is not the call duration reported to SMDR SMDR records the total time the call is in progress including the time the call is placed on hold For more information refer to Call Reporting Devices SMDR in Chapter 4 When a call is transferred the timer restarts when the call is answered The call timer is displayed along with the default display Most messages other
202. ed Ring is useful for backup coverage on shared lines or pools such as for secretaries who cover each other s lines No Ring is useful for all extensions except 10 when a receptionist answers all calls or for phones with no regular users such as in conference rooms Related Features m To copy the Line Ringing settings as well as other system settings to other extensions you can use Copy Settings 399 Users automatically receive Caller ID information for calls that audibly alert at the extension For lines or pools set to Immediate Ring Caller ID information is displayed after the first ring For lines or pools set to Delayed Ring Caller ID information is displayed as soon as the call begins audibly alerting For lines or pools set to No Ring no Caller ID information is displayed Considerations m Program this feature from extension 10 or 11 only using Centralized Telephone Programming Individual users cannot program this feature System phone users see the light patterns for the lines assigned to their extensions even if Line Ringing is set to Delayed Ring or No Ring Light patterns do not appear for incoming calls on pool buttons that are set to No Ring If a line at an extension is set to No Ring a user at that extension has to manually select the line to answer a call Valid Entries 5 124 Immediate Ring wv Lines Delayed Ring No Ring wv Pools Line Ringing Examples Receptionist Call Routing f y
203. ed call rings back when your phone is idle To retrieve a parked call using Call Pickup 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Dial 6 and the extension number where the call is parked Call Park 5 45 Call Pickup 16XX Description This feature lets users answer any intercom outside or transferred call ringing at another specified extension where XX is an extension number from 10 57 This feature is useful for officemates who agree to answer each other s calls Related Features Use this feature to retrieve a parked call see Call Park Note that if you use Call Pickup to answer a call that is parked at an extension that also has ringing calls you will be connected to the parked call parked calls take precedence over ringing calls Considerations You can program a Call Pickup button on a system phone to pick up with one touch a call that is ringing or parked at another specified extension Programming To program a Call Pickup button 1 Press Feature Lo Lo _System Program System Program Central Tel Program Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button oO DN To specify the extension to be answered press left intercom followed by Le and the two digit extension number 10 57 For example to answer a call ringing at extension 23 press left intercom 6 2 3 5 Program another button for this extension or
204. ed to the top of a new page SMDR Output Format 610 identifies whether a maximum of 15 digits or 24 digits is printed for dialed numbers on the call report SMDR Talk Time 611 specifies whether or not the call report includes the Talk field which records the time a user spends on an incoming outside call from the time the user answers the call to the time the call is disconnected from the system Account Code Entryjlets users enter account codes for outside telephone calls incoming or outgoing if used the account codes are included on the call report The voice messaging system uses the following procedures Hunt Group Extensions 505 assigns the extensions associated with the voice messaging system hardware to Hunt Group 7 the VMS Hunt Group Group Call Distribution 206 assigns lines to the VMS Hunt Group so calls can ring directly into the voice messaging system and receive Automated Attendant Service Line Coverage Extension 208 identifies an extension as the owner of a specific outside line so calls on that line can ring directly into the owner s voice mailbox when either Automatic VMS Cover 310 or VMS Coverlis on at the owner s extension Automatic VMS Cover 310 determines whether or not an extension s unanswered intercom and transferred calls and outside calls on lines assigned ownership are automatically covered by the voice messaging system VMS Cover Rings 117 specifies the numb
205. edure Valid Entries 1 Assigned to extension 2 Not Assigned to extension vY Programming To assign Allowed Phone Number Lists to an extension 1 Press Feature Lo Lo System Program System Program 4 4 Lo La 2 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed For example to program extension 27 press 2 z A display similar to the following appears Allow To 27 List Number 3 Enter the list number 1 4 For example to select list 1 press 1 4 To assign or unassign the list press _Next Data until the appropriate value displays 5 At this point m To assign or unassign another list to this extension press _Next item or Prev item until the list number shows on the display Then repeat Step 4 m To program another extension press _Next Procedure _Prev Procedure and begin at Step 2 6 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 8 Allowed List Assignments 408 Allowed Phone Number Lists 407 Description This System Programming procedure specifies telephone numbers that users can dial regardless of other dialing restrictions as long as they have access to an outside line For example if you restrict an entire category of calls through Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 you can permit calls to a specific number in that category by placing that number on an Allowed Phone Number List Using this procedure you can create up to four
206. either Hold or Ring and you should not use the Direct Extension Dial feature If the local phone company supports far end disconnect but the problem still occurs call the hotline Calls on Hold Are Disconnected Possible Cause Hold Disconnect Time setting is too short What to do Change Hold Disconnect Time 203 from Short to Long m If calls on hold no longer disconnect the problem is solved m If calls on hold still get disconnected or the Hold Disconnect Time already was set to Long call the hotline Calls on Automatic System Answer Lines Are Disconnected Possible Cause Automatic System Answer Mode is set to Disconnect What to do Change Automatic System Answer Mode 121 from Disconnect to either Hold or Ring m If calls on Automatic System Answer lines no longer disconnect the problem is solved m If calls on Automatic System Answer lines still get disconnected or the Automatic System Answer Mode already was set to Hold or Ring call the hotline In the continental U S help is available at 1 800 628 2888 Outside the continental U S call your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer Troubleshooting 6 15 Call on Hold Hangs Up but Line Does Not Disconnect Possible Cause 1 Hold Disconnect Time setting is too long What to do Change Hold Disconnect Time 203 from Long to Short m f abandoned calls on hold are disconnected the problem is solved m f abandoned calls
207. em Password Users cannot access the following system features Entry Background Music Caller ID Name Display Caller ID Inspect Voice Interru or m Do not use Forced Account Code Entry with a standard phone because the phone will not be able to get dial tone and make calls t m A display on a standard phone will not show Caller ID information or system messages Feature Phones A feature phone is a standard telephone that has feature buttons in addition to the regular 12 key dial pad For example there are feature phones that have programmable auto dial buttons last number redial buttons hold buttons and built in speakers You can use most of the system s dial code features from a feature phone and program them onto a feature phone button However there are some limitations to what these phones can do The capabilities of a feature phone are in the phone itself For example if you store a number on a feature phone s auto dial button that number is stored in the feature phone This is different from storing a number on a system phone s Auto Dial button When you program a button on a system phone the number is actually stored in the control unit Similarly when you press a hold button on a feature phone the call is held at the phone itself Callers will not hear the system s Music On Hold Other phones in the system cannot see that the call is on hold it appears as a busy line If you wan
208. end CONTROL UNIT Lines Ext Y FAX 2 Receive Figure 4 8 Send and Receive Fax Machines To Use When you send a fax an outside line will be automatically selected Incoming fax calls on the fax line are answered automatically by fax 2 If a fax comes in on a line other than line A you can transfer the call to fax 2 see Transferring al Call to the Fax Machine earlier in this chapter If you have programmed a Fax Management button you can transfer a call to the fax machine with a single touch as well as monitor the status of the fax machine see Fax Management Feature earlier in this chapter If fax 1 is set for Delayed Ring on line A fax 1 can pick up fax transmissions when fax 2 does not answer To Program Fax 1 Send Ext X 1 If extension X is a key extension use Line Assignment 301 to assign one or more lines to extension X including line A If extension X is a pooled extension use Pool Line Assignment 207 remove line A from all pools Then use Pool Extension Assignment 314 to assign pools to extension X Also use Line Assignment 301 to assign line A and any other individual lines to extension X 2 Set Automatic Line Selection for extension X to select line A last For pooled extensions set Automatic Line Selection for extension X to select pools and outside lines first line A selected last 3 Set Line Ringing for line A at extension X to Delayed Ring set all other lines and pools to
209. ension Privacy 304 for extension Y to Assigned Make sure extension Y is not assigned as a Call Waiting 316 extension Pickup Group Extension 501 Calling Group Extension 502 Night Service Group Extension 504 or Hunt Group Extension 505 To monitor the fax machine at extension Y use Fax Machine Extensions 601 to identify extension Y as a fax extension and program a Fax Management button by programming the fax machine extension number on an Auto Dial button Using Auxiliary Equipment 4 19 Modems There are several ways to use modems with your system as described below NOTE Modems can connect directly to an extension jack without an adapter However if you connect a high speed modem through the control unit you may experience some degradation of efficiency and throughput depending on the quality of the outside lines connected to the system To solve the problem either connect modems directly to the network interface jacks or contact your local telephone company for information about upgrading line quality Stand Alone Modem for Placing Calls Only A modem and a terminal allow you to dial out and connect to computer bulletin boards and other data services This setup which lets you dial out but not receive calls is shown in Figure 4 9 Note that the telephone is optional and can be used if you want the terminal to share an extension with a phone Telephone optional Lines F
210. ension number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 76 Display Language 303 Distinctive Ring 308 Description This System Programming procedure determines whether calls should ring at a standard device using the system s distinctive ringing patterns different patterns for outside intercom and transferred calls or whether all calls to the standard device should ring like outside calls Considerations m Change the setting to Not Active if a standard device such as a modem or answering machine does not pick up intercom or transferred calls m f distinctive ring is set to Not Active for an extension where both a system phone and a standard device are installed the system phone continues to use the system s distinctive ringing pattern but all calls ring at the standard device using a single ring burst m The system does not pass distinctive ringing patterns generated by a PBX or central office through to extensions regardless of the setting for this feature Valid Entries 1 Active outside intercom and transferred calls ring differently using the system s distinctive ringing patterns wv 2 Not Active outside intercom and transferred calls all ring using a single ring burst Programming To change the Distinctive Ring setting 1 Press Feature Lo 0 System Program _System Program 3 Lo 8 2 Atthe Extension
211. ephones to be customized to meet individual users needs Individual telephones can be programmed either from extension 10 or 11 Centralized Telephone Programming or from a user s own extension using a system phone Extension Programming A system display phone is required for System and Centralized Telephone programming If you have any 34 button phones in the system you must use a 34 button display phone to program since an 18 button phone cannot be used to program a 34 button phone Also if your system has both PARTNER model and MLS model phones it is recommended that you use a PARTNER model display phone at the programming extension The system permits programming from a remote location using a Remote Administration Unit see later in this chapter This chapter provides general information on programming procedures When a specific feature name is used it is printed in bold type For detailed descriptions and step by step instructions refer to that name in Chapter 5 Brief summaries of all programming procedures are at the end of this book Programming 2 1 Hardware Considerations Programming procedures use line and extension numbers The line number represents the line jack on a 206 or 400 module to which the outside line is connected Similarly the extension number represents the extension jack on a 206 module to which the system phone or standard device is connected For each 206 module the system assigns two lin
212. er Button 111 to program the button m Calls that ring on lines programmed with Automatic System Answer are picked up after two rings as a default To change the number of rings use Automatic System Answer Delay 110 m You must use Automatic System Answer Record Playback to record the greeting callers hear when the system answers an incoming call m You can setiSMDR Talk Time 611 to Active to include the Talk field on call reports For an incoming outside call answered by Automatic System Answer this field shows the call duration minus the time the greeting played and the caller waited for someone to answer the call m For callers to hear music on hold Music On Hold 602 must be Active and an audio source must be connected to the primary processor module m Automatic System Answer Mode should not be set to Hold or Ring if the disconnect signal from the local telephone company is not recognized by Hold Disconnect Time 203 Considerations m f Automatic System Answer Mode is set to Hold calls are placed on hold at extension 10 however any extension with access to the line on which the call is held can retrieve the call m f Automatic System Answer Mode is set to Hold and a call is placed on hold for longer than one minute the system generates a short Hold Reminder Tone at extension 10 This tone sounds once every minute until the held call is retrieved or until the caller hangs up Automatic System An
213. er ID information is not captured the system date and day default displays instead The incoming telephone number replaces the system date and time display on system phones An out of area message displays if a call is being dialed from a region that does not support Caller ID A private message Priv displays if the caller has blocked transmission of Caller ID information If you use SMDR telephone numbers of incoming calls print on call reports after the call is completed Private and out of area numbers are reported as IN on call reports Caller ID 5 49 Caller ID Inspect F17 Description This feature allows a user who is active on a call to view Caller ID information for a second call without disconnecting the current call or putting it on hold Users can inspect ringing active or held calls Related Features If you program a Caller ID Name Display button you can toggle between Caller ID name and Caller ID number while inspecting lines m Refer to Caller ID for details on Caller ID information m A user at a covering extension who has a system display phone and who is busy on acall can use Caller ID Inspect to view the number of the extension from which a Call Coveragejcall is being sent Considerations m This feature must be programmed on a button with lights on a system display phone m The user should make sure the green light next to the Caller ID Inspect button is fluttering
214. er Rings Valid Entries 1 9 3 v Programming To change the number of times calls ring before they are sent to the voice messaging system 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 1 1 Z 2 Enter a setting 1 9 For example to set VMS Cover Rings to 4 press Next Data Or Prev Data until a display similar to the following appears VMS Cover Rings 4 Rings 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode VMS Cover Rings 117 5 197 VMS Hunt Delay 506 Description This feature applies only if you have a voice messaging system This System Programming procedure determines when outside calls should be answered by the Automated Attendant Service of the voice messaging system You can set the system for either immediate call handling after the second ring or delayed call handling after the fourth ring Delayed call handling gives the receptionist an opportunity to answer calls before they go to the Automated Attendant Service Related Features m You must use Group Call Distribution 206 to assign lines to Hunt Group 7 m You must use Hunt Group Extensions 505 to assign the extensions associated with the voice messaging system hardware to Hunt Group 7 Valid Entries 1 Immediate vY 2 Delayed Programming To change the VMS Hunt Delay setting for the voice messaging system s Automated Attendant service 1 Press Feature Lo Lo System P
215. er of times intercom and transferred calls or outside calls on lines assigned ownership ring at extensions before they are sent to the voice messaging system VMS Hunt Delay 506 determines when outside calls should be answered by the Automated Attendant Service of the voice messaging system You can set the system for either immediate call handling or delayed call handling The setting you select is used for both day and night operation VMS Hunt Schedule 507 determines when outside calls should ring the VMS Hunt Group always day only or night only depending on the status of the Night Service Button 503 at extension 10 Programming 2 13 7 identifies the extension to which a call transferred by the voice messaging system should be routed if the destination extension does not answer and does not have voice mail coverage active The transfer return extension for the voice messaging system is typically extension 10 NOTE If an extension has VMS Cover and Call Coverage active intercom and transferred calls and outside calls on lines assigned ownership ring at the covering extension after the specified number of Call Coverage Rings 116 Then m If the covering extension does not answer the call is routed after the specified number of VMS Cover Rings 117 to the voice mailbox of the extension that activated Call Coverage m If the covering extension has Do Not Disturb active the call is immediately routed t
216. ercom dial tone To ring the extension dial the two digit extension number or To voice signal a system phone at the extension press x plus the two digit extension number and listen for one of the following responses m lf you hear one beep you have reached an idle system phone You can speak after the beep Your voice is heard through the other extension s speaker If the recipient is present he or she can reply m Ifyou hear two beeps you have reached a busy system phone with Voice Interrupt On Busy Assigned You can speak after the beeps Be aware that the third party to whom the recipient is speaking probably also will hear the two beeps and the faint sound of your voice If the recipient has a Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button wait for a response m If you hear ringing you have reached an idle standard MDC 9000 or MDW 9000 phone or a busy system phone with Voice Interrupt On Busy Not Assigned Your call is not completed until someone answers Making Calls 5 131 Manual Signaling F13XX or F13 XX Description This feature applies only to PARTNER and MLS model phones This feature lets you program a button on your PARTNER or MLS model phone that you can use to signal a predetermined co worker s extension It typically is used by a receptionist to alert a user when the user is busy on another call You can use a Manual Signaling button to beep ring or voice signal the user at the target extension
217. ering extension for the specified number of Call Coverage Rings Outside and intercom calls continue to ring at the covering extension until the call is answered or the caller hangs up For transferred calls If the covering extension does not answer the call goes to the transfer return extension after the specified number of Transfer Return Rings 105 If the covering extension has Do Not Disturb active the call rings one more time at the user s extension before it goes to the transfer return extension 5 36 Call Coverage F20 XX XX m If an extension has Call Coverage and Call Forwarding active calls are routed to the Call Forwarding destination extension Call Forwarding takes precedence m fa user at a covering extension has a system display phone and is busy on a call he or she can use Caller ID Inspect to view the number of the extension from which a coverage call is being sent If a user is not active on a call and multiple coverage calls are ringing he or she can press the line pool or _intercom buttons to view the number of the extension from which each coverage call is being sent however if the user picks up the handset he or she will join or answer the call that was previously ringing at the originating extension shown on the display m Call Coverage does not apply to parked calls See Call Park Considerations m A system display phone is recommended for the covering extension so the user
218. ernative to the VMS Line Cover setting you can use Coverage Extension 208 with VMS Cover This provides more flexibility because it lets you specify the number of times calls ring using VMS Cover Rings 117 at the user s extension before going to the user s mailbox In addition if the user s extension has Do Not Disturb on calls on the line can go immediately to coverage m Each outside line can be assigned to only one Hunt Group m f a Hunt Group that has outside lines assigned receives an outside call and all members of that Hunt Group are busy or have Do Not Disturb on the caller hears ringing which continues until the call is answered Examples Here are some useful applications for Group Call Distribution m Place the extensions of employees who work in a department in a Hunt Group and assign one or more outside lines to the group Doing so lets outside callers ring the group directly without having to be transferred by the receptionist For example a mail order company assigns the extensions of its sales representatives to a Hunt Group and assigns a line to the group The company then publishes the number as its customer service number so that a caller can reach a sales representative directly to place an order 5 94 Group Call Distribution 206 If you install a voice messaging system assign the system extensions associated with the voice messaging system hardware to Hunt Group 7 Then use this proce
219. es A and B do not ring at extensions X and Y When you turn Night Service on calls on line A ring immediately at the fax extension X Since that line is not assigned to any other extension in the Night Service Group only extension X receives fax transmissions Likewise with Night Service on calls on line B ring immediately at the modem extension Y 4 22 Using Auxiliary Equipment NOTE If answering machines are connected to Night Service extensions you can join a call that was already answered by an answering machine from any system phone If you have an answering machine with the Call Intercept feature the answering machine drops off the call when you join it To Program 1 If extensions X and Y are key extensions use Line Assignment 301 to assign only line A to extension X for the fax machine to cover and only line B to extension Y for the modem to cover If extensions X and Y are pooled extensions use to remove lines A and B from all pools and 314 to remove all pools from extensions X and Y Also use Assignment 301 to assign only line A to extension X for the fax machine to cover and only line B to extension Y for the modem to cover 2 Set Line Ringing for line A at extension X and for line B at extension Y to No Ring 3 Make sure extensions X and Y are not assigned as Call Waiting 316 extensions Calling Group Extensions 502 Pickup Group Extensions or Hunt Group Extensions 505
220. es and six extensions for each 400 module the system assigns four lines The system numbers lines and extensions consecutively Figure 2 1 shows the numbering scheme for a system with maximum lines Figure 2 2 shows the numbering scheme for a system with maximum extensions However your system can have any number of lines or extensions up to the maximum 206 Modules 400 Modules Line Line Jacks Jacks Extension Jacks Line Figure 2 1 Maximum Lines 24 206 Modules 206 Modules Line Line Jacks Jacks amp 5 Extension Ed Extension Jacks Jacks EJ 57 Figure 2 2 Maximum Extensions 48 2 2 Programming Initial System Setup After the control unit is installed you set up the system using a combination of system and telephone programming procedures In this guide System Programming procedures are identified by a code and three digits Telephone Programming procedures are identified by the feature name only Use the System Planner as a guide when programming The following sections provide an overview of the procedures you use for initial system setup See Chapter 5 for more information on specific procedures Other progra
221. es for the name See Table 5 1 Character Codes on p 5 8 AUTOMATIC LINE SELECTION PRESS x x PRESS the line pool intercom buttons in the desired order PRESS x x Key Extension Outside lines 01 24 left intercom YW Pooled Extension Pool 880 button 1 button 2 left Intercom right intercom Y ools 881 883 individual lines PRESS Feature digits including functions see LINE RINGING p 5 124 PRESS each line or pool button until the desired ringing option appears in the display e Immediate ring green steady V Lines e No ring green fast flutter Y Pools e Delayed ring starts ringing after 20 seconds green slow flashing System Features ACCOUNT CODE ENTRY p 5 5 PRESS a programmable button a PRESS Feature 1 2 s CALL PICKUP PRESS a programmable button PRESS left intercom 6 DIAL the two digit extension number BACKGROUND MUSIC PRESS a programmable button PRESS Feature 1 Lo CALLER ID INSPECT p 5 50 PRESS a programmable button with py PRESS Feature 1 z CALL COVERAGE PRESS a programmable button PRESS Feature 2 Lo DIAL optional two digit originating extension number DIAL optional two digit covering extension number CALLER ID NAME DISPLAY p 5 52 PRESS a programmable button with lights PRESS Feature 1 6 te a CONFERENCE DROP PRESS
222. essage Waiting see Standard phones Microphone 3 2 3 6 3 7 __ iy O Microphone disable see Mute Microphone Mic button 3 3 3 6 Modems 4 20 4 22 00 Modules description expansion 1 4 B6 SSCS W 4jB6 ooo processor MOH see Music on hold 602 Index CC E Monitoring call activity 2 21 5 14 J5 116 5 117 ____ O pool activity 5 152 5 153 i y Music On Hold 602 5 138 5 139 _ __ as background music programming Name Display Night Service Numbering of lines and extensions 2 2 ss Oo On Offbutton 3 3CCsCidC On Off switch 1 3 Auto Dial numbers One touch transfer see Optional equipment 2 12 4 1 S O Ordering equipment B 5_ Cid reference materials and books B 4 _ Out of building extension requirements 4 3 sd Outgoing Call Restriction 401 5 144 5 145 ss Outgoing Call Restriction Button 114 5 146 45 147 Outside Auto Dial numbers Outside call making an 5 129 _ __ Outside Conference Denial 109 5 148 Outside line reserving an 5 130 ___ O Outward restriction see Outgoing Call Restriction 401 Overlays se Overriding dialing restrictions Owner line 5 122 P PAGE jack 1 3 4 2 A1j A 2 o Paging Calling Groups Loudspeaker PARTNER model phones 5 99 5 4101 s Simultaneous PARTNER Attendant 4 24 4 25 J5 3 5 300 PARTNER Attendant extensions 5 3 PARTNER C
223. exit programming mode Using System Phone 1 Ifyou want lift the handset 2 Press the programmed button or press intercom 6 and the two digit number of the extension at which the call is ringing or parked Standard Phone 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Dial 6 plus the two digit number of the extension at which the call is ringing or parked 5 46 Call Pickup I6XX Call Waiting 316 Description This feature applies only to standard phones This System Programming procedure specifies standard phone extensions that are eligible for Call Waiting Users who receive a call waiting tone hear two beeps when they are on a call to indicate a second incoming intercom transferred or outside call The user can press the switchhook or Recall or Flash button if available to put the current call on hold and retrieve the second call To return to the first call the user simply presses the switchhook again Related Features For instructions on using Call Waiting see Answering Calls Call Waiting does not apply to parked calls See Call Park Considerations This feature is distinct from the local telephone company s Call Waiting feature If you use this system feature do not use your local telephone company s Call Waiting feature The Call Waiting tone two beeps is not repeated Use Call Waiting only for standard phone extensions Do not Assign Call Waiting to extensions that have fa
224. exit programming mode you can press Feature 0 o or lift the handset off hook then place it back in the cradle 2 26 Programming Learning About Telephones Contents Learning About Telephones This chapter explains how system and standard phones work with the system as well as combination extensions where more than one phone or standard device is installed In A 1e ele call nanalinateatarcelind features are listed at the end of the chapter See the feature name in Chapter 5 for details on a specific feature System Telephones System phones which include the PARTNER 34D PARTNER 18D PARTNER 18 PARTNER 6 MDC 9000 and MDW 9000 models have several buttons and indicators in common The following pages explain where they are and how they work Learning About Telephones 3 1 Buttons and Indicators PARTNER 34D f m H 7 Display Programmable Buttons U z 4 without lights Line Pool Programmable Buttons 32 with lights Intercom Buttons 2 Message Light Pull Out Tray for Quick Reference Cards all PARTNER models PARTNER 18 Display Programmable Buttons 4 without lights Line Pool Programmable Buttons 16 with lights Intercom Buttons 2 ns eer le _ a a Ext Message Light Home eee eee
225. extension the calls are not forwarded Wake up calls that are not answered do not go to voice mail coverage even if VMS Coverjis active at the target extension Considerations A Wake Up Service button must be programmed on the system display phone at extension 10 Wake Up Service must be programmed on a button with lights This feature will not work if it is programmed on a button without lights A scheduled wake up call occurs once in a 24 hour period If you want to send a wake up call at the same time on the next day you must reschedule the call Wake up calls ring the target extension for approximately 30 seconds or six rings Wake up calls are not placed to extensions assigned as doorphones Valid Entries Assigned to next available button at extension 10 Not Assigned vY Select button then press a programmable button to assign Wake Up Service to that button 5 204 Wake Up Service Button 115 Programming To program a Wake Up Service button at extension 10 1 Press _ eature 0 0 System Program System Program 1 1 5 2 Atthis point m If you want to assign Wake Up Service to the first available button press _Next Data until a display similar to the following appears Wake Up Service Button 1 Assigned Ext10 m f you want to remove the Wake Up Service button assignment press Next Data until a display similar to the following appears Wake Up Service Button 2 Not
226. extensions in a group to offload call activity from a single user When an intercom or transferred call is placed to a Hunt Group where Gis a Hunt Group number from 1 7 the system rings or voice signals the first available non busy extension in the group passing over busy extensions or those with Do Not Disturb on in a circular hunt If a ringing call is not answered within three rings it moves to the next available extension and so on until the call is answered or the caller hangs up For a voice signaled call only the first available extension is signaled if that extension does not answer the call does not keep hunting After an extension receives a Hunt Group call the next call to the Hunt Group will not ring or voice signal that extension first unless all other extensions in the group are busy or do not answer The system supports up to seven Hunt Groups however Hunt Group 7 is used exclusively for the voice messaging system For more information refer to Voice Messaging Systems in Chapter 4 Related Features m You must use Hunt Group Extensions 505 to assign extensions to a Hunt Group Set Transfer Return Rings 105 to four or greater to ensure that calls continue hunting to other group extensions if the call is not answered m Use Do Not Disturbjif you are assigned to a Hunt Group and you leave your desk so that a call to your extension moves directly to the next available extension in the group
227. f the code entered in Step 2 does not match the code used to lock the extension the extension remains locked On a button with lights the green light remains on steady Repeat the unlocking procedure above Standard Phone To lock a standard touch tone phone 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Press 4 2 1 You hear intercom dial tone again 3 Enter a four digit code using digits 0 9 You hear intercom dial tone again 4 Re enter the four digit code If the code entered in Step 4 matches the code entered in Step 3 you hear silence The extension is locked If the code entered in Step 4 does not match the code entered in Step 3 you hear fast busy tone and the extension remains unlocked Repeat the locking procedure above To unlock a standard touch tone phone 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Press 2 1 You hear intercom dial tone again 3 Enter the four digit code that you used to lock the extension You hear intercom dial tone again If the code entered in Step 3 matches the code used to lock the extension you hear silence and the extension is unlocked If the code entered in Step 3 does not match the code used to lock the extension you hear fast busy tone and the extension remains locked Repeat the unlocking procedure above 5 176 Station Lock F21 Station Unlock F 22 Description This feature is available only at extension 10 or 11 This feature le
228. f you hear ringing you have reached a standard phone an idle MDC 9000 or MDW 9000 phone or a busy system phone with Voice Interrupt On Busy Not Assigned When someone answers announce the call then hang up If no one answers or the call is refused press the line or pool button next to the winking green light to reconnect to the caller m To transfer a call with one button touch While on a call press the Auto Dial button programmed for the extension or the Hunt Group or Calling Group button for the group to which you want to transfer the call There is no need to press Transfr or Hola this takes the place of Steps and 2 in the procedure on the previous page For an extension that has a system phone you can program x plus the extension number on the Auto Dial button so you can announce the calls when you transfer them 5 190 Transferring Calls Standard Phone m To pass a call to another extension fi While on a call press the switchhook down once rapidly You hear intercom dial tone Dial the extension number or z z and a Hunt Group number or z and a Calling Group number to which you want the call transferred When someone answers announce the call then hang up If no one answers or the call is refused press the switchhook again to reconnect to the caller m f you do not wish to announce the call hang up as soon as you hear ringing after Step 2 above If no one answers the call rings bac
229. ferably a button with lights 4 Atthis point you can m Press Feature 1 1 or m Press Feature 1 1 and the number of the originating extension or m Press Feature 1 1 the number of the originating extension and the number of the destination extension 5 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode System Phone To forward calls manually 1 Press Feature 1 1 2 Dial your extension number 3 Dial the extension number at which you want the calls to ring To remove Call Forwarding manually 1 Press Feature 1 1 2 Dial your extension number twice To forward calls using the programmed button 1 Press the programmed button If an originating extension and a destination extension were programmed on the button Call Forwarding is activated on a button with lights the green light is on Skip Steps 2 and 3 2 If no originating extension was programmed dial your extension number 3 If no destination extension was programmed dial the extension number at which you want the calls to ring Call Forwarding is activated on a button with lights the green light is on Call Forwarding Call Follow Me F11 XX XX To remove Call Forwarding using the programmed button 1 Press the programmed button If an originating extension and a destination extension were programmed on the button Call Forwarding is deactivated on a button with lights the gree
230. for receptionists salespeople or others who need to have their hands free while talking on the phone Lucent Technologies offers several compatible headsets m Specialty Handsets are designed for those individuals who need greater functionality than that provided by the handsets on system phones and standard phones For example an amplified handset is available for certain system phones for hard of hearing users a In Range Out of Building IROB protectors are required to prevent electrical surges from damaging your system when phones or other standard devices such as a doorphone are installed in a location other than the building where the control unit is installed The system supports the Lucent Technologies IROB protector which provides coverage for up to 3 000 feet 915 meters for standard devices and 1 000 feet 305 meters for system phones IROBs must be installed by a qualified technician Off Premises Range Extender OPRE allows you to connect a standard touch tone phone beyond 3000 feet 915 meters in another building on the same continuous property It also allows you to use a special circuit from your local phone company to provide off premises station capability m Electromagnetic Interference EMI filters allow you to block noise generated by a nearby radio station as well as most electrical devices Caller ID devices such as a PC with Caller ID software support applications for storing or processing Cal
231. g Your voice is heard through the speakers of all system phones that are not busy in the Calling Group If someone answers the page you are connected to that person and the rest of the Calling Group no longer hears the page To manually transfer a call to a Calling Group 1 While on a call press _Transtr 2 Dial _z and a group number 1 4 You can hang up or stay on the line to announce the call All available extensions in the Calling Group ring Standard Phone To ring or page a Calling Group 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 To make a ringing call dial z and a group number 1 4 All available extensions in the Calling Group ring To make a paging call press x z and a group number 1 4 After the beep start talking Your voice is heard through the speakers of all system phones that are not busy in the Calling Group If someone answers the page you are connected to that person and the rest of the Calling Group no longer hears the page To transfer a call to a Calling Group 1 While on a call press the switchhook down once rapidly You hear intercom dial tone 2 Dial z and a group number 1 4 You can hang up or stay on the line to announce the call All available extensions in the Calling Group ring 5 98 Group Calling Ring Page I7G I 7G Group Hunting Ring Voice Signal 177G 1 77G Description This feature lets you distribute call volume among
232. g 305 5 4 Account Code Entry F 12 5 5 Allowed List Assignments 408 5 8 Allowed Phone Number Lists 407 5 9 Call Forwarding Call Follow Me F11 XX XX 5 41 5 i Automatic System Answer Mode 121 5 27 BA hr C tt C CO OOOOOOOC Contents Group Calling Ring Page 17G 1 7G 5 96 Group Hunting Ring Voice Signal 177G 1 77G 5 99 Hotline 603 5 107 ee Contents Night Service Group Extensions 504 9 142 Rotary Dialing Timeout 108 5 164 Save Number Redial F 04 5 165 Send All Calls 5 166 Simultaneous Paging 1 70 5 167 Number of Lines 104 5 143 5 iii CC sss Contents Toll Call Prefix 402 5 186 Touch Tone Enable F08 5 187 Voice Mailbox Transfer F 14 5 203 Wake Up Service Button 115 5 204 Feature Reference Overview This chapter provides reference information for programming and using system features Features are listed in alphabetical order System Programming procedures include the procedure code and three digit number in the heading dial code features include the feature code F for _Feature or for Intercom plus a two or three digit code Some feature codes also include a variable XX for a two digit extension number from 10 57 LL for a two digit line number from 01 24 or G for a single digit group number Headings without codes are general call handling topics or Telephone Programming procedures If you have trouble findi
233. g a call Duration of call call timer Number and name if programmed of the extension calling when receiving an intercom call or transferred call Number and name if programmed of an extension returning a transferred call when no one answers at the destination extension Automated Attendant Voice Messaging System or Direct Extension Dial when a call is transferred from a PARTNER Attendant a voice messaging system or the Direct Extension Dial feature respectively Transfer from Auto Att Transfer from VMS or Transfer from DXD if a call is returning to your extension after an unsuccessful transfer by a PARTNER Attendant a voice messaging system or the Direct Extension Dial feature respectively Caller ID number or name of calling party if applicable Coverage Call for xx on the display of users receiving a coverage call xx represents the number of the extension that activated call coverage Forward xx xx on the display of users forwarding their calls the first xx represents the number of the user s extension the second xx represents the number of the destination extension Wake Up Call on the display of users receiving a wake up call Volume or display contrast level bars as volume or display contrast is adjusted Programming messages and prompts when in programming mode When you are in Telephone Programming mode the current line assignment feature code or Spe
234. g of Automatic System Answer Mode 121 m Automatic System Answer affects incoming calls only on lines identified using Automatic System Answer Lines 204 m You must program a button on the system display phone at extension 10 to turn Automatic System Answer on and off Use Automatic System Answer Button 111 to program the button m Calls that ring on lines programmed with Automatic System Answer are picked up after two rings as a default To change the number of rings use Automatic System Answer Delay 110 m You can set SMDR Talk Time 611 to Active to include the Talk field on call reports For an incoming outside call answered by Automatic System Answer this field shows the call duration minus the time the greeting played and the caller waited for someone to answer the call m For callers to hear music on hold Music On Hold 602 must be Active and an audio source must be connected to the primary processor module Considerations m You should record a message before using Automatic System Answer since there is no default message m f you do not record a message for Automatic System Answer calls will be placed on hold continue to ring or be disconnected immediately after the system answers depending on the setting ane Sy Seno m You must record the Automatic System Answer message from the system display phone at extension 10 or 11 m You cannot record or play a message while Automatic System Answer or Direct E
235. gnments without affecting other settings use Pool Line Assignment 207 and Pool Extension Assignment 314 amp For Centralized Telephone Programming see previous pages pl IMPORTANT Using this procedure disconnects any active calls but retains system settings Use it only if the system fails to function correctly after a power failure or down period DIAL 728 a aia en oe w annannnaknnannnaN m POOL EXTENSION ASSIGNMENT a B DIAL 314 o 5 154 E DIAL an extension number 10 57 m To remove all existing pool assignments press Remove before selecting a line DIAL a pool access code 880 881 882 or 883 DIAL 1 Assigned v 880 2 Not Assigned 881 882 883 3 Select Button then press a program mable button auxiliary pools only PRESS Next item to program another pool for this extension To program another extension PRESS Next Procedure Prev Procedure enter a new extension INTERCOM DIAL TONE p 5 111 DIAL 309 DIAL an extension number 10 57 DIAL 1 Regular 2 Machine PRESS Next item to program another extension Vv AUTOMATIC VMS COVER p 5 32 DIAL 310 DIAL an extension number 10 57 DIAL 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned PRESS Next item to program another extension LINE ASSIGNMENT p 5 118 AUTOMATIC EXTENSION PRIVACY DIAL 301 DIAL 304 DIAL an extension number 10 57 DIAL an extension number 10 57 To remove all ex
236. goes off and Automatic System Answer is off Any calls in the process of being answered by the system will continue to hear the recorded message and will be placed on hold Automatic System Answer Button 111 5 23 Automatic System Answer Delay 110 Description This System Programming procedure specifies the number of times 0 9 an incoming call should ring before it is answered by the Automatic System Answer feature Related Features After a call is answered Automatic System Answer plays a greeting then either places the call on hold provides continuous ringing or disconnects the call depending on the setting of Automatic System Answer Mode 121 Automatic System Answer affects incoming calls only on lines identified using Automatic System Answer Lines 204 You must program a button on the system display phone at extension 10 to turn Automatic System Answer on and off Use Automatic System Answer Button 111 to program the button You must use Automatic System Answer Record Playback to record the greeting callers hear when the system answers an incoming call You can set SMDR Talk Time 611 to Active to include the Talk field on call reports For an incoming outside call answered by Automatic System Answer this field shows the call duration minus the time the greeting played and the caller waited for someone to answer the call If you use Caller ID make sure Automatic System Answer Delay is set to 2
237. gramming You can assign up to four pools to a standard phone but a single line phone can make only one call at a time To make a call the user lifts the handset and dials 9 the system selects the first available pool based on the Automatic Line Selection programmed for that extension Alternatively the user can dial a pool access code to make a call using a specific pool Valid Entries 1 Assigned wv Main pool 2 3H Not Assigned wv Auxiliary pool Select Button auxiliary pools only then press a button to assign the auxiliary pool to that button Programming To assign pools to a pooled extension 1 2 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 3 1 4 Enter the extension number to be programmed 10 57 For example to program extension 15 press 1 5 There is a steady red light next to each button that has a line assigned and a flashing red light next to each button that has a pool assigned To remove all existing pool assignments press Remove before selecting a pool Enter the desired pool access code 880 881 882 or 883 For example to select pool 881 press 8 8 1 Pool Extension Assignment 314 5 155 4 At this point m If you want to assign the pool to the first available button with lights press _Next Data until a display similar to the following appears Pool Ext Assign 15 P881 1 Assigned m f you want to remove a pool assignmen
238. gramming procedure allows you to specify whether a maximum of 15 digits or 24 digits is printed for dialed numbers in the Number field on the call report The longer field is useful for businesses such as law offices and hotels that need to record many digits for outgoing calls for billing purposes Before changing to 24 digits check the documentation for your call accounting device to verify that 24 digit output is supported Related Features m You can use SMDR Record Type 608 to specify the type of calls to be included on call reports m When you change the output format the length of the Number field is adjusted for the next call record that prints To print a new header use SMDR Top of Page 609 If you use Automatic System Answer or Direct Extension Dial you may want to set to Active to print on call reports the time a user spends on an incoming outside call from the time the user answers the call to the time the call is disconnected from the system Considerations m This feature requires special hardware and or software For more information see Call Reporting Devices SMDR in Chapter 4 m lf the output format is set to 15 digits and a prints as the last digit of a dialed number on a call report indicating that the digits dialed exceed the 15 digits the Number field can hold you may want to change the output format to 24 digits m If the output format is set to 24 digits ana SMDR Talk Time
239. group press left Intercom Z If you want calls to page the group press left intercom x z Note that buttons programmed for paging a Calling Group cannot be used to transfer a call to that Calling Group Dial a Calling Group number 1 4 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode System Phone To use when programmed on a button To ring or page the Calling Group press the programmed button first then lift the handset If you are paging the group start talking after the beep If you ring the group all available extensions in the Calling Group ring If you page the group your voice is heard through the speakers of all system phones that are not busy in the Calling Group If someone answers the page you are connected to that person and the rest of the Calling Group no longer hears the page To transfer a call to the Calling Group while on a call press the button programmed for ringing a Calling Group You can hang up or stay on the line to announce the call All available extensions in the Calling Group ring Group Calling Ring Page I7G I 7G 5 97 To manually ring or page a Calling Group 1 Lift the handset and press intercom You hear intercom dial tone 2 To make a ringing call dial z and a group number 1 4 All available extensions in the Calling Group ring To make a paging call press x z and a group number 1 4 After the beep start talkin
240. gs properly m lf the replacement phone rings properly the problem phone is defective Replace it m lf the replacement phone does not ring properly call the hotline In the continental U S help is available at 1 800 628 2888 Outside the continental U S call your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer 6 6 Troubleshooting Standard Phone Rings Back After Intercom Call with No One at Other End Possible Cause 1 The switchhook is accidentally pressed and released causing a call to ring back What to do Be sure that the handset is always replaced carefully If the problem is not solved go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 Automatic Line Selection is programmed incorrectly What to do If one of the phones involved is a standard single line rotary or touch tone telephone set its Automatic Line Selection to intercom first If the problem is not solved call the hotline Standard Phone s Message Waiting Light Does Not Light Possible Cause 1 The standard phone is part of a combination extension which includes a system phone that has Background Music on What to do Check to see if the system phone has Background Music on A standard phone s message waiting light will not light if Background Music is on at the system phone m f Background Music is on turn it off If the standard phone s message waiting light lights properly the problem is solved m f Background Music is
241. hanged account codes as follows For optional or forced account code entry without a Forced Account Code List the call report prints the last account code entered For forced account code entry with a Forced Account Code List the call report prints the last valid account code entered If the changed account code is not valid the report prints the original account code Account Code Entry F12 5 5 m f a Forced Account Code List exists you can check to see if an account code is valid when entering or changing an account code by pressing Feature 1 2 after entering the account code If the account code is not valid you will hear denial tone m The Lucent Technologies Call Accounting Terminal uses less than 16 digits for an account code Refer to the device s documentation to determine the maximum digits supported You can program the Account Code Entry feature code on a button ona system phone It is recommended that you use a button with lights This button can be used for optional Account Code Entry or Forced Account Code Entry Programming To program an Account Code Entry button 1 2 3 4 5 Using Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program _Cenfral Tel Program Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button preferably one with lights Press Feature 1 2 Program another button for this extension or exi
242. he Emergency Phone Number List m The entries you must make to permit or restrict toll calls differ depending on the setting for Toll Call Prefix 402 This setting tells the system whether a 0 for operator assisted calls or 1 for direct dial calls is required when you make toll calls Considerations m Each telephone number can include up to 12 digits m When programming emergency numbers and or making test calls to emergency numbers you should 1 remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call before hanging up and 2 perform such activities in the off peak hours such as early morning or late evening Valid Entries Up to 12 digits 0 9 Examples The examples below show how to enter telephone numbers for the Emergency Phone Number List in Step 3 of Programming m 911 To allow 911 calls from any extension that has an outside line create the following entry for the Emergency List 911 Overriding Numbers on a Disallowed List You can use Emergency List entries to override numbers that would otherwise be disallowed For example if you created Disallowed List entries to prevent calls to area code 201 but you wish to allow calls to a specific number in that area code such as the number of a manager who is on call after hours put the number in the Emergency List Toll Call Prefix required 12015556666 and 02015556666 Toll Call Prefix not required 2015
243. he busy line or pool button without lifting the handset so your phone beeps when the line or pool becomes free Loudspeaker paging system Equipment that lets you make announcements over the loudspeaker from a system extension Any Lucent Technologies paging system can be connected to the PAGE jack on the primary processor module in the control unit See also Simultaneous Paging GN M Mailbox See Voice mailbox Manual Signaling A feature that lets a user signal an extension by pressing a programmed button The phone at the target extension beeps for as long as the button is pressed Alternatively the Manual Signaling button can be used to ring or voice signal the target extension See a so Intercom Auto Dial button MDC 9000 Telephones See System phones MDW 9000 Telephones See System phones Music On Hold system Equipment that lets you play recorded music or messages to callers who are placed on hold A music on hold audio source can be connected to an RCA jack on the primary processor module in the control unit See a so Background Music Network interface jack A jack generally located in your equipment room that provides access to an outside line coming into your building from your local telephone company A line cord from the network interface jack to a line jack on a 206 or 400 module connects the line to your system Night Service A feature that lets you redirect calls received after hours or when a r
244. he light is used to indicate that a message has been left in the mailbox On a standard phone the message light flashes when the phone is idle to indicate that the extension has received a message Ringing Patterns Standard phones have these ringing patterns An outside call will ring ring ring An intercom call will ring ring ring ring ring ring A transferred call or an unanswered transferred or parked call that is ringing back at your extension will ring ring ring ring ring ring ring ring ring NOTE If you use the system with PBX or Centrex lines the PBX Centrex distinctive ringing patterns are not passed to phones Telephones use the ringing patterns described here instead Learning About Telephones 3 9 Dial Tones Standard phones have two different dial tones Outside dial tone is generated by your local telephone company to indicate that you are connected with an outside line m Intercom dial tone is generated by the system to indicate that you are connected with an inside line You hear this dial tone when you are making an inside or intercom call To hear the difference between the two dial tones lift the handset The dial tone you hear assuming the phone is set to select intercom first as recommended in this guide is an intercom dial tone To hear an outside dial tone press _9 Using the Switchhook Some of the call handling instructions in Chapter 5 direct you to
245. he next available extension in the Hunt Group rings If no one answers within three rings the call hunts to the next available extension To make a voice signaled call press x z z and a group number 1 6 After the beep start talking Your voice is heard through the speaker of the first available system phone that is not busy If no one answers the call does not keep hunting To transfer a call to a Hunt Group 1 While on a call press the switchhook down once rapidly You hear intercom dial tone Dial z z and a group number 1 7 The next available extension in the Hunt Group rings If no one answers within three rings the call hunts to the next available extension However if Transfer Return Rings is programmed for less than four rings the call returns to the extension that transferred the call or to that extension s transfer return extension Group Hunting Ring Voice Signal I77G I 77G 5 101 Group Pickup 166G Description This feature allows a user at any extension in the system to answer any outside intercom or transferred call ringing at an extension in a Pickup Group where G is a Pickup Group number from 1 4 In other words when a call rings at an extension that is in a Pickup Group a user at any extension in the system can answer the call without knowing which extension or line is ringing and without being in the same Pickup Group The system can have up to four Pickup Groups Related
246. he number s two digit code and press _Mic HFA once 6 Continue programming or exit programming mode Using System Phone You can lift the handset or press Spkr before dialing 1 If you want to call on a specific line press the line button or press _Intercom 8 and the two digit line number or if you want to call using a specific pool press the pool button or press intercom and the three digit pool access code 2 Press Feature 3 Dial the two digit Personal Speed Dial code 80 99 If you did not specify an outside line or pool the system automatically selects one turns on the speaker if the handset is in the cradle and dials the number The number being dialed shows on a display phone Standard Phone You can dial Personal Speed Dial numbers on a standard phone but the numbers must be programmed from extension 10 or 11 To dial a programmed Personal Speed Dial number i Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Press 3 Dial the two digit Personal Speed Dial code 80 99 The system automatically selects an outside line and dials the number 5 150 Personal Speed Dial Numbers Pickup Group Extensions 501 Description This System Programming procedure lets you assign extensions to a Pickup Group When a call rings at an extension in a Pickup Group a user at any other extension in the system can answer the ringing call by dialing the Pickup Group code The Pickup Group feat
247. he programmed button If you are voice signaling start talking after the beep To transfer a call to an extension in the Hunt Group while on a call press the programmed button 5 100 Group Hunting Ring Voice Signal I77G I 77G To manually ring or voice signal a Hunt Group 1 Lift the handset and press _intercom You hear intercom dial tone To make a ringing call dial z z and a group number 1 7 The next available extension in the Hunt Group rings If no one answers within three rings the call hunts to the next available extension To make a voice signaled call press x z z and a group number 1 6 After the beep start talking Your voice is heard through the speaker of the first available system phone that is not busy If no one answers the call does not keep hunting To manually transfer a call to a Hunt Group 1 2 While on a call press _Transtr Dial z z and a group number 1 7 The next available extension in the Hunt Group rings If no one answers within three rings the call hunts to the next available extension However if Transfer Return Rings is programmed for less than four rings the call returns to the extension that transferred the call or to that extension s transfer return extension Standard Phone To ring or voice signal a Hunt Group 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone To make a ringing call dial z z and a group number 1 7 T
248. he third party The green light next to the Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button turns off Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back is deactivated The originator hears two beeps if he or she did not hang up previously 5 202 Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back F18 Voice Mailbox Transfer F14 Description This feature applies only if you have a voice messaging system It is available only on system phones This feature lets a system phone user transfer a caller directly to a specific extension s voice mailbox in order for the caller to leave a message without first ringing the extension This feature is useful when a user knows that a co worker is away from his or her desk Related Features While being transferred the caller hears ringing if Ring on Transfer 119 is Active If it is Not Active and Music On Hold 602 is Active and an audio source is connected to the system the caller hears music on hold while the call is being transferred to the voice mailbox If Music On Hold is Not Active and Ring on Transfer 119 is Not Active the caller hears silence Considerations You can program a Voice Mailbox Transfer button on a system phone to transfer a caller directly to a mailbox by pressing the button then dialing the mailbox subscribers extension number Programming Using To program a Voice Mailbox Transfer button 1 Press Feature o 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program
249. her procedure or exit programming mode 5 178 System Date 101 System Day 102 Description This System Programming procedure sets the day of the week that appears on system display phones Valid Entries 1 Sunday Y 2 Monday 3 Tuesday 4 Wednesday 5 Thursday 6 Friday 7 Saturday Programming To change the System Day 1 Press Feature o 0 System Program _System Program 1 0 2 2 Change the day by entering a new setting number as listed in Valid Entries above For example to set the day to Tuesday press _Next Data until a display similar to the following appears System Day 3 Tuesday 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode System Day 102 5 179 System Password 403 Description This feature is available only on PARTNER and MLS model phones This System Programming procedure defines a four digit password that users can enter from PARTNER and MLS model phones to override dialing restrictions if the extension has access to an outside line Related Features m The password overrides all dialing restrictions except Restriction 302 and Pool Access Restriction 315 m Once a password is programmed you must enter it to turn Night Service on and off Additionally if Night Service is on users in the Night Service Group must enter the password to make any outgoing calls except calls to numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List 406 an
250. hone Number 90 91 92 93 pT a4 95 96 97 98 99 To program Personal Speed Dial Numbers see the User Instruction Cards Programming Mixed Telephone Types Overview This appendix provides information about programming from a PARTNER 34D phone to MLS model phones and from an MLS 34D phone to PARTNER model phones In these situations you should be aware that the button that you press at extension 10 or 11 the programming extension is likely to be in a different location than the button on the phone to which the programming applies the target phone If you are programming from a PARTNER 18D or MLS 18D phone the button locations are the same You can use the illustrations in this appendix to facilitate programming from one telephone type to the other IgE howe the buttons on the PARTNER 34D Programming Overlay and the relative location of those buttons on each MLS model phone Figure E 2 shows the buttons on the MLS 34D Programming Overlay and the relative location of those buttons on each PARTNER model phone The letters on the PARTNER 34D Overlay in Figure E 1 are printed on the Overlay To help you program from an MLS 34D phone you may want to write the letters shown on the MLS 34D Overlay in Figure E 2 on your Overlay If you want to program features on specific buttons at target phones it is recommended that you 1 Look at the figure with the overlay that matches the phone at your program
251. hones Table 5 1 Character Codes Letters Numbers A 21 N 62 blank 11 B 22 0 63 0 00 C 23 P 71 1 10 D 31 Q 72 2 20 E 32 R 73 3 30 F 33 S 74 4 40 G 41 T 81 5 50 H 42 U 82 6 60 43 V 83 7 70 J 51 W 91 8 80 K 52 X 92 9 90 L 53 Y 93 M 61 Z 94 Extension Name Display 5 85 Programming To assign a name to an extension 1 2 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program Enter the number of the extension to be programmed For example to program extension 12 press 1 2 Press left intercom For extension 12 a display similar to the following appears 12 Enter Extension Name If a name was assigned previously to this extension that name displays instead Enter the two digit code for each character you want to enter See Table 5 1 for codes For example to enter the name Andy press 2 _7 6 2 3 L1 9 3 A display similar to the following appears 12 ANDY If you make a mistake you can press _Mic HFA to clear the display Repeat Step 4 to enter the correct name Program a button for this extension or exit programming mode 5 86 Extension Name Display External Hotline 811 Description This procedure applies only to standard phones This System Programming procedure identifies an external hotline extension When a user lifts the handset of an external hotline a prede
252. ide is intended for the System Manager It explains what the PARTNER I Communications System can do provides instructions for programming and using the system and tells you how to get the most out of its many features and capabilities Terminology Throughout this guide the PARTNER II Communications System is referred to simply as the system and Lucent Technologies telephones specifically designed to work with the system are called system phones You can also use industry standard telephones with the system which are referred to as standard phones in this guide Finally the PARTNER MAIL or PARTNER MAIL VS Voice Messaging System which you may have connected to the system is referred to as the voice messaging system How to Use This Guide For information on the following topics refer to the appropriate chapter m Getting Acquainted Chapter 1 provides an overview of system features and hardware components Programming the System You can change your system s settings easily to accommodate new or expanding needs Chapter 2 provides general programming information while Chapter 5 provides detailed instructions for programming specific features Training Co Workers Chapter 3 explains how system and standard phones work with the system To help train co workers on telephone basics you can share this information with them About This Guide v m Using Auxiliary Equipment The system supports a wide variety of auxi
253. ific buttons on that extension s phone regardless of whether they are part of a pool Related Features m When an extension is changed from Pooled to Key any previously assigned pool buttons are removed from the extension Be cosy eerie no eatsilis set to No Access Additionally the extension is programmed with factory settings for 302 Automatic Line Selection m When an extension is changed from Key to Pooled any previously assigned line buttons are removed from the extension and Pool Ace ese FeS riod 315 is set to No Restriction Additionally the extension is programmed with factory settings for and Considerations m Extension 10 operates as a key extension regardless of how the system is configured The Line Access Mode for extension 10 cannot be changed Extensions that are programmed as key extensions cannot access pools either by pressing pool buttons or by dialing pool access codes Valid Entries 1 Pooled v all extensions except 10 2 Key extension 10 only Programming To change the Line Access Mode setting for a specific extension 1 Press Feature o Lo Sytem Program System Program 2 1 a 2 Enter the desired extension number For example to program extension 18 press 1 8 3 To change the Line Access Mode press _Next Data until the appropriate value displays 4 To program another extension press _Next tem or _Prev Item un
254. igned 2 Not Assigned PRESS next Item to assign another lis To program another extension PRESS Next Procedure Prev Proceaure enter a new extension number and repeat above steps FORCED ACCOUNT CODE LIST DIAL 409 DIAL a list entry 01 99 To add entry the account code up to 6 digits PRESS Enter Remove to remove a list entry PRESS _Next item to program another list entry System Speed Dial Numbers p 5 182 To remove a number PRESS Feature o o to enter programming mode To program a number PRESS Feature Lo Lo to enter programming mode PRESS Feature DIAL a three digit code 600 699 DIAL the telephone number up to 28 digi ding special characters see pagel a 5 173 To mark it to override restrictions dial x _ before the telephone number To program another number or to change a number repeat PRESS Feature o o to exit programming mode PRESS feau J lt DIAL the System Speed Dial number s code 600 699 PRESS mic HEA To remove another number repeat PRESS eatre o Lo to exit programming mode PICKUP GROUP EXTENSIONS DIAL 501 DIAL a group number 1 4 DIAL an extension number 10 57 DIAL 1 Assigned to group 2 Not Assigned to group Y PRESS _Next item to assign another extension CALLING GROUP EXTENSIONS DIAL 502 DIAL a group number 1 4 D
255. igure 4 9 Stand Alone Modem for Placing Calls Only To Use Follow the modem manufacturer s instructions To Program 1 If extension X is a key extension use Line Assignment 301 to assign one or more lines to extension X If extension X is a pooled extension use Pool Extension Assignment 314 to assign the pools you want the modem to use to extension X Also use Assignment 301 to assign any individual lines you want the modem to use to extension X 2 Ifthe modem will only dial outside the system set Automatic Line Selection for extension X to select outside lines first If you also use the modem for calls within the system set Automatic Line Selection to select intercom first and include a 9 or a pool access code and a couple of pauses in the modem s dialing sequence for outside calls 3 Set Line Ringing for all lines and pools assigned to extension X to No Ring 4 20 Using Auxiliary Equipment 4 Set Automatic Extension Privacy 304 for extension X to Assigned Make sure extension X is not assigned as a Call Waiting 316 extension Pickup Group Extension 501 Calling Group Extension 502 Night Service Group Extension 504 or Hunt Group Extension 505 6 Setthe auto answer feature of the modem to Off Send and Receive Modem If you need to place and receive calls with the modem use the setup shown in Figure 4 10 This setup makes line A the primary modem line but keeps the line
256. ing which may not be required for your dialing area 9 Hold 1 2 Lo 1 5 5 5 4 3 2 2 5 174 Special Dialing Functions Station Lock F21 Description This feature is available only on system and standard touch tone phones This feature lets users enter a four digit code on their telephone dial pad to lock their extension Later the user enters the identical code to unlock the extension Station Lock helps to prevent unauthorized people from making outside calls from these extensions You should recommend that users lock their extensions whenever they leave their desks for extended periods of time Related Features m All outside numbers except Marked System Speed Dial Numbers and numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List 406 are restricted from locked extensions m lf auser forgets the code use Station Unlock to unlock the extension Do not lock External Hotline extensions Considerations m You can program a Station Lock button on a system phone A button with lights is recommended so the user can quickly determine whether or not the extension is locked m Users can enter a different code each time they lock their extension A user at a locked extension can make intercom calls and can receive intercom and outside calls m Station Lock returns to the status on off it was in before a power failure occurred or System Reset 728 was used Programming To program a Station Lock bu
257. ing sequence until the Auto Dial button or Speed Dial number is used again for example so the user can enter additional digits such as a credit card number or password To continue press the Auto Dial button or _ Feature and the two or three digit speed dial code Stop cannot be programmed from an MDC 9000 or MDW 9000 phone since it has no _Mic HFA button Touch Tone Transtr T Sends touch tones over a rotary line to Enable electronic equipment such as answering machines and bank computers Considerations Special characters cannot be used when dialing a number manually Examples m Pause To call an answering machine at 555 0529 wait 4 5 seconds then dial 321 to retrieve messages enter 5 5 5 Lo 5 L2 Lo Hola Hold Hola 3 2 2 Recall Centrex Feature Button The following entry shows how to program an Auto Dial button with a Centrex feature that you use while on a call for which the feature access code is 32 This example includes a Recall signal to send a switchhook flash to the Centrex system when you are already ona call You can store a Recall signal by pressing _Sp r but only if it is the first character stored It also includes a 1 5 second pause which you insert by pressing Hod to allow time to get a new Centrex dial tone _Spkr Hoia x 3 2 Special Dialing Functions 5 173 m Stop Your local bank by phone service requires that you enter a
258. ion extension Once there callers hear ringing until the call is answered or it is sent to the voice messaging system Related Features m lf you have an audio source connected to the primary processor module set Music On Hold 602 to Active and Ring on Transfer to Not Active so callers hear music as they are being transferred to the destination extension m This procedure has no effect on Direct Extension Dial or Call Park Valid Entries 1 Active vY 2 Not Active Programming To change Ring on Transfer 1 Press Feature 0 o System Program System Program 1 1 Lo 2 Press _Next Data until the appropriate value displays 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Ring on Transfer 119 5 163 Rotary Dialing Timeout 108 Description This System Programming procedure changes the length of the Rotary Dialing Timeout You may need to change the length of the timeout if you have any rotary lines and you are having trouble calling out on standard touch tone phones For example if users dial slowly and calls are not completed or are connected to wrong numbers lengthen the timeout Related Features Use this procedure only if the Dial Mode 201 for at least one outside line in the system is set to rotary Considerations Do not change this setting unless the system is experiencing problems Valid Entries 1 4 seconds 2 8seconds vY 3 12 seconds Programming To change th
259. isting line DIAL 1 Assigned assignments press _Remove 2 Not Assigned before selecting a line PRESS Remove to program another DIAL a line number 01 24 extension DIAL 1 Assigned Vv 2 Not Assigned 3 Select Button then ABBREVIATED RINGING DIAL 305 press a programmable DIAL an extension number 10 57 button to assign the line to that button If you use option 3 after a line has been assigned the line moves from the old button to the new button you select PRESS next tem to program another line for this extension DIAL 1 Active 1 ring Y 2 Not Active repeated ringing PRESS Next item to program another extension EXTERNAL HOTLINE p 5 87 TRANSFER RETURN EXTENSION To program another extension DIAL 311 PRESS Next Procedure Prev Procedure DIAL 306 o 5 192 DIAL an extension number 10 57 E repeat enter a new extension num DIAL an extension number 10 57 DIAL 1 Assigned EBRE ERNENNENRNSSNENB ber and repeat above steps DIAL number of the extension 2 Not Assigned 7 doan to which oe PRESS Next item to program another ms BeBe eee return if not answere extension POOL ACCESS RESTRICTION LINE ACCESS RESTRICTION Y Extension transferring call a m DIAL 315 p 5 152 DIAL an extension number 10 57 mw DIAL a pool number 880 881 DIAL 302 p 5 116 PRESS Next item to p
260. ists of at least the primary carrier and can be expanded to include the expansion carrier Centralized Telephone Programming A method of telephone programming that lets you program individual extensions in the system from a system display phone at extension 10 or extension 11 Centralized Telephone Programming is an alternative to Extension Programming GL 2 Glossary CO Line See Line Combination extension An extension that has two devices connected to it Combination extensions can connect two standard devices or a standard device and a system phone but not two system phones Control unit The control unit consists of a primary carrier which contains line and extension modules for connecting lines coming into your building to the extensions in your system It also provides system features The control unit can be expanded to include an expansion carrier for additional line and or extension capacity rr D DGC Group See Group Call Distribution and Direct Extension Dialing A feature that enables outside callers to dial an extension or Hunt Group directly without waiting for the receptionist to transfer the call Doorphone A Lucent Technologies proprietary phone that can be wall mounted outside your office or in a lobby to allow visitors to alert any number of system extensions by pressing a button The doorphone includes a speaker and microphone to allow a two way conversation between the doorphone and the phone
261. its for an account code for tracking purposes For example a Customer Service Department s account code is 123 Representatives in the department must dial at least 123 to get an outside line but can enter additional digits to track a specific customer or item number For example The following entries are valid 123 123999 The following entries are invalid 1 12 Account Code List 409 Wildcard Characters You can use wildcard characters in list entries For example your company s Sales Department has a three digit account code the first digit represents the department and the second and third digit represent the individuals in the department You enter 4 as the list entry The following entries are valid 401 410 499 455555 The following entries are invalid 4 44 Programming To create a Forced Account Code List 1 2 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 4 Lo 9 Select a list entry 01 99 For example to select the third entry press o 3 A display similar to the following appears Forced Act Code List 03 Enter up to six digits for the list entry If the account code is five digits or less you must press Enter to save the account code in memory At this point m To enter other account codes press Next Item to select a different list entry and repeat Steps 3 and 4 m To change the account code you just entered p
262. k at your extension unless a different transfer return extension is programmed for your extension lift the handset and you are reconnected to the caller m To make a voice signaled transfer to a system phone in Step 2 above press x plus the two digit extension number Then listen for one of the following responses If you hear one beep you have reached an idle system phone You can speak after the beep Your voice is heard through the other extension s speaker If no one answers or the call is refused press the switchhook again to reconnect to the caller If the call is accepted hang up If you hear two beeps you have reached a busy system phone with Voice Interrupt On Busy Assigned You can speak after the beeps Your voice is heard through the recipient s handset or speaker Be aware that the third party to whom the recipient is speaking probably also will hear the two beeps and the faint sound of your voice Be brief and discreet in your interruption If the recipient has a Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button wait for a response If the call is accepted hang up to complete the transfer The call rings at the recipient s extension If the call is refused press the switchhook again to reconnect to the caller If you hear ringing you have reached a standard phone an idle MDC 9000 or MDW 9000 phone or a busy system phone with Voice Interrupt On Busy Not Assigned When someone answers announce the call then hang up If
263. k the documentation shipped with the call accounting device to verify that these options are supported If SMDR Talk Time 611 is set to Active and SMDR Output Format 610 jis set to 24 digits the combined length of the fields for a call record will be greater than the 80 characters supported by most printers If call records wrap around to the next line reduce the font size or increase the characters per inch setting for the printer If necessary change the SMDR Output Format back to 15 digits In the event of a power failure records of any calls in progress are lost 4 10 Using Auxiliary Equipment m Inside intercom calls are not recorded m If you place a call on hold and the caller hangs up the call is considered complete and the record is sent to the call reporting device m Conference calls appear as two outside calls This means that two records are generated on the report Output Format The following RS 232 serial transmission protocol is used for SMDR records m 1200 baud m no parity 8 data bits m 2 stop bits The call reporting feature also supports XON XOFF protocol carriage returns and line feeds Serial Printers Use a 355A adapter which converts a modular jack interface to an RS 232 25 pin connector to connect a serial printer to the primary processor module If you connect a printer make sure the printer can receive SMDR data in the format described above refer to the printer s instructions or co
264. l is that Save Number Redial allows you to make other outside calls before redialing the saved number System Speed Dial Numbers cannot be redialed with this feature Considerations m This feature redials all digits dialed on the last outside call except account codes m You can program a Last Number Redial button on a system phone to redial a number with one touch Programming To program a Last Number Redial button 1 Press Feature Lo Lo System Program System Program Central Tel Program Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button Press Feature 0 5 ao fF oO DN Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using System Phone To use Last Number Redial 1 Ifyou want lift the handset 2 Press the programmed button or press Feature 0 5 Digits are displayed on system display phones as they are dialed Standard Phone To use Last Number Redial 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Press o 4 5 114 Last Number Redial F05 Line Access Mode 813 Description This procedure applies only to systems configured for Hybrid mode This System Programming procedure identifies individual extensions that are to operate as key extensions even though the system is configured for Hybrid mode If an extension s Line Access Mode is changed to Key individual lines can be assigned to spec
265. l long distance Related Features m Rather than using an Outgoing Call Restriction button you can use Outgoing Call Restriction 401 to change an extension s Outgoing Call Restriction setting through System Programming if you prefer You must use an Auto Dial button with lights to designate the extension you want to change after you press the Outgoing Call Restriction button It is recommended that you use an Auto Dial button on the PARTNER CA48 Intercom Autodialer However you can use an intercom Auto Dial button on the system phone at extension 10 provided the button has lights For information about programming Auto Dial buttons see Auto Dialing Considerations a An Outgoing Call Restriction button must be programmed on the system phone at extension 10 Outgoing Call Restriction must be programmed on a button with lights This feature does not work if it is programmed on a button without lights The system considers extension 10 busy while you are using the Outgoing Call Restriction button and the phone acts as if it is in System Programming mode You cannot use other features or handle calls at extension 10 until you are through using the feature You cannot use the Outgoing Call Restriction button to change an extension s setting while extension 11 is in System Programming mode Valid Entries 1 2 3 Assigned to next available button at extension 10 Not Assigned Select button then press a programmab
266. le button with lights to assign Outgoing Call Restriction to that button 5 146 Outgoing Call Restriction Button 114 Programming To program an Outgoing Call Restriction button at extension 10 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 1 1 4 2 At this point m f you want to assign Outgoing Call Restriction to the first available button press Next Data until a display similar to the following appears Outgoing CallRstr Button 1 Assigned Ext10 m f you want to remove the Outgoing Call Restriction button assignment press _Next Data until a display similar to the following appears Outgoing CallRstr Button 2 Not Assigned m f you want to assign Outgoing Call Restriction to a specific button press 3 A display similar to the following appears Outgoing CallRstr Button 3 Select a Button Then press a programmable button with lights to assign Outgoing Call Restriction to that button 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 4 Label the Outgoing Call Restriction button at extension 10 Using To change an extension s Outgoing Call Restriction setting 1 Press the Outgoing Call Restriction button at extension 10 The green light next to the Outgoing Call Restriction button turns on and extension 10 appears busy to the system 2 Press the Auto Dial button for the desired extension repeatedly until its lights show the correct setting as follows m No Restric
267. lection and Extension Name Display which also must be programmed when you first enter Centralized Telephone Programming first program Automatic Line Selection then exit and re enter Centralized Telephone Programming again to program Extension Name Display For standard touch tone or rotary phones or for any phone used mainly to call other extensions program the extension to select intercom first For combination extensions the automatic line selection for both devices including a standard device follows the automatic line selection for the extension You do not need to include all available lines or pools for an extension only the ones you want the system to search through and connect automatically Automatic Line Selection 5 19 Valid Entries Key Extension Outside lines 01 24 Left Intercom wv Pooled Extension Pool 880 button 1 button 2 Left Intercom Right Intercom wv Pools 881 883 individual lines Examples System Phone At key extensions with Automatic Line Selection at its factory setting the system first searches to find an idle outside line in numerical order starting with the lowest line number Then if all outside lines are busy the system searches for an idle intercom line This order can be changed however to accommodate your business needs For example a telemarketing firm with a WATS line line 5 to reduce telephone expenses would set Automatic Line Selection for all telemarketers extensions to
268. led behind a PBX or Centrex system or with the local phone company s Call Waiting feature Possible Cause Recall Timer Duration setting is too long What to do Decrease the Recall Timer Duration 107 by 100 milliseconds m Ifthe Recall feature works properly the problem is solved m If the Recall feature still disconnects calls continue decreasing the Recall Timer Duration by increments of 100 milliseconds until the problem is solved In the continental U S help is available at 1 800 628 2888 Outside the continental U S call your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer 6 12 Troubleshooting Problems with Combination Extensions Phone Does Not Work Properly Possible Cause 1 Ringer equivalents are too high for the extension What to do Be sure the total of the two devices Ringer Equivalence Numbers REN does not exceed 2 0 If it does unplug one of the devices m If the phone works properly the problem is the REN was too high m lf the phone still does not work properly go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 Auxiliary device such as a fax answering machine or modem is faulty What to do Remove the auxiliary device from the extension Then plug in an auxiliary device that you know works properly m If the phone works properly the problem is the auxiliary device Replace the auxiliary device m If the phone still does not work properly go to Possible Cause 3 Possi
269. ler ID information Although the system provides functionally integrated multi line Caller ID on system display phones you can connect other devices provided you subscribe to the service from your local phone company and connect the device directly to the Caller ID line To install other devices refer to Connecting Caller ID Devices in the PARTNER Communications System Installation guide for details Follow the manufacturer s instructions packaged with the device To order auxiliary equipment refer to Product Ordering Information in Appendix B If a Device Has Trouble Two System Programming procedures can be used to adjust the system settings for auxiliary equipment installed at an extension if a device has trouble answering calls or dialing out If a device such as an answering machine does not pick up transferred or intercom calls you can Dinca non change the ringing so that all calls ring like outside calls at that extension If an autodialing device such as a modem has trouble autodialing use Intercom Dial Tone 309 t0 change the intercom dial tone for the extension to Machine outside line dial tone Using Auxiliary Equipment 4 3 Answering Machines You can use an answering machine to answer calls at night when no one is around or during business hours when no one can get to the phone If you have a Lucent Technologies answering machine with the Call Intercept feature you can pick up a call that has
270. ler IDjinformation does not display for ringing calls on lines belonging to a pool programmed for Out Only or for No Access Considerations For extension 10 and any extensions for which Line Access Mode 313 is set to Key this procedure is automatically set to No Access Valid Entries 5 152 1 No Restriction calls permitted on all lines in that pool 2 Out Only can only make outside calls not receive them on lines in that pool 3 In Only can only receive calls not make them on lines in that pool 4 No Access cannot receive or make calls but can receive transferred calls on lines in that pool Pool Access Restriction 315 Programming To restrict an extension from making or receiving calls on all the lines in a specific pool 1 2 Press Feature 0 o System Program System Program 3 1 5 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed For example to program extension 23 press 2 3 A display similar to the following appears Pool Access Rstr 23 Pool Enter the pool number 880 881 882 or 883 to be restricted at this extension For example to restrict pool 881 press 8 L8 1 The current restriction displays To change the pool restriction for this extension press _Next Data until the appropriate value displays see Valid Entries on the previous page At this point m To restrict another pool at this extension press _Next Item or _Prev
271. liary equipment including fax machines modems voice messaging systems and call reporting devices Chapter 4 provides advice on setting up these devices to work effectively with the system m Daily Operation Depending on how your system is set up you may need to oversee some of the system s daily operations For example you may need to turn on Night Service at the end of each day before leaving the office Reference information on all features including descriptions and instructions for using each feature is provided in Chapter 5 Solving Problems Chapter 6 provides information on solving problems if your system or telephones malfunction Once you are experienced with the system use the Table of Contents or Index to locate the information you need Throughout this guide feature names are printed in bold so you can easily look up the name in Chapter 5 Feature Reference for additional information on the feature For example if you see a reference to you can look it up in Chapter 5 for details Product Safety Statements Product safety statements are identified in this guide by a A A CAUTION Indicates the presence of a hazard that will or can cause minor personal injury or property damage if the hazard is not avoided A WARNING Indicates the presence of a hazard that can cause severe or fatal personal injury if the hazard is not avoided How to Comment on This Guide vi A feedback form is located
272. line or pool button The dial tone you hear is an outside dial tone To hear an intercom dial tone press Intercom Using the Handset Speaker and Microphone 3 6 Every system phone except the MDC 9000 and MDW 9000 phones has a speaker and a microphone which you can turn on by pressing _Sp amp r In addition you can turn just the microphone on and off by pressing _Mic HEAI When the green light next to _mic HFAr is on the microphone is on If you prefer to dial and conduct calls without lifting the handset you can use the speaker and the microphone instead Use these techniques to make calls with the speaker and the microphone m To make a call without lifting the handset press _sp r to get dial tone then dial the number and you will hear the call ringing When the other party answers you can talk without lifting the handset m If you are already on a call you can switch from the handset to the speaker and microphone by pressing _spsr and hanging up the handset Conversely if you are using the speaker and microphone and want to switch to the handset lift the handset and the speaker and microphone will turn off m To turn off the microphone when you are using the speaker press _Mic HEA This will mute your voice so the other party cannot hear you m Use the Hands Free Answer on Intercom HFAI feature to answer voice signaled calls without lifting the handset see next page Learning About Telephones
273. ling party hangs up on an Automatic System Answer or Direct Extension Dial call before someone at an extension answers this field shows 00 Account Code This is the account code up to 16 digits assigned to the call This code typically is used for charging calls to a specific project or department Talk This is the time a user spends on an incoming outside call from the time the user answers the call to the time the call is disconnected from the system The talk time is shown in hh mm ss format where hh is the hour mm is the minutes and ss is the seconds If the call is answered by the Automatic System Answer or Direct Extension Dial feature this field does not include the time the caller listens to the greeting or waits for someone to answer the call For all other calls the time in this field is the same as the time in the Duration field This field is included on the call report only if SMDR Talk Time 611 is set to Active Considerations The System Date 101 and System Time 103 must be set correctly to ensure accurate call reports The call report header prints in the Display Language 303 specified for extension 10 If a report cannot print because the printer is jammed or out of paper the system will store up to 45 records in its memory until they can be printed Additional calls will not be recorded Before including the Talk field on call reports or changing the output format to 24 digits chec
274. ll is left on hold for longer than one minute the extension at which the call is held generates a short Hold Reminder Tone This tone sounds once every minute until the held call is retrieved or until the caller hangs up If you put a call on a line in a pool on hold and another user picks up that call it will no longer be available to you To ensure that no one else can retrieve your held call on a pooled line use Exclusive Hold Programming To program an Exclusive Hold button i 2 3 4 5 Using Press Feature Lo Lo System Program System Program Central Tel Program Enter the extension number to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button Press Feature o 2 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode While active on an outside call on a system phone 1 Press the programmed button or press _Feature o 2 to put the call on Exclusive Hold The green light next to the line pool or intercom button flutters At all other extensions the line appears busy steady red To retrieve the call press the line pool or intercom button on which the call is held and lift the handset or press _Spkr You can pick up a call on Exclusive Hold only at the extension on which it was put on Exclusive Hold 5 84 Exclusive Hold F02 Extension Name Display Description Users can assign a name to their extension up to 20 characters long on PARTNER
275. llow or disallow two outside parties on a conference call press Next Data until the appropriate value displays 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 148 Outside Conference Denial 109 Personal Speed Dial Numbers Description This Telephone Programming procedure lets you store up to 20 frequently dialed numbers for each extension A Personal Speed Dial number can be dialed quickly by pressing Feature or at intercom dial tone on a standard phone and the two digit code from 80 through 99 The Personal Speed Dial numbers programmed for a particular extension are for use only at that extension Related Features m Personal Speed Dialing which lets users dial a number by pressing three buttons is different from Auto Dialing which lets users dial a number by pressing a single button m For instructions on entering special characters such as Pause in a number see Special Dialing Functions m You can use System Speed Dial Numbers to create a list of up to 100 frequently dialed numbers available to all system users m You can store account codes as Personal Speed Dial numbers for use with the Account Code Entry feature m External Hotline 311 uses Personal Speed Dial code 80 for the external hotline number Considerations m Ifthe system is connected to a PBX or Centrex system and a dial out code usually 9 is needed to place calls outside the PBX or Centrex system include the dial out
276. m Speed Dial Form This appendix contains a Speed Dial Form to be photocopied and handed out to system users It provides space for System and Personal Speed Dial numbers For instructions on programming and using System and Personal Speed Dial numbers see Chapter 5 We suggest that you fill in a photocopy of the form leaving the blank original in the book in case you need to distribute revisions in the future Speed Dial Form D 1 PARTNER II Communications System To Dial On a system phone press Feature Code e On a standard phone press Code while receiving intercom dial tone System Speed Dial Numbers Code Name Company Telephone Number Code Name Company Telephone Number 600 667 601 668 602 669 603 670 671 x You can dial System Speed Dial codes with a x at any time regardless of dialing restrictions placed on your extension System Speed Dial numbers are programmed by the System Manager report problems and suggested revisions to your System Manager PARTNER II Communications System To Dial e On a system phone press Feature Code e On a standard phone press Code while receiving intercom dial tone Extension Personal Speed Dial Numbers Name Company Telephone Number Code Name Company Telep
277. m then System Program TO move back to Centralized Telephone Programming when you are in System Programming press Central Tel Program Using Extension Programming Users can program features or store numbers on buttons from their own phones using Extension Programming Keep in mind the following exceptions m Automatic Line Selection and Line Ringing always must be programmed using Centralized Telephone Programming m fa user has a standard phone Personal Speed Dial Numbers for the extension can be programmed only by using Centralized Telephone Programming m fa user has a standard phone or a non display system phone Extension Name Display for the extension can be programmed only by using Centralized Telephone Programming To program at the extension use the following procedure 1 To start programming dial Feature 0 Lo The green lights next to buttons on which lines or pools are assigned for the extension show the current Line Ringing settings remaining buttons can be programmed with telephone numbers extension numbers or system features 2 To assign a name to the extension press left _Intercom then enter the character codes See Extension Name Display in Chapter 5 for the codes 3 Program Personal Speed Dial Numbers Auto Dial numbers or system features as described in Chapter 5 To erase the current programming from a button press the button then press _Mic HFAI 4 To
278. m Program Central Program 2 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature 3 Press a programmable button 4 Press Feature 0 4 5 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode To save a number From a system phone press the programmed button or press Feature o 4 after dialing the number but before hanging up To redial a saved number Press the programmed button again or press Feature 0 4 again Save Number Redial F04 5 165 Send All Calls Description You can use the Call Coverage VMS Cover or Do Not Disturb buttons to send intercom and transferred calls and outside calls on owned lines immediately either to the covering extension or to your voice mailbox Related Features Using If Call Coverage is on and a call that is eligible for coverage begins to ring you can turn on Do Not Disturb to send that call and any subsequent calls immediately to the covering extension This allows callers to receive coverage without waiting for the number of rings specified with Coverage Rings 116 If VMS Cover is on and a call that is eligible for coverage begins to ring you can turn on Do Not Disturb to immediately send that call and subsequent calls to your voice mailbox This allows callers to leave a message without waiting for the number of rings specified with VMS Cover Rings 117 If Call Coverage and VMS Cover are both on you c
279. mbers Standard devices answering machines 4 4_ Cd lee credit card scanners fax machines limitations modems overview 1 10 problems telephones Standard phones Automatic Line Selection for call handling connecting 1 10 dial tones 3 10 _ _ o O dial code features 3 14 CS feature buttons onJ3 11 y limitations 1 10 3 40 __ O SS S S O message waiting compatibility 1 9 3 9 5 134 5 136__ overview 3 8 power failure for use during System Date 101 System Day 102 System Password 403 System phones overview problems with 6 2 6 5 o O ringing patterns Hers using 3 1 3 8 8 11 8 13 00 Time System 703 Timed flash 5 160 5 162 5163 Timer call 3 2 5 75 ____ S Toll Call Prefix 402 Toll restrictions se Touch tone dial Touch Tone Enable programming feature on a button 5 187 lt programming function in phone number 5 173 lt using 5 187 _ o Transfer button 3 2 5 188 Cd Transfer return display message 5 74 ssid Transfer Return Extension gs52 J519 Transfer Return Rings 105 5 194 ssid E Transfer ringing 3 5 3 9 5 189 __ Transfer one touch se Transferring a call Usage reports 4 9 5 169 5 172 V VMS see Voice messaging systems 5 122 5 195 5 196 o VMS Cover Rings 117 5 VMS Hunt Delay 506 Voice Interrupt On Busy 312 5 200
280. messages From any system extension make an intercom call to the answering machine extension When the machine answers dial its message retrieval code From outside the system call in on any line assigned to the machine When the machine answers dial its message retrieval code To Program 1 If extension X is a key extension use Line Assignment 301 to assign all the lines to extension X that you want the answering machine to cover If extension X is a pooled extension use Pool Extension Assignment 314 to assign all the pools to extension X that you want the answering machine to cover Also use Line Assignment 301 to assign any individual lines to extension X that you want the answering machine to cover Set Line Ringing for all lines and pools assigned to extension X to Immediate Ring Make sure extension X is not assigned as a Call Waiting 316 extension Pickup Group Extension 501 Calling Group Extension 502 Night Service Group Extension 504 or Hunt Group Extension 505 Adjust the answering machine to answer according to your needs For example set the machine to answer on the fourth ring during the day so someone has a chance to pick up the call Using Auxiliary Equipment 4 5 Multiple Answering Machines If a single answering machine cannot handle all your calls you can set up two or more machines at different extensions Figure 4 2 so that a call does not go unanswered
281. ming extension 2 Find the location of the button in the picture of the target phone 3 Note the letter associated with that particular button 4 Find the letter in the picture of the Programming Overlay 5 Press that button on the programming extension For example if you are using a PARTNER 34D phone at extension 10 and you want to program Do Not Disturb on the top leftmost button of an MLS 18D phone refer to Figure E 1 find the top leftmost button on the MLS 18D phone then press the button labeled M on the PARTNER 34D Programming Overlay Programming Mixed Phones E 1 MLS 6 Phone MLS 18D 12D 12 Phone PARTNER 34D Overlay nLE aL A Intercom System Centra Program fe Message m Volume MLS 34D Phone m o oO o o D of pf Gok GCE Cyd Cz m o o Oo oLE oE CE pH Intercom Intercom Figure E 1 Programming from a PARTNER 34D Phone E 2 Programming Mixed Telephone Types PARTNER 6 Phone a Intercom intercom Ext 0 Message PARTNER 18D 18 Phone Remove MLS 34D Overlay Se pe mes anes eo ames aa pao so 25 59 a So E 5 2 ee ja S A eBLA aB a a Qo Qo Intercom Intercom PARTNER 34D Phone J f S f o0 o0 oo oo oo kyy Rn Mm HA EEE CEE CEC AA CK CE o o KEA ax alt al BEZ a0 oO oOo o a o o o oO a o co H Q intercom Intercom
282. mming procedures are optional but strongly recommended to make the most of your investment See System Programming Options and Telephone Programming Options later in this chapter for details Setting the System Clock After supplying power to the control unit use the following procedures m System Date 101 to set the month and day m System Day 102 to set the day of the week 7 System Time 103 to set the hour and minutes Assigning Lines Key Extensions Use this section to assign lines to key extensions all extensions in Key mode in Hybrid mode extension 10 and any extensions set to Key asine Aee IMode 313 jlor to assign individual lines to pooled extensions For initial setup only use Number of Lines 104 to specify the number of lines that will be assigned to all key extensions Then use the following procedures as needed E Dial Mode 201 to identify any rotary lines the default for all lines is touch tone E Line Assignment 301 jto assign lines to specific extensions if the line was not assigned using the Number of Lines procedure to remove lines from some extensions or to change the button used to select a line at a specific extension m Line Access Restriction 302 to prevent an extension from receiving and or making outside calls on specific lines m Line Ringing Centralized Telephone Programming to specify when a line will start ringing at each extension
283. mmunications devices such as fax machines and modems to the extension jacks either directly or through your building s modular wall jacks Each 206E module has a green power indicator that shows it is receiving power The system requires at least one 206E module 400E Module is similar to the 206E module but without extension jacks It has four outside line jacks This module is an inexpensive way to add lines when you do not need more extensions 206EC 400EC Modules provide the same capabilities as the 206E and 400E modules but add support for Caller ID information on system display phones To get Caller ID first you must subscribe to the service from your local phone company if it is available on a per line basis then connect those lines associated with Caller ID to the line jacks on the 206EC and or 400EC modules Any users with system display phones who receive calls on Caller ID lines will get Caller ID For more information see Caller ID jin Chapter 5 Hereafter references to 206 modules include 206E 206EC and all 206 modules used with previous releases of the product Similarly references to 400 modules include 400E 400EC and all 400 modules used with previous releases of the product 1 4 Overview If you are upgrading from a PARTNER or PARTNER Plus system you can still use its 200E modules each providing two line jacks If you want message waiting capability on standard phones that are equipped with messag
284. mode and the date and time appear on the display If a power failure occurred the time may not be correct change it using System Time 103 and activate other features as desired System Reset Programming Saved 728 5 181 System Speed Dial Numbers Description This feature lets you program a list of up to 100 frequently dialed numbers for the system Anyone on the system can dial a System Speed Dial number by pressing Feature or at intercom dial tone on a standard phone and the three digit code from 600 through 699 You can mark System Speed Dial numbers to override dialing restrictions Related Features System Speed Dialing which lets users dial a number by pressing four buttons is different from Auto Dialing which lets users dial a number by pressing a single button For instructions on entering special characters such as Pause in a number see Special Dialing Functions Individuals can have up to 20 additional Personal Speed Dial Numbers for use on their own phones You can store account codes as System Speed Dial numbers for use with the Account Code Entry feature Considerations To program System Speed Dial numbers that override dialing restrictions mark them by entering a star x before the phone number Note that Marked System Speed Dial Numbers appear on the SMDR call report as Fnnn where nnn is the Speed Dial code For more information on SMDR see Call Reports in
285. model phones up to 12 characters on MLS model phones Then when that extension is used to make an intercom group or transferred call the name appears on the system display phone receiving the call Similarly users receiving a transfer return call see the name of the person assigned to the extension that did not answer the transferred call Related Features Display Language 303 has no effect on this feature This means that the extension name displays exactly as it is programmed Considerations m Any extension regardless of the phone type on that extension can be programmed with a name through Centralized Telephone Programming If users want to program their own extension name they must use a system display phone at their extension m Only extension numbers not names are printed on SMDR reports m You should program Extension Name Display when you first enter Centralized Telephone Programming before programming any other features If you want to program both Extension Name Display and Automatic Line Selection which also must be programmed when you first enter Centralized Telephone Programming first program Automatic Line Selection then exit and re enter Centralized Telephone Programming to program Extension Name Display Valid Entries Up to 20 characters including letters A Z numbers 0 9 and blank spaces See Table 5 1 below for the corresponding codes Note that only the first 12 characters appear on MLS model p
286. move between the two calls Hold 5 105 Hold Disconnect Time 203 Description This System Programming procedure lets you change the hold disconnect time for an outside line When a caller on hold hangs up the local telephone company may send a special signal to the system to free the line There are two possible signals a long signal 450 milliseconds used by most telephone companies or a short signal 50 milliseconds used by a few telephone companies The length of the signal is called the hold disconnect time If you put a call on hold and the caller hangs up but the call does not disconnect within a minute after the caller hangs up use this procedure to change the hold disconnect time Considerations If the telephone company does not send a signal keep the hold disconnect time set to Long The user must disconnect a held call manually by retrieving the call then hanging it up Change the hold disconnect time only if abandoned calls do not disconnect Valid Entries 1 Long 450 msec Y 2 Short 50 msec Programming To change the hold disconnect time 1 2 3 Press Feature 0 Lo System Program _System Program 2 o 3 Enter the first line number For example to program line 1 press o 1 To change the hold disconnect time press _Next Data until the appropriate value displays To program the next line press _Next tem or _Prev Item until the line number shows o
287. n m Use Automatic Line Selection to change the order in which the telephone selects a line or pool when the user picks up the handset If you want to change Automatic Line Selection for an extension you must do so immediately after you enter programming mode and dial the extension number m Use to assign a user s name to the extension See Chapter 5 for the character codes Like Automatic Line Selection this procedure must be done immediately after you enter programming mode and dial the extension number If you want to do both procedures first change Automatic Line Selection then press Central Tel Program redial the extension number then use m Use Line Ringing to change the ringing for an individual line or pool 5 Program Personal Speed Dial Numbers Auto Dial numbers or system features as described in Chapter 5 To erase the current programming from a button press the button then press _Mic HFAI Programming 2 25 6 To change the settings for another extension press Central Tel Program then dial the new extension number 7 To exit programming mode you can press Feature 0 o or lift the handset off hook then place it back in the cradle Changing Programming Type When you are in programming mode you can move between System Programming and Centralized Telephone Programming To change to System Programming when you are in Centralized Telephone Programming press Central Tel Progra
288. n a standard phone Transferring a call lets users pass a call from one extension to another Users can transfer both outside calls and intercom calls to other extensions Related Features m To transfer calls to an extension with a single touch program the extension number on an Auto Dial button see Auto Dialing for more information m To transfer calls to an extension for which you have a Manual Signaling button press _Transfr before pressing the Manual Signaling button m While a call is being transferred the caller hears ringing if Ring on Transfer 119 is Active If it is Not Active and Music On Hold 602 is Active and an audio source is connected to the system the caller hears music on hold while the call is being transferred to the destination extension If Music On Hold is Not Active and Ring on Transfer 119 is Not Active the caller hears silence m The system is factory set to return a transferred call after it rings four times at the destination extension to the extension that transferred it You can use Transfer Return Rings 105 to change the number of rings for all system extensions You can use Transfer Return Extension 306 to identify a different extension to which unanswered calls from a particular extension should return m lf users transfer a call Caller IDjinformation if it is available is passed to the destination extension m If you have a voice messaging system you can
289. n has Automatic VMS Cover and Call Forwarding active calls ring at the call forwarding destination extension they are not covered by the voice messaging system Considerations Standard phones and system phones without a programmed VMS Cover button cannot override this feature once it is assigned to an extension Valid Entries 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned vY 5 32 Automatic VMS Cover 310 Programming To change the Automatic VMS Cover setting for an extension 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 3 1 Lo 2 Enter the number of the extension to be covered by the voice messaging system For example to program extension 11 press 1 4 3 To assign or unassign Automatic VMS Cover press _Next Data until the appropriate value displays 4 To program another extension press _Next item or _Prev Item until the extension number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Automatic VMS Cover 310 5 33 Background Music F 19 Description This feature is available only on system phones with speakers This feature provides background music through the speaker of an idle system phone for a user s work area Background Music plays the recorded material from the Music On Hold audio source Related Features Background Music is available only if Music On Hold 602 is active and an audio source is connected to the
290. n light is off Skip Steps 2 and 3 2 If no originating extension was programmed dial your extension number 3 If no destination extension was programmed dial your extension number again Call Forwarding is deactivated on a button with lights the green light is off Standard Phone To forward your calls 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Press 1 1 3 Dial your extension number 4 Dial the extension number at which you want the calls to ring To remove Call Forwarding 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone Press 7 7 Dial your extension number twice Call Forwarding Call Follow Me F11 XX XX 5 43 Call Park Description This feature allows you to park a call or put it on a special type of hold so it can be picked up from any phone in the system Related Features Use Call Pickup to retrieve parked calls When a call is parked the caller hears Music On Hold 602 if it is active and an audio source is connected to the primary processor module regardless of the Ring on Transfer 119 setting If you frequently park calls and you have a system phone program your extension number on an Auto Dial button so you can park a call simply by pressing the button See Auto Dialing Other ways of placing a call on hold include Hold and Exclusive Hold Parked calls do not receive Call Waiting Call Coverage Call Forwarding or VMS Cover Consider
291. n means Red means the Green means you are using the line red means someone at another extension is using the line Green means you are using a line in the pool red means all lines in the pool are in use feature is on extension programmed on the button is busy making or answering a call Off steady off Line is idle not being used Pool has available lines Feature is off Extension programmed on the button is idle not being used Flash long on long off A call is ringing on the line Green flash means a Call is ringing at your extension Red flash means a call is ringing on the line but not at your extension A call is ringing in the pool Green flash means a call is ringing at your extension Red flash means a call is ringing in the pool but not at your extension A user is entering a four digit code to lock or unlock his or her extension Green flash means someone at the extension programmed on the button is calling you Alternating Red Green Flash a a nS red on green on red on green on Alternating green and red flash appears at both extensions in a joined call and at any extension connected in a conference call Alternating green and red flash appears at both extensions in a joined call and at any extension connected in a conference call Applies to Automatic System Answer Caller ID Name Display Direct Extension
292. n the display Then repeat Step 3 Repeat Step 4 for each line in the system Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 106 Hold Disconnect Time 203 Hotline 603 Description This System Programming procedure identifies an internal hotline extension and its alert extension When a user lifts the handset of the hotline phone the alert extension rings You can set up several hotline and alert extension pairs The alert extension can be the same or different for multiple hotline extensions We recommend using a standard phone as the hotline phone since this feature makes use only of the phone s intercom The alert extension can be any type of phone or it can be the loudspeaker paging system so the hotline phone can be used to make announcements over the loudspeaker Related Features m To prevent outside calls from being made or received on the hotline phone use Line Assignment 301 to remove all outside lines or Pool Extension Assignment 314 to remove all pools from the hotline extension Set Automatic Line Selection for the hotline extension to intercom only m Remove hotline extensions from Night Service Group Extensions 504 Calling Group Extensions 502 and Hunt Group Extensions 505 m Use External Hotline 311 to identify an extension that automatically dials a programmed outside number when a user lifts the handset Considerations m The same extension cannot be assigned
293. ndset 2 Speak into the handset To avoid feedback do not use the speakerphone Your voice is heard through the loudspeaker paging system If your paging system supports announcements to zoned areas refer to the instructions packaged with the device to make zoned announcements 5 126 Loudspeaker Paging 170 Standard Phone To make an announcement over the loudspeaker paging system 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Dial z o 3 Speak into the handset Your voice is heard through the loudspeaker paging system For touch tone phones only if your loudspeaker paging system supports announcements to zoned areas refer to the instructions packaged with the device to make zoned announcements Loudspeaker Paging 170 5 127 Making Calls Description A user can make a call by dialing an outside phone number or an extension number There are also several ways to speed dial a number see Related Features below Hybrid Mode Only Making calls in Hybrid mode is the same as in Key mode except users can select a pool button rather than a line button to access an outside line When a user presses a pool button the system automatically selects an idle line belonging to the pool To access a line in a pool that is not assigned to that extension or to access a line in a pool that the user is already using system phone users can press intercom and dial the pool access code If all lines in
294. ne Ringing is set for No Ring or Delayed Ring change the setting if appropriate m lf Line Ringing is set for Immediate Ring and this phone is part of a combination extension see Problems with Combination Extensions Phone Does Not Work m lf Line Ringing is set for Immediate Ring and the phone is on an extension by itself go to Possible Cause 4 Possible Cause 4 Phone is faulty What to do Unplug the cord from the base of the problem phone Then plug the cord into a phone that you know rings properly m lf the replacement phone rings properly the problem phone is defective Call the hotline to arrange for a replacement m lf the replacement phone does not ring properly call the hotline In the continental U S help is available at 1 800 628 2888 Outside the continental U S call your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer 6 2 Troubleshooting System Phone Does Not Work Possible Cause 1 Telephone cord is plugged into wrong jack on bottom of system phone What to do Plug the modular telephone cord into the correct jack see the PARTNER Communications System Installation guide for instructions m If the phone works properly the problem is solved m If the problem remains go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 Phone needs to be reset What to do Unplug the cord from the base of the problem phone With the handset hung up plug the cord in again m lf the phone works prope
295. ne of four Calling Groups Gis a Calling Group number from 1 4 When paging the caller hears a beep and begins speaking the caller s voice is heard on the speakers of all idle system phones in the selected Calling Group The first extension to answer the call by picking up the handset or pressing _Spsr or by pressing _Mic HFAl to answer a page is connected to the caller Related Features m You must use Calling Group Extensions 502 to assign extensions to a Calling Group m Extensions assigned to Calling Group 1 can receive Simultaneous Paging Considerations m Extensions can be in more than one Calling Group m Exclude extensions that connect auxiliary equipment PARTNER Attendants voice messaging systems fax machines internal and external hotline phones and doorphones from Calling Groups m f some extensions in a Calling Group have standard MDC 9000 or MDW 9000 phones those extensions are not signaled for voice paged calls to the group m lf a Calling Group is in use a user attempting to page that group hears a busy tone m lf auser leaves the microphone on for hands free answer on intercom HFAI the microphone is turned off when that phone receives a group page the user must lift the handset or press _Mic HEA to answer the page m Calls can be transferred to a Calling Group manually or using a button programmed to ring the Calling Group m You can program a Group Calling button on a system phone to
296. nes belonging to Calling Group 1 m Night Service Group Extensions 504 assigns extensions to the Night Service Group When Night Service is activated at extension 10 calls ring immediately at Night Service extensions regardless of how they ring at other times only the lines assigned to an extension will ring Hunt Group Extensions 505 assigns extensions to one of seven Hunt Groups Hunt Group 7 is used exclusively for the voice messaging system A Hunt Group lets users ring or voice signal the first available non busy extension in that group If a ringing call is not answered the system tries each available extension in turn until the call is answered If a voice signaled call is not answered the call does not keep hunting Also use Group Call Distribution 206 to assign outside lines to a Hunt Group if you want outside calls to ring directly into a group Setting Up Auxiliary Equipment 2 12 following programming procedures help you manage auxiliary equipment Chapter 4 for more information on auxiliary equipment configurations or refer to Chapter 5 for details on using the procedure m Fax Machine Extensions 601 identifies extensions to which fax machines are connected m Music on Hold 602 activates or deactivates the MUSIC ON HOLD jack on the primary processor module When this jack is activated an audio source is connected and Ring on Transfer 119 is set to Not Active callers hear reco
297. nes the number of times intercom transferred and outside calls on lines assigned ownership ring at an extension before they are sent to the covering extension Related Features Call Coverage redirects an extension s covered calls to the covering extension m You must use Line Coverage Extension 208 to designate an extension as the owner of a specific outside line so the extension can activate Call Coverage for that line m If an extension has Call Coverage and VMS Cover active covered calls ring at the covering extension for the specified number of Call Coverage Rings Then If the covering extension does not answer the call is routed to the voice mailbox of the extension that activated Call Coverage after the specified number of VMS Cover Rings 117 If the covering extension has Do Not Disturbj active the call is routed immediately to the voice mailbox of the extension that activated Call Coverage Valid Entries 1 9 2v Programming To change the number of times a call rings at an extension before it is sent to the covering extension 1 Press Feature o 0 System Program System Program 1 1 L6 2 Enter a different setting 1 9 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 40 Call Coverage Rings 116 Call Forwarding Call Follow Me F 11 XX XX Description This feature forwards all intercom transferred and outside calls from a user s extension to
298. nformation for the call the user will be connected to when the handset is lifted This feature requires no special programming however you must subscribe to Caller ID service if it is available on a per line basis from your local telephone company and connect Caller ID lines to the appropriate system modules Related Features m Any users who have access to Caller ID line s will receive Caller ID information on their display phones You can restrict users from viewing Caller ID information using the following procedures For ringing calls you can block Caller ID from displaying at specific extensions by restricting access to the Galor ID Inos Use Line Access Restriction 302 to restrict access to lines to restrict access to all lines within a specific pool or both procedures for pooled extensions that have pools and lines For active calls you can activate Privacylat your extension to prevent other users from joining your calls and from accessing the Caller ID information displayed at your extension For held calls use Exclusive Hold rather than Hold to prevent other users from picking up your held call and from accessing the Caller ID information associated with the held call m There are two ways to inspect Caller ID lines Ifyou are active on a call you automatically get Caller ID information for that call However If you want to view Caller ID information for a second call without ending the active call o
299. ng a Receptionist s Extension Call Handling Options If you set up a centralized telephone answering position at extension 10 use the following settings to customize it E Immediate Call Answering lf the receptionist should answer all calls use Line Assignment 301 to assign all lines to extension 10 Additionally Line Ringing for all lines at extension 10 should be set to Immediate Ring the lines assigned at each user s extension should be set to Delayed Ring or No Ring In Hybrid mode Immediate Call Answering is the factory setting Lines are assigned as individual line buttons on the phone at extension 10 and all pool buttons assigned to users extensions are set to No Ring E Backup Call Answering f the receptionist should answer some lines only when a user does not pick up Line Ringing for those lines at extension 10 should be set to Delayed Ring the lines or pools assigned at each user s extension should be set to Immediate Ring No Answering lf some lines should not be picked up by the receptionist at all either set Line Ringing for those lines at extension 10 to No Ring or simply use to remove those lines from extension 10 In either case should be set to No Access for those lines at extension 10 to prevent the receptionist from using Direct Line Pickup to access those lines The No Answering option is not recommended in Hybrid mode 2 20 Programming Backup Answering Options If you
300. ng a feature name in this chapter consult the index Perhaps you know the feature by a different name Each feature includes the following information if applicable Description m Examples m Related Features m Programming Considerations m Using m Valid Entries YW factory setting Overview 5 1 This chapter gives step by step instructions using the following conventions m Programming instructions tell you to use the _Next Data button to change values for specific settings You can however enter a value using the dialpad if you prefer Similarly there are different ways to exit programming mode as described in se the method with which you are most comfortable m For Telephone Programming this chapter provides only the instructions for Centralized Telephone Programming To program from individual extensions users should refer to their User Instruction cards m Display prompts in the chapter are shown as they appear on PARTNER model phones If you are using an MLS model phone some of these prompts may be abbreviated All of the instructions in this chapter assume that system phones select outside lines or pools first and standard phones select intercom first as determined by each extension s setting for Automatic Line Selection See Chapter 2 for a review of the methods and buttons you can use while in programming mode 5 2 Overview AA Extensions 607 Description This System Programming procedure
301. ng for pools is No Ring and for lines is Immediate Ring If you want to prevent a user at an extension from accessing all the lines ina pool you must restrict the extension using Pool Access Restriction 315 If you want to prevent a user at an extension from accessing an individual line you must use Line Access Restriction 302 Remove pools from Hotline 603 and Doorphone 604 605 extensions to prevent calls from being made or received on them You can use Line Access Mode 313 to change an extension from a pooled extension to a key extension 5 154 Pool Extension Assignment 314 Considerations You cannot assign pool buttons to extension 10 or to any key extension The main pool buttons are always assigned to the two leftmost buttons on the bottom row of a system phone You cannot use Select Button Setting 3 for the main pool 880 during Pool Extension Assignment programming If you select Not Assigned Setting 2 for the main pool 880 during Pool Extension Assignment programming the main pool is removed from the two leftmost buttons on the bottom row of the system phone at that extension The buttons are then available for programming lines auxiliary pools or system features If the main pool is ever reassigned to that extension previous programming will be erased Auxiliary pool buttons will be located next to the main pool buttons unless you select Setting 3 to choose a button location when pro
302. not on go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 The standard phone s message waiting light is not compatible with the system What to do See Standard Telephones in Chapter 1 for a list of supported standard phones with message waiting lights Also check with your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer to find out if there are others m lf the phone is not supported you can use it without message waiting capability m lf the phone is supported go to Possible Cause 3 Possible Cause 3 The standard phone is not connected to the proper hardware What to do Make sure the phone is connected to an R3 1 or later 206 module and the control unit is equipped with an R3 1 or later processor module If the problem is not solved call the hotline In the continental U S help is available at 1 800 628 2888 Outside the continental U S call your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer Troubleshooting 6 7 Other Problems with Phones Trouble Making Outside Calls Trouble making outside calls could be one of the following m You hear a dial tone but the dial tone continues as you try to dial m You hear a dial tone which cuts off when you dial but the line does not ring m You hear a busy signal as you dial m You hear nothing at all Possible Cause 1 Forced Account Code Entry is assigned to the extension What to do Find out if Forced Account Code Entry 307 is as
303. nsion If there is no answer the calls go to your voice mailbox 5 166 Send All Calls Simultaneous Paging 1 70 Description This feature accesses the loudspeaker paging system if you have one connected to the system through the PAGE jack on the primary processor module and all of the idle system phones with speakers assigned to Calling Group 1 Related Features m You must use Calling Group Extensions 502 to identify the extensions in Calling Group 1 m Use Loudspeaker Paging to make announcements only over the loudspeaker paging system Considerations m You can program a Simultaneous Paging button on a system phone to access with one touch the loudspeaker paging system and idle system phones with speakers in Calling Group 1 m If the loudspeaker paging system or Calling Group 1 is in use a user attempting to make an announcement hears a busy tone m f someone answers a simultaneous page from a system phone in Calling Group 1 the page becomes an intercom call m f some extensions in Calling Group 1 have standard MDC 9000 or MDW 9000 phones those extensions are not included in the simultaneous page Programming Using To program a Simultaneous Paging button 1 Press Feature 0 Lo System Program System Program Central Tel Program 2 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature 3 Press a programmable button 4 Press left Intercom x 7 Lo 5
304. nsion where XX is an extension number from 10 57 Related Features For instructions on turning on the message light see Message Light On Considerations This feature turns off the message light on system phones and standard phones that have message lights See Standard Telephones in Chapter 1 for a list of standard phones with message lights For message waiting capability standard phones with message waiting lights must be connected to an R3 1 or later 206 module and the system must be equipped with an R3 1 or later primary processor module Do not use this feature for an extension that is covered by the voice messaging system The voice messaging system automatically turns off the message light at a subscriber s extension when messages in the mailbox have been deleted If a message light is inadvertently turned off at an extension that has a message in the mailbox the message light is refreshed during the voice messaging system s daily maintenance 3 a m If you use the Message Light On feature to signal someone at a doorphone extension you must use this feature to turn off the light You can program a Message Light Off button on a system phone to turn the message light off at a specific extension with one touch Programming To program a Message Light Off button 1 2 3 4 5 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program Enter the number of the extensi
305. nsions cannot access pools If your system is configured for Hybrid mode keep in mind m Aline can be assigned to only one pool m Individual extensions can be restricted access to specific pools m Individual lines can be assigned to an extension with pool buttons as long as the lines are not part of any pool At installation the system assigns all outside lines to the main pool and assigns the main pool to the two leftmost buttons on the bottom row of all system phones except extension 10 If desired you can remove some of the lines from the main pool and create auxiliary pools Then you can assign pools and or individual lines on a per extension basis FCC Registration In the continental U S your system s mode of operation must be registered with the FCC as either KF Key Function for Key or MF Multifunction for Hybrid If the system is registered as KF no outside lines can be pooled if the system is registered as MF lines can be pooled and individual lines also can be assigned directly to line buttons Overview 1 7 Telephones System Telephones This guide refers to Lucent Technologies telephones specifically designed to work with the system as system phones These include the PARTNER 34D PARTNER 18D PARTNER 18 PARTNER 6 MDC 9000 and MDW 9000 telephones You can also use MLS 34D MLS 18D MLS 12D MLS 12 MLS 6 and MLC 6 system phones although they are not discussed in this guide If you use MLS model phones wi
306. nsist of a and two digits such as Call Blocking 67 enter 0 and 1 5 72 Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 Programming To create a list of Disallowed Phone Numbers 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 4 Lo 4 2 Atthe List Number prompt identify the list to be set up 1 4 For example to select the first list press 1 Atthe Entry prompt select a list entry 01 10 At the Data prompt enter the first telephone number To save the telephone number in memory you must press _Enter oa Fw At this point m To enter other phone numbers in this list press Next item to select a different list entry and repeat Steps 4 and 5 m To change the phone number you just entered press Remove and repeat Steps 4 and 5 m To delete the phone number you just entered press _Remove m To create another list press _Next Procedure Prev Procedure and repeat from Step 2 7 Select another procedure using _Next Procedure or Prev Procedure or exit programming mode Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 5 73 Display Description PARTNER model display phones have a 2 line 24 character per line adjustable display area for calling and programming feedback Specifically the display shows Current date excluding year day and time when the phone is idle Account code as it is entered Number dialed when makin
307. nt code one that matches a list entry before being allowed to make an outside call This feature ensures that only authorized users with valid account codes can make outside calls Related Features An extension must be programmed for Forced Account Code Entry 307 for the Forced Account Code List to have any effect Account Code Entry provides instructions for entering forced account codes Considerations If you do not create a Forced Account Code List the system does not verify the account codes dialed at extensions that are required to enter them To validate an account code the system compares the first six digits of a user entered account code to the entries on the Forced Account Code List For a match to be successful the user must dial at least the account code s associated list entry even though the user can dial up to 16 digits for an account code If the system identifies a match the user can dial an outside number If no match occurs the user is denied access to an outside line and must re enter a valid account code to dial out Each list entry can include up to six digits You can use the wildcard character by pressing the _Hoid button on a system phone to match any single digit it appears as on the telephone display Valid Entries Up Examples 5 92 Forced to 6 digits including 0 9 and Hold any single digit Expanded Account Codes Users can enter more than the required dig
308. ntact the printer s manufacturer if you need help NOTE f SMDR Talk Time 611 is set to Active and SMDR Output Format 610 is set to 24 digits the combined length of the fields for a call record will be greater than the 80 characters supported by most printers If call records wrap around to the next line reduce the font size or increase the characters per inch setting for the printer If necessary change the SMDR Output Format back to 15 digits Call Accounting Devices You can send call information to a call accounting device such as Lucent Technologies Call Accounting Terminal Basic or Plus if you want to further analyze call activity The device stores rate table information and processes the information it receives into meaningful reports that can help you optimize your communications system The primary application for call accounting devices is accounting or pricing of the calls The call accounting device connects directly to the SMDR jack on the primary processor module and can print out reports that include summaries by hour line and extension Refer to the manual provided with the call accounting device for instructions on connecting it to your system Using Auxillary Equipment 4 11 Credit Card Scanners Many retail businesses and restaurants use credit card scanners to get instant approval of credit card purchases The system allows your credit card scanners to share the lines in your system a
309. ny s employees agents subcontractors or persons working on your company s behalf can result in substantial additional charges for your telecommunications services You are responsible for the security of your system There may be a risk of toll fraud associated with your telecommunications system You are responsible for programming and configuring your equipment to prevent unauthorized use Your system manager should read all documents provided with this product to fully understand the features that can introduce the risk of toll fraud and the steps that can be taken to reduce that risk Lucent Technologies does not warrant that this product is immune from or will prevent unauthorized use of common carrier telecommunication services or facilities accessed through or connected to it Lucent Technologies will not be responsible for any charges that result from such unauthorized use Trademarks PARTNER MAIL PARTNER MAIL VS PassageWay Magic on Hold MERLIN MLS 34D MLS 18D MLS 12D MLS 12 MLS 6 PARTNER and SYSTIMAX are registered trademarks of Lucent Technologies Microsoft is a registered trademark and Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation Warranty Lucent Technologies provides a limited warranty for this product Refer to Lucent Technologies Limited Warranty and Limitation of Liability in Appendix B of this book Ordering Information The order number for this book is 518 455 334 To order additional books call 1 800 4
310. o dial the digits of the designated extension or Hunt Group Related Features Do not use this feature in places where Hold Disconnect Time 203 is not recognized because if a caller hangs up after Direct Extension Dial answers the line will appear to be busy The Direct Extension Dial button returns to the status on off it was in before a power failure occurred or System Reset 728 was used Direct Extension Dial affects incoming calls only on lines identified using Direct Extension Dial Lines 205 Calls that ring on Direct Extension Dial lines are picked up after two rings as a default To change the number of rings use Direct Extension Dial Dela You must use Direct Extension Dial Record Playback to record a message to prompt callers to dial an extension number or Hunt Group number after the system answers an outside call If Direct Extension Dial is on callers hear ringing when the call is transferred regardless of the Music On Hold 602 or Ring on Transfer 119 setting By default unanswered calls return to extension 10 You can use Return Extension 306 to specify a different Transfer Return Extension for extension 10 In this case a unanswered Direct Extension Dial calls return to the specified extension as well as unanswered calls manually transferred by extension 10 If Do Not Disturb is active at a directly dialed extension the call returns to extension 10 or its transfer return extension
311. o put a call on hold press _Hold The green light next to the intercom line or pool button winks To retrieve a call that you put on hold 1 Press the intercom line or pool button next to the winking green light 2 Ifthe handset is in the cradle lift it up or press _Spkr You are reconnected to the held call The green light next to the button changes to on steady To retrieve a call that a person at another extension put on hold press the line button next to the winking red light or press intercom 6 8 and the two digit line number Standard Phone To put a call on hold press the switchhook down once rapidly You hear intercom dial tone The call is on hold Do not hang up the handset while the call is on hold If you hang up the handset the phone rings Lifting the handset reconnects you to the held call To retrieve a call that you put on hold 1 Hang up The call rings back 2 Lift the handset You are reconnected to the held call To retrieve a call that a person at another extension put on hold 1 Lift the handset 2 Atintercom dial tone dial e 8 and the two digit line number To answer a call when you are already on a call you hear a call waiting tone two beeps 1 Press the switchhook The first call is put on hold and you are connected to the new call To return to the first call press the switchhook again You can continue to press the switchhook to
312. o so since entering and a three digit code will be considered data for the telephone number Valid Entries Up to 12 digits including 0 9 4 x and Hold any single digit Allowed Phone Number Lists 407 5 9 Examples The examples below show how to enter telephone numbers for an Allowed Phone Number List in Step 4 of Programming When an Allowed List is assigned to an extension users can dial numbers on that list even if the numbers would otherwise be restricted Specific Telephone Numbers Enter the phone number exactly as you would dial it For example to allow calls to the number 201 555 1111 make the following entries Toll Call Prefix required 12015551111 Toll Call Prefix not required 2015551111 All Telephone Numbers in One Area Code The following list entries allow calls to the 800 area code Toll Call Prefix required 1800 Toll Call Prefix not required 800 Programming To create a list of Allowed Phone Numbers 1 Press Feature 0 Lo System Program System Program 4 0 Z 2 Atthe List Number prompt enter a list number 1 4 For example to select list 1 press 1 3 Atthe Entry prompt select a list entry 01 1 0 For example to select the first entry press 0 4 4 Atthe Data prompt enter the first telephone number 5 To save the telephone number in memory you must press _Enter 6 At this point m To change th
313. o the voice mailbox of the extension that activated Call Coverage Hospitality Features The following hospitality features are for special applications such as the Bed and Breakfast and Hotel Motel industries With both features the receptionist at extension 10 optionally can use the Intercom Autodialer to specify an extension m Outgoing Call Restriction Button 114 lets you program a button on the phone at extension 10 to change an extension s current Outgoing Call Restriction setting without entering System Programming mode For example after a guest s departure a hotel manager can change the No Restriction setting of the guest room phone to Inside Only so outside calls cannot be made from the phone after the guest checks out m Wake Up Service Button 115 lets you program a button on the system phone at extension 10 to be used for scheduling wake up or reminder calls for specified system extensions Using System Programming System Programming changes settings for the system as a whole or for individual lines pools or extensions You can use System Programming to set up dialing restrictions define groups or set up auxiliary equipment Refer to the filled out System Planner when you are changing system settings and be sure that any changes in programming are recorded there The Programming Overlays System Programming requires a Programming Overlay placed over the dialpad of the system display phone at extension 10
314. ocedure Considerations When a Disallowed Phone Number List is assigned to an extension the list applies to all lines to which the extension has access Valid Entries 1 Assigned to extension 2 Not Assigned to extension Programming To assign Disallowed Phone Number Lists to an extension 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 4 0 5 2 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed For example to program extension 27 press 2 z A display similar to the following appears Disallow To 27 List Number 3 Enter the list number 1 4 For example to select list 1 press _7 4 To assign or unassign the list press Next Data until the appropriate value displays 5 At this point m To assign or unassign another list for this extension press _Next Item or Prev Item until the list number shows on the display Then repeat Step 4 m To program another extension press _Next Procedure Prev Procedure and begin at Step 2 6 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 70 Disallowed List Assignments 405 Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 Description This System Programming procedure specifies telephone numbers that users cannot dial For example you may want to prevent calls to a specific telephone number or to categories of numbers such as international numbers Use this procedure to create up to four lists of up to 10 teleph
315. of dial tone that the system provides at an extension It may be necessary to change this setting to Machine outside line dial tone for an autodialing device such as a fax or modem that has trouble making calls For example if you have a modem that checks for outside line dial tone before dialing use this procedure to change from Regular to Machine dial tone Considerations Use this procedure only if an autodialing device has trouble making calls Valid Entries 1 Regular dialtone vY 2 Machine outside line dial tone Programming To change the Intercom Dial Tone setting for an extension 1 Press Feature Lo Lo L System Program _ System Program EA 3 Lo 9 2 Atthe Extension prompt enter the number of the extension to be programmed For example to select extension 22 press 2 2 3 To change the Intercom Dial Tone setting press _Next Data until the appropriate value displays 4 To program another extension press _Next item or _Prev item until the extension number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Intercom Dial Tone 309 5 111 J oining Calls Description Joining is adding yourself to a call in progress the same way you do on a home telephone by picking up an extension This is different from conferencing in which the originator pulls you into the call Up to three system extensions can join a call on an
316. of four Calling Groups For more information see Group Calling Ring Page Users can ring any of the seven Hunt Groups or voice signal Hunt Groups 1 6 For more information see Group If Station Lock is used at an extension users cannot dial outside numbers except Marked System Speed Dial Numbers and numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List 406 5 128 Making Calls m If dialing restrictions are programmed for an extension the system may prevent a user at that extension from placing certain calls For example a user may not be allowed to dial 900 numbers from the extension Or an extension may be programmed to take incoming calls only so the user cannot dial out at all The following features provide dialing restrictions and The following features can be used to override dialing restrictions Allowed Phone Number Lists 407 Emergency Phone Number List 406 Marked System Speed Dial Numbers and System Password 403 m Users with system phones can enter account codes to track incoming and a4 calls For more information see Aerount Code Emy You also can use Forced Account Code Entry 307 to identify extensions that must enter account codes prior to dialing outside phone numbers including those on the Emergency Phone Number List m Users can signal then speak to system phone users who are already active on a call to alert them of important business matters provided Interrupt On
317. off 1 Press the Night Service button at extension 10 m f a System Password is programmed the green light next to the button flashes you must continue with Step 2 m f no System Password is programmed the green light goes out and Night Service is off 2 Enter the password The green light goes out Night Service is off Night Service Button 503 5 141 Night Service Group Extensions 504 Description This System Programming procedure assigns extensions to the Night Service Group When Night Service is on and a call comes in all extensions in the Night Service Group ring immediately regardless of normal Line Ringing settings Related Features m You must use Night service Button 503 to program the button that is used to turn Night Service on and off m f you program a System Password 403 when Night Service is on users in the Night Service Group can dial only numbers on the Number List 406 and Marked System Speed Dial Numbers without entering the System Password m If you have a voice messaging system lines that are assigned to the user s phones in the Night Service Group are covered by the voice messaging system depending on the status of VMS Hunt Delay 506 and VMS Hunt Schedule 507 Considerations m Do not include extensions connected to auxiliary equipment PARTNER Attendants voice messaging systems internal or external hotline phones or doorphones in the Night Service Gro
318. ols that are not assigned to your extension dial the pool access code at intercom dial tone m You can program a Direct Line Pickup ldle Line button on a system phone to pick up a line by pressing the button then dialing the two digit line number Programming Using To program a Direct Line Pickup ldle Line button i OF ae g Ny Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button Press left intercom 8 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode System Phone 1 2 If you want lift the handset Press the programmed button and dial the two digit line number 01 24 of the idle line you want to access or dial intercom 8 and the two digit line number If you did not lift the handset the speaker comes on automatically Standard Phone 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone Dial 8 and the two digit line number 01 24 of the idle line you want to access Direct Line Pickup ldle Line I8LL 5 69 Disallowed List Assignments 405 Description This System Programming procedure lets you assign up to four Disallowed Phone Number Lists to specified extensions Related Features You must use Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 to create the lists of disallowed telephone numbers before you use this pr
319. omizing Extensions In addition to line or pool assignments the following procedures can be used to customize an extension m Line Coverage Extension 208 to identify an extension as the owner of a specific outside line A user at the extension can activate Call Coverage or VUS Cover the specified line Use g to specify the number of times a call should ring at the owner s extension before it is sent to the covering extension or VMS Cover Rings 117 to specify the number of times a call should ring at the owner s extension before it is sent to the owner s voice mailbox Display Language 303 to specify the language English French or Spanish for messages that appear on a system display phone m Automatic Extension Privacy 304 to prevent other extensions with the same line from joining a call at the extension This feature is also useful for extensions connected to a modem fax or any device whose function can be disrupted by someone trying to join it m Forced Account Code Entry 307 to prevent the extension from making an outside call until a required account code is entered You can also use Forced Account Code List 409 to create a list of valid account codes this ensures that only authorized users with valid account codes can make outside calls Call Waiting 316 to identify standard phone extensions that can receive system not local telephone company call waiting tone for a second
320. on FCC Interference Information This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of FCC rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manuals may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will have to correct the interference at his or her own expense NOTE References to FCC regulations are not applicable outside of the U S FCC Notification and Repair Information This equipment is registered with the FCC in accordance with Part 68 of its rules In compliance with those rules you are advised of the following m Means of Connection Connection to the telephone network shall be through a standard network interface jack USOC RJ11C These USOCs must be ordered from your local telephone company FCC compliant line cords are provided with Line and Line Extension Modules for connecting to the telephone company provided USOC RJ11C jacks Use only FCC compliant line cords and jacks for these connections This equipment may not be used with party lines or coin telephone lines FCC and IC Information C 1 No
321. on most systems followed by one or more pauses in the stored number 2 8 Programming System Programming Options This section discusses programming options that involve multiple procedures such as dialing restrictions and auxiliary equipment settings as well as features that can be used throughout your system such as Speed Dialing You can use a combination of programming procedures to set up your system to operate most efficiently taking into account your company s telephone service personnel and equipment as well as the special needs of particular departments This section lists the procedures you can use for details on using a particular procedure refer to the procedure name in Chapter 5 Speed Dialing You can program up to 100 frequently dialed phone numbers such as numbers for suppliers repair services or customers so that all users in the system can dial them by pressing four buttons Feature or on a standard phone plus a three digit code These are called System Speed Dial Numbers Dialing Restrictions and Permissions The system has several procedures for restricting telephone use and several for overriding those restrictions You can use any combination of these procedures to design a system that meets your needs When a user makes a call the system checks the number dialed against all of the dialing restrictions that apply to the extension making the call When the number dialed passes a res
322. on a call and multiple coverage calls are ringing they can press line pool and intercom buttons to view the number of the extension from which each coverage call is being sent however if they pick up the handset they will join or answer the call indicated on the display Caller ID information is displayed if you Join a call however you cannot join a call at any extension that has Privacy activated Caller ID information is displayed if users pick up calls with Pickup Active Line Call Pickup or Group Pickup but the restrictions stated previously apply For incoming calls Caller ID information displays only when a call is audibly alerting at an extension This means that evrensions with Do Not Disturb activated or extensions that have lines with Line Ringing set to No Ring do not receive Caller ID information However Caller ID information is displayed once the call is answered or if the line is preselected Considerations Subscriptions to Caller ID service are on a per line basis The lines associated with Caller ID must be connected to a line jack ona 206EC or 400EC module For more information refer to the PARTNER Communications System Installation guide Caller ID information is passed to an extension between the first and second ring To receive Caller ID information wait until the second ring before answering the call Not all calls on Caller ID lines are displayed This varies by local phone company When Call
323. on hold still do not disconnect or if the Hold Disconnect Time was already Short go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 Local phone company does not send hold release signal What to do Call your local phone company and find out whether they send a hold release signal If the local phone company does not send a hold release signal or if they do but the problem still occurs call the hotline All Phones Dead No Dial Tone or Lights Possible Cause 1 Control unit is not receiving power What to do Make sure the control unit s power cord is plugged securely into the wall outlet Also make sure the main circuit breaker or the on off switch see Figure 1 1 in Chapter 1 is in the ON position m If the green LEDs on the modules are lit and the trouble is gone the problem is corrected m If the green LEDs on the modules are lit but the trouble remains call the hotline m Ifthe green LEDs on the modules are out go to Possible Cause 2 m If any green LEDs on the modules are flashing call the hotline Possible Cause 2 The power outlet is faulty What to do Test the outlet by plugging in an appliance like a lamp or radio m If the appliance does not work the outlet is faulty If possible plug the control unit into a different outlet Then check the fuse box or call an electrician m If the appliance works go to Possible Cause 3 Possible Cause 3 Control unit fuse is blown What to do Using the on off switch tu
324. on the PARTNER 34D phone in Figure 24lik in the bottom row The equivalent button on the PARTNER 18D phone is in the leftmost position of the second row from the bottom If your system has a mix of PARTNER and MLS model phones refer to Appendix E for information about programming from a PARTNER model phone to an MLS model phone or from an MLS model phone to a PARTNER model phone Programming PARTNER 34D Phone CR g oa o a aL a o aC a BCL al B_ oLEJ al__ Message Intercom intercom enii oo PARTNER 18D 18 Phone oM LNI all aC aCEJ sE poCAJ sB Oo Q o ao Intercom Intercom PARTNER 6 Phone BLE alLA_ o oL Intercom Ext Figure 2 4 Button Locations Programming 2 17 Programming Mode 2 18 1 6 Place the Programming Overlay over the dialpad of the system display phone at extension 10 or 11 see The Programming Overlays earlier in this chapter for more information To enter programming mode press _Feature 0 o A display similar to the following appears PROGRAM EXTENSION 10 If you are programming from extension 11 11 displays instead of 10 Press _System Program A display similar to the following appears 10 Enter Extension Name This display is for the Extension Name Display feature When you are entering System Programming mode skip it by moving on to Step 4 Press _
325. on to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button Press Feature 1 Lo Optionally dial the two digit extension number of your most common destination or skip to Step 6 if you want only the feature code on the button Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode 5 134 Message Light Off F10XX Using System Phone To turn off the message light 1 Press the programmed button or press Feature 1 0 If you programmed the destination extension number on the button the message light for the destination extension goes off Skip Step 2 2 If no extension number was programmed on the button dial the extension number of the phone whose message light you want to turn off or use an Auto Dial button or Manual Signaling button Standard Phone To turn off the message light 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Press 4 Lo 3 Dial the extension number of the phone whose message light you want to turn off Message Light Off F10XX 5 135 Message Light On FO9XX Description This feature turns on the message light at a specified extension where XX is an extension number from 10 57 Related Features For instructions on turning off the message light see Message Light Off You may be able to use this feature to signal someone at a doorphone extension See Doorphone Extension 604 and 605 Considerations This feature turns on th
326. one Press the programmed button or press Feature 0 6 The last added outside party is dropped from the conference Standard Phone Press the switchhook down once rapidly The last added party inside or outside is dropped from the conference 5 56 Conference Drop F06 Copy Settings 399 Description This System Programming procedure copies all of the following settings from one extension to another 301 Line Assignment 302 Line Access Restriction 303 Display Language 304 Automatic Extension Privacy 305 Abbreviated Ringing 307 Forced Account Code Entry 308 Distinctive Ring 309 Intercom Dial Tone 310 Automatic VMS Cover 311 External Hotline 312 Voice Interrupt On Busy 313 Line Access Mode 314 Pool Extension Assignment Considerations 315 Pool Access Restriction 316 Call Waiting 401 Outgoing Call Restriction 405 Disallowed List Assignments 408 Allowed List Assignments 501 Pickup Group Extensions 502 Calling Group Extensions 504 Night Service Group 505 Hunt Group Extensions 601 Fax Machine Extensions 607 AA Extensions Automatic Line Selection Line Ringing m This procedure is skipped in the sequence of programming procedures when cycling To use this procedure enter the code 399 directly m For each type of phone program one extension then use this procedure to copy the programming from that extension to the others with the same number of line or pool buttons for
327. one numbers each Related Features m After completing this procedure you must use Disallowed List Assignment 405 to assign the Disallowed Phone Number Lists to specific extensions Allowed Phone Numbers Emergency Phone Numbers and Marked System Speed Dial Numbers override the Disallowed List m The entries you must make to permit or restrict toll calls differ depending on the setting for Toll Call Prefix 402 This setting tells the system whether a 0 for operator assisted calls or 1 for direct dial calls is required when you make toll calls Considerations m Each list entry can include up to 12 digits You can use the wildcard character by pressing the Hod button on a system phone to match any single digit it appears as on the telephone display m When a user dials a number that is on a Disallowed List for the user s extension the user hears a reorder tone fast busy signal after dialing the part of the number that is stored in the list for example an area code m f you want to go to another programming procedure when entering phone numbers in a list you must use _Next Procedure or _Prev Procedure to do so since entering and a 3 digit code will be considered data for the number Valid Entries Up to 12 digits including 0 9 and Hoa any single digit Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 5 71 Examples The examples below show how to enter
328. ones or fax machines as well as devices that require the interface provided by the control unit such as a loudspeaker paging system Backplane The bottom and rear portion of the plastic housing that makes up a carrier The backplane distributes power to the system modules installed in the carrier See alsdCamer Background Music A feature that provides background music through the speaker of an idle system phone for a user s work area Background Music plays the pre recorded material from the Music On Hold audio source EE SeSe C Call Answer Service A voice messaging system feature that lets callers leave a message at an unanswered extension or transfer themselves to another extension Call Assistant See ntercom Autodialer Call Coverage A feature that lets users send their intercom and transferred calls and calls on their owned lines to a covering extension when they are unable to answer calls Call Park A feature that lets a user put a call on a special type of hold so it can be picked up from any extension in the system Call record A line of information on a call report that includes data fields such as call type date time called caller number and call duration See also Account code and Call report Call report A page of information that begins with a header and lists incoming and outgoing calls to and from your business on a call by call basis See also Call record and Call reporting
329. onference Denial 109 to disallow conference calls with multiple outside parties During the conference call any inside party can exit the call at any time simply by hanging up However if an outside party hangs up during a conference call the callers that remain in the conference may hear a dial tone Use to remove the last added outside party from a conference call m Caller IDjinformation does not display for extensions that are active on a conference call Considerations Users can use System Speed Dial Personal Speed Dial or Auto Dial numbers to add parties to the conference Do not add a busy or ringing outside call to a conference if you do all callers hear the busy or ringing signal If you hear a busy signal or the party does not answer reconnect with the held party by pressing the line button Users cannot join a conference call the originator must add each party to the conference If the conference originator puts the call on hold other parties can continue to talk Other inside parties can put their extensions on hold if there are outside parties on the conference call When the originator hangs up the conference is disconnected Conference calls cannot be transferred If you are using the system behind a PBX or Centrex system the PBX or Centrex system may include a conference calling feature that lets you connect multiple callers on a single PBX or Centrex line The number of callers you can connec
330. or hunt group m Call Forwarding Call Follow Me Useful when a receptionist leaves the desk for any period of time Calls can be forwarded to a backup answering extension Alternatively you can install a voice messaging system to provide an automated backup answering position Useful when the receptionist is busy on calls away from the desk or at night the voice messaging system answers incoming calls after a specified number of rings plays a customized greeting requests callers to enter an extension number and transfers the caller to the appropriate extension If no one answers at the destination extension the caller can leave a personal message in that extension s mailbox Button Programming The PARTNER 34D phone shown in on the next page illustrates the following programmed buttons in addition to some other system features Extension Numbers Auto Dial buttons are programmed for extensions 11 through 24 The receptionist can use these buttons to dial or transfer calls to the extensions with one touch In addition the lights of these Auto Dial buttons show the status of the extension so the receptionist can tell whether the phone at the extension is idle no lights on busy red on calling the receptionist green flash sending coverage calls to or manually signaling the receptionist green flutter or ringing back after the receptionist transferred a call green flutter Programming 2 21 Manual Signaling A
331. or this extension or exit programming mode 5 136 Message Light On FO9XX Using System Phone To turn on the message light 1 Press the programmed button or press Feature o 2 If you programmed the destination extension number on the button the message light for the destination extension goes on Skip Step 2 2 If no extension number was programmed on the button dial the extension number of the phone whose message light you want to turn on or use an Auto Dial button or Manual Signaling button Standard Phone To turn on the message light 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Press 0 9 3 Dial the extension number of the phone whose message light you want to turn on Message Light On FO9XX 5 137 Music On Hold 602 Description This System Programming procedure activates or deactivates the MUSIC ON HOLD jack on the primary processor module The jack must be active and an audio source must be connected to the jack in order to provide recorded music or messages to callers on hold Related Features If Ring on Transfer 119 jis Not Active and Music On Hold is Active transferred callers hear music on hold until the call is answered If Music On Hold is Active users with system phones with speakers can play Background Music through their phones speakers If Automatic System Answer is on callers hear music on hold while waiting for someone to answer the call If Direct
332. ord a Direct Extension Dial message 1 Turn off Direct Extension Dial and Automatic System Answer and wait for any calls in the process of being answered by these features to be completed Lift the handset of the system display phone at extension 10 or 11 Press the intercom button Dial 8 L2 L2 The current time of day remains on the second line of the display for the duration of this procedure The top line of the display reads DXD 1 Record Direct Extension Dial Record Playback 1892 5 65 If a message was previously recorded a display similar to the following appears DXD l1 Record 2 Play Press 1 A display similar to the following appears for three seconds Record at the tone After three seconds you hear a tone and you can begin recording your message While you are recording the following display appears Press to stop Press when you are done recording If the allotted time 20 seconds for the message is completed before you press you hear a tone to let you know that the system has stopped recording When you finish recording a display similar to the following appears DXD 1 Record 2 Play At this point m To re record the message follow the instructions from Step 5 above m To play back the message follow the instructions from Step 5 below m To exit the procedure hang up the handset To play back a Direct Extension Dial message 1 Turn off Direct Extension Dial and
333. ormed at a standard phone m You cannot enter programming mode m Unless Call Waiting 316 is assigned to specific standard phone extensions there is no indication of a second call and an inside caller will hear a busy tone if a standard phone is in use If Call Waiting is assigned the user hears a call waiting tone two beeps when a second call comes in to the extension The call waiting tone is not repeated The user can use the switchhook to put the first call on hold and speak to the party on the second call and to switch back and forth between the two parties Learning About Telephones m Because there are no line buttons on standard phones users must use Direct Line Pickup idle Line to select a specific idle line Otherwise the system selects an idle line automatically when the user dials a 9 at intercom dial tone For information on see Chapter 5 Similarly because there are no pool buttons on standard phones users must dial pool access codes at intercom dial tone to request access to an idle pooled line see Making Calls for instructions on using pool access codes Otherwise the system selects an idle line from a pool automatically when the user dials a 9 at intercom dial tone m Users can make a voice signaled call from a standard phone but if users try to make a voice signaled call to a standard phone it will ring because the standard phone does not have a system speaker m Users cannot use the Syst
334. other button for this extension or exit programming mode Press the programmed button to turn Caller ID Name Display on press it again to turn it off Use the button like a switch when the light is on Caller ID Name Display is on Caller ID Name Display F16 Calling Group Extensions 502 Description This System Programming procedure identifies the extensions in a Calling Group a group of extensions that can be called at the same time Any user in the system can ring or page all extensions in a Calling Group at the same time or transfer a call to a Calling Group the first extension to pick up the call is connected to the caller This feature is useful for conversing with any individual in a specific group such as a sales pool or for paging all individuals in the group The system can have up to four Calling Groups Related Features m For instructions on making a ringing call or paging call to a Calling Group see Group Calling Ring Page m Users can make simultaneous announcements over the loudspeaker paging system and the system phones assigned to Calling Group 1 See Simultaneous Paging Considerations m Extensions can be in more than one Calling Group In addition you can assign all extensions in the system to one group this is especially useful for making paging announcements to all employees Do not assign extensions that connect auxiliary equipment PARTNER Attendants voice messaging systems fax machines
335. other system extensions using an Intercom button and the two digit number assigned to the extension Users can either ring or voice signal an idle system phone or use Voice Interrupt On Busy to signal another user who is active on a call m Grouping of extensions for flexibility in directing and answering calls m Automatic system answering features to help answer and route calls m Call coverage for users who are unable to answer their calls but want their calls answered by another individual m Integrated voice messaging support with the PARTNER MAIL system or the PARTNER MAIL VS system so callers can reach a desired extension or group without operator assistance and leave messages at unanswered or busy extensions m Caller ID support on system display phones if Caller ID service is available from your local telephone company and you subscribe to it Overview 1 1 Power failure operation with standard phones allowing you to make and receive calls during a power failure while retaining programmed equipment settings for up to four days An optional Uninterruptible Power Supply or UPS is also available to allow full equipment operation during a power failure Centrex or PBX operation support including one touch dialing of feature access codes on system phones Flexible dialing restrictions and permissions so you can control telephone activity and phone bills Special hospitality features that let Bed and Breakfast proprietor
336. ou know works m lf the Intercom Autodialer works the cord is faulty Call the hotline to arrange for a replacement If the Intercom Autodialer does not work call the hotline In the continental U S help is available at 1 800 628 2888 Outside the continental U S call your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer Troubleshooting 6 5 Problems with Standard Phones Standard Phone Does Not Ring Possible Cause 1 Ringer is turned off What to do Turn on the ringer m Ifthe phone rings the problem is solved m lf the phone still does not ring go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 Call Forwarding is turned on What to do Check to see if Call Forwarding is turned on m f Call Forwarding is turned on turn it off m f Call Forwarding is not turned on go to Possible Cause 3 Possible Cause 3 Line Ringing is programmed for No Ring or Delayed Ring What to do Check the Line Ringing setting for the extension m If Line Ringing is set for No Ring or Delayed Ring change the setting if appropriate m f Line Ringing is set for Immediate Ring and this phone is part of a combination extension see Problems with Combination Extensions Phone Does Not Work Properly m If Line Ringing is set for Immediate Ring and the phone is on an extension by itself go to Possible Cause 4 Possible Cause 4 Phone is faulty What to do Unplug the problem phone Plug in a standard phone that you know rin
337. ou want calls to be answered by the receptionist first set the lines at the receptionists extension to Immediate Ring and the lines at the users extensions to No Ring This is the factory setting for Hybrid mode Receptionist Backup f you want all calls on a line or in a pool to ring directly at users extensions with the receptionist providing backup set the line or pool at the users extensions to Immediate Ring Then set the line at the receptionist s extension to Delayed Ring An incoming call that is not answered by a user within 20 seconds will also ring at the receptionist s extension Programming To change the way outside lines or pools ring at an extension 1 2 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program Enter the number of the extension to be programmed for Line Ringing The green lights next to the line or pool buttons show the current Line Ringing settings for all lines or pools assigned to the extension If a line or pool is not assigned to a button the green light next to the button is off The following ringing options can be shown by the green light next to the line or pool button a Immediate Ring on steady a Delayed Ring tlashes slowly a No Ring flutters quickly To change Line Ringing for any line or pool press the line or pool button until the button light shows the correct setting the setting for the currently selected line or pool also
338. password before the account number To program a Personal Speed Dial number or an Auto Dial button to call the bank at 555 7898 include a stop for manually entering the password and continue with the account number 679 88 enter 5 5 5 z Le Lo La mionra Le Lz 9 Le Le m Touch Tone Enable Your system is connected to rotary lines but you want to call an answering machine at 555 3454 to retrieve messages Since the machine requires touch tones enter 5 5 5 La 4 La 4 transrr All digits pressed during the rest of the call are sent as touch tones m On off Centrex Feature Button To include both the activation and deactivation codes for a Centrex feature on the same button press _Mic HFAI to include a stop between the two codes For instance if the code to activate a Centrex feature is 30 and the code to deactivate the feature is 31 store x 2 Lo Mic HEA x 3 1 on the Auto Dial button The first time you press the Auto Dial button only the number before the stop is dialed to activate the feature When you press the button again the rest of the stored number is dialed to deactivate the feature Number Outside a PBX or Centrex System To store a number that dials out of a PBX or Centrex system include a dial out code in the Speed Dial number This entry to dial the number 201 555 4321 includes a dial out code a 1 5 second pause and a toll call prefix of 1 for direct dial
339. pecific pool you must restrict the extension using Restriction 315 m You can use Line Access Mode 313 to change a pooled extension to a key extension Considerations m You can assign some or all outside lines to a specific pool but you cannot assign a specific outside line to more than one pool m Because users cannot control which line they get when they access a pool you should group lines with similar purposes WATS lines FX lines lines designated for a particular set of users together in a unique pool m lf you have individual lines assigned to a pooled extension and you use this procedure to change pool line assignment be careful not to press _Next Data or Prev Data to specify a pool assignment If you do the system will remove that line from all extensions that have the line assigned Valid Entries 1 No Pool 2 Main Pool 880 w all lines assigned 3 Pool 881 4 Pool 882 5 Pool 883 Pool Line Assignment 207 5 157 Programming To change the assignment of lines to pools 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 2 Lo z 2 Enter the first line to be programmed For example to program line 8 press Lo 8 A display similar to the following appears Lines to Pools L08 2 Pool 880 Enter the desired value 1 5 see Valid Entries on the previous page To program another line press Next Item or _Prev Item until the line number shows on
340. phone you are extension being manually signaled by the extension or you are receiving a coverage call from the extension Red Broken Flutter short on off long off Fax Management only the fax extension is not answering calls may be out of paper Ringing Patterns System phones have these ringing patterns m An outside call will ring ring ring m An intercom call will ring BEEP ring BEEP ring BEEP If you have a system display phone the caller s extension number and name if programmed will show on the display m A transferred call or an unanswered transferred or parked call that is ringing back at your extension will ring BEEP BEEP ring BEEP BEEP fing BEEP BEEP NOTE If you use the system with PBX or Centrex lines the PBX Centrex distinctive ringing patterns are not passed to phones Phones use the ringing patterns described here instead Learning About Telephones 3 5 Dial Tones You will encounter two different dial tones when calling with a system phone Outside dial tone is generated by your local phone company to indicate that you are connected with an outside line m Intercom dial tone is generated by the system to indicate that you are connected with an inside line You hear this dial tone when you are making an inside or intercom call To hear the difference between the two types of dial tones on a system phone press a
341. play Y Speaker Y Vv Vv Microphone Y Y Y _ of 24 lines up to 24 buttons on the PARTNER 34D can be used for outside lines 1 8 Overview The main pool uses two pool buttons The PARTNER 34D has 32 programmable buttons with status lights Since the system supports a maximum Intercom Autodialers PARTNER model system phones support the PARTNER CA48 Call Assistant Intercom Autodialer at extensions 10 and 11 The autodialer provides Auto Dial buttons for all of the extensions in your system up to 48 The status lights next to each button indicate calling activity at that extension Users can program the Auto Dial buttons for either intercom ringing voice signaling or manual signaling Note that each user can have only one Auto Dial button either on the system phone or on the autodialer for another extension in the system The Auto Dial buttons allow the user to dial signal or transfer calls to system extensions with one touch For more information about Auto Dial buttons see Auto Dialing Jin Chapter 5 Standard Telephones You can also use industry standard single line rotary or touch tone telephones including feature phones with built in feature buttons and lights with the system This guide refers to such telephones as standard phones Lucent Technologies certified standard phones are recommended The following Lucent Technologies phones can make use of the system
342. press _Next Item or _Prev item until the extension number shows on the display Repeat Step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode To program the external hotline phone number as Personal Speed Dial code 80 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program Dial the extension number of the external hotline Press Feature Le Lo Enter the external hotline phone number exactly as you would dial it Se a Continue programming or exit programming mode Using 1 Lift the handset of the external hotline After approximately three seconds the programmed phone number is dialed automatically 2 If you do not hear dial tone or dialing noises hang up for about 20 seconds and try again 3 When the call is answered speak into the handset 5 88 External Hotline 311 Fax Machine Extensions 601 Description This System Programming procedure identifies extensions to which fax machines are connected Related Features m f you want to monitor fax machine status and make one touch transfers to the fax machine see Auto Dialing to program a Fax Management button and Fax Management Feature in Chapter 4 to use the button m To prevent other extensions from interrupting a fax call program the fax extension for Automatic Extension Privacy 304 Considerations m Remove voice messaging system mailboxes from fax machine extensions m f an
343. primary processor module Considerations If you use the Background Music feature to broadcast certain copyrighted music or material including songs or other material from radio broadcasts you may be required to obtain the permission of the copyright owner One way to obtain permission is to contact ASCAP BMI and or similar performing rights organizations to obtain a license Lucent Technologies disclaims any liability arising out of the failure to obtain such a license if required For alternative usually pre licensed sources of music to use with this feature you may wish to contact Telephonetics International Inc at 1 800 446 5366 Or you can purchase a Magic on Hold system from Lucent Technologies which does not require you to obtain a license Background Music stops when a user makes or answers a call but resumes when the phone becomes idle again If a system phone and a standard phone with a message waiting light are connected in a combination extension the standard phone s message waiting light will not light if Background Music is on at the system phone You can program a Background Music button on a system phone to use the feature with one touch A button with lights is recommended Programming To program a Background Music button 1 ao R oO DW Press Feature _0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature P
344. ptionist it can be transferred to the next available extension This alleviates the problem of one employee receiving most of the calls Place the extensions of employees who work in a department in a Hunt Group and assign one or more outside lines to the group Doing so lets outside callers ring the group directly without having to be transferred by the receptionist For example a mail order company assigns the extensions of its sales representatives to a Hunt Group and assigns a line to the group The company then publishes the number as its customer service number so that a caller can reach a sales representative directly to place an order Programming To program a Hunt Group button 1 2 3 4 Using Press Feature Lo Lo _System Program _System Program Central Tel Program Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button To program the button to ring the next available extension in the Hunt Group press left intercom z z To program the button to voice signal the next available extension in the Hunt Group press left intercom x z Lz Dial a Hunt Group number 1 7 for ringing calls 1 6 for voice signaled calls Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode System Phone To use when programmed on a button To ring or voice signal an extension in the Hunt Group simply lift the handset or press _Spkr and press t
345. r from authorized dealers Sources in the United States are m Lucent Technologies Catalog Sales This source is Lucent Technologies national phone mail sales center in Cincinnati A Catalog Associate will place your order including Lucent Technologies installation if you need it You can charge your order on a VISA Mastercard or American Express card The Catalog Associate can also give you sales advice and mail you the Lucent Technologies SOURCEBOOK CATALOG of systems telephones and accessories Call 1 800 451 2100 m Lucent Technologies Sales Offices Sales offices to serve the small business customer are located throughout the country To contact the office closest to you call 1 800 247 7000 A representative will place your order including Lucent Technologies installation if you need it Lucent Technologies Authorized Dealers You can also buy most items from one of Lucent Technologies authorized dealers Check your local telephone directory s yellow pages for the Lucent Technologies Authorized Dealer nearest you m Lucent Technologies National Parts Sales Center This national sales center located in Denver stocks replacement parts for the control unit and telephones Telephone orders can be placed by calling 1 800 222 7278 In Canada order these items from Lucent Technologies Canada Eastern Canada and Ottawa 1 514 335 7200 Ontario 1 416 756 5236 Central and Western Canada 1 800 561 5165 Maintenance B 5
346. r is 4 1 unplug the modular telephone cord from the phone then plug it in again If the display is still incorrect see System Phone Does Not Work Display is Incorrect Possible Cause Date day and time are not set properly C to do Re enter the date Seen a and time using System Date 101 102 and System Time 103 m lf the display is correct the problem is solved m lf the display is still not correct see System Phone Does Not Work Display Does Not Show Caller ID Name Number Possible Cause 1 Not receiving Caller ID service from local phone company What to do Contact your local phone company to check on Caller ID service m f you are not receiving Caller ID service subscribe to it m lf you are receiving Caller ID service go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 Wrong 206 and or 400 module installed in the control unit What to do Make sure lines with Caller ID service are connected to 206EC or 400EC modules m f Caller ID lines are not connected to 206EC or 400EC modules install the appropriate modules and or make the appropriate connections m f Caller ID lines are connected to 206EC or 400EC modules go to Possible Cause 3 Possible Cause 3 Someone activated Call Coverage What to do Check the system phone display m f Coverage Call for XX where XX is the extension that activated Call Coverage displays the call is a coverage call Call Coverage displays the extension
347. r messages to callers while they are on hold by connecting the audio source to the primary processor module The system supports the Lucent Technologies Magic on Hold system and most models from other manufacturers If you use equipment that rebroadcasts music or other copyrighted materials you may be required to obtain a license from a third party such as ASCAP or BMI m Remote Administration Units RAUs allow you to perform System and Centralized Telephone Programming from a remote location m Extra alerts help make users aware of incoming calls For example you can use an audible alert chime horn or bell to replace a phone ring ina noisy area such as a factory Similarly you can use a visual alert strobe or light to replace a phone ring in a quiet area such as a library Lucent Technologies offers several compatible alerts m Speakerphones provide hands free two way operation of a phone without lifting the handset Combining a speakerphone with a system phone or a standard phone in a conference room or office is an inexpensive way for several people at a meeting to conference in other parties System phone speakers are designed for individual use not group use The system supports the Lucent Technologies S203 speakerphone and any industry standard speakerphone 4 2 Using Auxiliary Equipment m Headsets allow users to hold hands free conversations A headset is a combination earphone and microphone worn on the head useful
348. r putting it on hold use Caller ID e Ifyou are not active on a call you can press line buttons to view Caller ID information for those lines however keep in mind that if you pick up the handset you will join or answer the call shown on the display m n some regions users will have the option to subscribe to the name service for Caller ID This service allows the user to have a name and or number associated with Caller ID information If you want access to the name you can program Caller ID Name Display onto a button with lights This allows users to toggle between the Name and Number for an incoming call m Caller ID information does not display for extensions active on m f users receive a call routed to their extension by Direct Extension Dial ja voice messaging system or PARTNER Attendant the Caller ID information is passed to their extensions when they answer the call 5 48 Caller ID if users Transfer a call the Caller ID information is passed to the destination extension If users send calls for Call Coverage the Caller ID information is not passed to the covering extension Coverage Call for XX appears instead so the user at the covering extension can identify the person for whom the call was originally intended A user at a covering extension who has a system display phone and who is busy on a call can use to view the number of the extension from which a call is being sent If users are not active
349. r the number of the extension to be programmed For example to program extension 23 press 2 3 Atthe Line prompt enter the line number to be restricted at this extension For example to restrict line 2 press o 2 The current restriction displays To change the line restriction for this extension press _Next Data until the appropriate value displays see Valid Entries on the previous page At this point m To restrict another line at this extension press _Next Item or _Prev item until the line number shows on the display Then repeat Step 4 m To restrict another extension press _Next Procedure _Prev Procedure and begin at Step 2 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Line Access Restriction 302 5 117 Line Assignment 301 Description This procedure applies to key extensions or to individual lines on pooled extensions This System Programming procedure assigns the outside lines that are available at an extension The default order of line assignment to the buttons on a system phone is from left to right starting in the bottom left corner see Figure 5 1 on the next page To put the lines in a different order first use this procedure to remove all assigned lines then assign lines in the desired order Related Features 5 118 m Number of Lines 104 should be used only during initial system setup to assign a subset of lines to all extensions You can
350. ram Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button with lights Press Feature 1 5 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode a system phone press the programmed button to turn VMS Cover on press it again to turn it off Use the button like a switch when the light is on VMS Cover is on and your unanswered intercom and transferred calls or outside calls on lines assigned ownership go to your voice mailbox after the specified number of VMS Cover Rings If you turn on VMS Cover while a call is ringing the call is sent immediately to your voice mailbox If VMS Cover is already on and a call begins to ring you can turn on Do Not Disturb to send that call and any subsequent calls immediately to your voice mailbox 5 196 VMS Cover F15 VMS Cover Rings 117 Description This feature applies only if you have a voice messaging system This System Programming procedure which applies to all system extensions programmed for VMS Cover defines the number of times a call rings before it is sent to a user s voice mailbox Related Features m VMS Cover also applies to lines that have been designated an owner with Line Coverage Extension 208 m If an extension has VMS Cover or Automatic VMS Cover 310 active unanswered calls to that extension are routed to the voice messaging system after the specified number of VMS Cov
351. ram another extension extension v DIAL 399 DIAL a source extension number Factory setting Button with lights required HE Il 4 ll TO START SYSTEM PROGRAMMING PRESS Feature o o PRESS _ System Program PRESS _system Program DIAL 401 DIAL an extension number 1 DIAL 1 No Restriction local Only extension v TOLL CALL PREFIX DIAL 402 DIAL 1 0 1 plus Area Code and Number 2 Area Code and Number Only z SYSTEM PASSWORD DIAL 403 OUTGOING CALL RESTRICTION p 5 144 2 Inside intercom Only 3 Local intercom and PRESS _Next item to program another o 5 180 DIAL four digits to set the password System Programming Quick Reference TO END SYSTEM PROGRAMMING PRESS Feature o Lo TO USE A SPECIFIC PROCEDURE DIAL and three digit procedure code Example 1 Lo 2 for System Date Place the Programming Overlay on the dialpad of the system display phone at extension 10 or 11 TO CYCLE THROUGH SYSTEM PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES PRESS next Procedure Or _Prev Procedure NOTE Procedures 399 609 and 728 shown below in dashed boxes are skipped when cycling PRESS Dialing Restrictions and Permissions DIAL 404 DIAL a list number 1 4 DIAL a list entry 01 10 To add entry 0 57 12 digits PRESS Enter list entry To program another list PRESS Next Procedure _Prev Pro
352. rchase a Magic on Hold system from Lucent Technologies which does not require you to obtain such a license Lucent Technologies disclaims any liability arising out of the failure to obtain such a license if required 1 2 Overview CONTROL UNIT Primary Carrier M 206 Modules VA Primary l Processor Module Grounding Screw Outside Line Jacks Power Indicators LEDs Extension Jacks 206 modules only MUSIC ON HOLD 7 Volume Adjustment Screw MUSIC ON HOLD Jack for RCA phono plug Expansion Carrier ain Circuit Breaker or On Off Switch 400 Modules 7 Expansion Processor Main Circuit Breaker or On Off Switch Module Grounding Screw Outside Line Jacks PAGE Jack SMDR Jack Expansion Cable PARTNER 34D Phone with optional PARTNER CA48 Intercom Autodialer Optional Devices for the control unit AA PARTNER MAIL VS voice messaging system Serial Printer E od Paging System Power Indicators LEDs Optional Devices for extension jacks PARTNER MAIL Standard Touch Tone voice messaging Phone system Call Accounting Answering Terminal Basic or Plus Machine 16 Remote See al A Administration Doorphone ert MDW 9000 Phone NPP SNOEN Magic on Hold deck Unit Figure 1 1 Sample System Components Overview 1 3 Control Unit The
353. rded music or messages while on hold Also Background Music lets users with system phones other than the MDC 9000 or MDW 9000 play the recorded material through their phone s speaker when the phone is not in use m Hotline 603 identifies internal hotline extensions so when a person lifts the handset of the hotline phone a predetermined extension number automatically rings External Hotline 311 identifies external hotline extensions so when a person lifts the handset of the hotline phone a predetermined outside phone number is automatically dialed Doorphone Extension 604 and 605 identifies extensions to which doorphones are connected Doorphone Alert Extensions 606 identifies extensions that signal when the doorphone button is pressed Programming identifies extensions to which PARTNER Attendants are connected This lets the system notify users with display phones when they are receiving a call that has been transferred from the PARTNER Attendant Also Transfer Return Extension 306 lets you identify the extension to which a call transferred by the PARTNER Attendant should be routed if the destination extension does not answer The call reporting device uses the following procedures SMDR Record Type 608 specifies the type of calls that you want to record for call reporting either all calls or outgoing calls only SMDR Top of Page 609 notifies the system that the printer has been align
354. red line For example to specify line 1 press o0 4 3 To assign or unassign the line press _Next Data until the appropriate value displays 4 To identify another line press _Next item or _Prev Item until the line number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for all the lines that you want to identify 6 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 26 Automatic System Answer Lines 204 Automatic System Answer Mode 121 Description This System Programming procedure determines how the system handles Automatic System Answer calls after the greeting plays There are three available modes m Hold places the call on hold at extension 10 the light next to the line button winks green at extension 10 and winks red at all other extensions that have the line the outside caller hears music on hold if it is available m Ring continues to ring and the green light next to the line button continues to flash at all extensions that have access to the line the outside caller hears music on hold if it is available m Disconnect ends the call immediately after the Automatic System Answer greeting plays Related Features m Automatic System Answer affects incoming calls only on lines identified using Automatic System Answer Lines 204 m You must program a button on the system display phone at extension 10 to turn Automatic System Answer on and off Use Automatic System Answ
355. respectively Users can either dial the pool access code or press a pool button representing one of the pools to make a call Pool button A button with status lights on a system phone that represents a specific pool for making calls See also Pooled extension Pool number See Pool Access Code Glossary GL 5 Pooled extension An extension in Hybrid mode that has pool buttons or pool and line buttons See a so Hybrid mode and Key extension Primary carrier The required component of the control unit that contains the primary processor module and 206 modules and 400 modules See a so Expansion Primary processor module This Lucent Technologies module which is always installed in the center slot of the primary carrier manages the components of the control unit See also Expansion processor module Programmable button A telephone button that does not have a line or pool assigned it can be set up to dial a number or access a feature Programming See Centralized Telephone Programming Extension Programming System Programming Programming extension An extension from which you can program the system this can be either extension 10 or 11 Proprietary device A telephone or other device that is designed to work with a specific system and requires a special interface to connect to the public telephone network For example system phones are proprietary devices that can be used only with the control unit described
356. ress Feature 0 32 Enter the access code for the feature if required To return to your original call press the programmed button or press Feature 0 3 again Standard Phone 1 Press the switchhook or press the Recall or Flash button on a feature phone that has one You hear intercom dial tone Press Lo 3 Enter the access code for the feature if required To return to your original call press the switchhook or press the Recall or Flash button on a feature phone again then press Lo 3 again Recall F03 5 161 Recall Timer Duration 107 Description This System Programming procedure lets you change the length of the timed signal or switchhook flash generated by the system Recall feature as well as by the Recall option used in Auto Dial and Speed Dial numbers Recall sends this timed signal over the phone line to the local telephone company or PBX to which the system is connected Typically you use the Recall feature to access a PBX central office or Centrex feature such as Call Waiting Your local phone company can tell you the correct setting for most Centrex systems the correct setting is 800 msec or 32 Considerations You should change the factory setting only under two conditions m f using the system Recall feature has no effect lengthen the time m lf the system is connected to a PBX or Centrex system and Recall drops calls shorten the time Valid
357. ress Next item or Prev item until the extension number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 80 Doorphone Alert Extensions 606 Doorphone Extension 604 and 605 Description These System Programming procedures identify extensions to which doorphones are connected A doorphone is usually placed near an entrance to screen visitors You can connect up to two doorphones to the system use Doorphone 1 Extension 604 to identify the extension to which the first doorphone is connected and Doorphone 2 Extension 605 to identify the extension to which the second doorphone is connected Related Features You must use Doorphone Alert Extensions 606 to identify the extensions that signal when the doorphone button is pressed Each doorphone can signal any number of alert extensions To prevent outside calls from being made or received on the doorphone use Line Assignment 301 to remove all outside lines and or Pool Extension Assignment 314 to remove all pools from the doorphone extension Automatic Line Selection for the doorphone extension is automatically set to intercom first You can use Message Light On with the doorphone for example to turn on the doorphone s light as a prearranged signal to a delivery person provided the doorphone is connected to an R3 1 or later 206 module and the system is equipped with an R3 1 or later processor module
358. ress Remove and repeat Steps 3 and 4 m To delete the account code you just entered press Remove Select another procedure or exit programming mode Forced Account Code List 409 5 93 Group Call Distribution 206 Description This System Programming procedure assigns outside lines to Hunt Groups Doing so allows outside calls to ring directly into a Hunt Group instead of being answered and transferred by the receptionist You can assign lines to Hunt Groups 1 7 Hunt Group 7 is used exclusively for the voice messaging system Related Features m You must use Hunt Group Extensions 505 to assign extensions to Hunt Groups m f you assign lines to Hunt Group 7 for the voice messaging system s Automated Attendant Service you may want to adjust when the lines should ing in the group See VMS Hunt Delay 506 and VMS Hunt Schedule 507 for more information m If you are using a voice messaging system you have two Group Call Distribution options Considerations If you want Automated Attendant Service for some or all lines Assign setting 1 those lines to Hunt Group 7 If you want calls to route directly to the voice mailbox of a specific user after four rings choose VMS Line Cover setting 3 for those lines and assign a line owner in the voice messaging system For more information on voice messaging system options refer to the documentation shipped with the voice messaging system As an alt
359. ress a programmable button preferably a button with lights Press Feature 1 9 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode 5 34 Background Music F19 Using To turn Background Music on 1 From a system phone with a speaker press the programmed button or press Feature 1 2 If the phone is idle you hear Background Music If the Background Music button has lights the green light turns on 2 To adjust the volume of Background Music use the phone s volume control buttons while listening to the Background Music To turn Background Music off Press the programmed button or press _Feature 1 2 again If the Background Music button has lights the green light turns off Background Music F19 5 35 Call Coverage F20 XX XX Description This feature redirects all intercom transferred and outside calls on lines assigned ownership from a user s extension to another system extension where XX is an extension number from 10 57 for coverage When Call Coverage is activated covered calls are routed to the covering extension after a specified number of rings Callers can then leave a message with the person at the covering extension This feature is helpful for users who want their callers to have personalized service when they are unable to answer calls Related Features m You must use Line Coverage Extension 208 to designate an extension as the owner of a specific outsi
360. ries 1 Assigned to next available button at extension 10 2 Not Assigned vY 3 Select button then press a programmable button to assign Night Service to that button 5 140 Night Service Button 503 Programming To program a Night Service button at extension 10 1 Press Feature o o System Program System Program 5 Lo 3 2 Atthis point m f you want to assign Night Service to the first available button press Next Data until a display similar to the following appears Night Service Button 1 Assigned Ext10 m f you want to remove the Night Service button assignment press Next data until a display similar to the following appears Night Service Button 2 Not Assigned m f you want to assign Night Service to a specific button press 3 A display similar to the following appears Night Service Button 3 Select a Button Then press a programmable button with lights to assign Night Service to that button Select another procedure or exit programming mode Label the Night Service button at extension 10 Using To turn Night Service on 1 Press the Night Service button at extension 10 a lfa System Password is programmed the green light next to the button flashes you must continue with Step 2 m f no System Password is programmed the green light is on steady and Night Service is on 2 Enter the password The green light is on steady Night Service is on To turn Night Service
361. ring delay number 0 9 Y 2 rings SYSTEM TIME DIAL 103 p 5 185 DIRECT EXTENSION DIAL BUTTON DIAL the time in HHMM 24 hour DIAL 113 military format DIAL 1 Assigned v 2 Not Assigned 3 Select Button then press NUMBER OF LINES p 5 143 a programmable button See IMPORTANT below DIAL 104 ini OUTGOING CALL RESTR ON DIAL two digits 01 24 for the RESID number of outside lines to be BUTTON p 3 146 assigned to every extension DIAL 114 E DIAL 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned WV 2 per 206 or 200 module 3 Select Button then press V 4per 400 module a programmable button TRANSFER RETURN RINGS DIAL 105 p 5 194 DIAL one digit 0 9 for the number v WAKE UP SERVICE BUTTON DIAL 115 p 5 204 DIAL 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned 3 Select Button then press of rings before the call returns Y 4 rings 0 rings no return Y a programmable button RECALL TIMER DURATION DIAL 107 o 5 162 CALL COVERAGE RINGS DIAL two digits 01 80 to set the DIAL 116 length of a switchhook flash DIAL digit 1 9 for th 5 _ one digit 1 9 for the number 18 450 msec of rings before the call is sent v to the covering extension ROTARY DIALING TIMEOUT vV 2 rings DIAL 108 o 5 164 DIAL 1 4 sec 3 12sec 2 8secv VMS COVER RINGS DIAL 117 DIAL one digit 1 9 for the number p 5 197 of rings before the call is sent to the voice messaging system Y
362. rly the problem is solved m If the problem remains go to Possible Cause 3 Possible Cause 3 The telephone is defective What to do Unplug the cord from the base of the problem phone Then plug the cord into a phone that you know works m If the replacement phone works the problem phone is faulty Call the hotline to arrange for a replacement m If the replacement phone does not work go to Possible Cause 4 Possible Cause 4 The telephone cord is defective What to do Unplug the cord from the base of the phone and the wall jack Replace the cord with a cord that you know works m If the phone works the cord is faulty Call the hotline to arrange for a replacement m If the phone does not work and it is part of a combination extension see Problems with Combination Extensions Phone Does Not Work Properly Possible Cause 3 m If the phone does not work and it is not part of a combination extension call the hotline In the continental U S help is available at 1 800 628 2888 Outside the continental U S call your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer Troubleshooting 6 3 Display Shows Only 16 Characters Per Line Possible Cause Processor module is not R 4 1 What to do Check the release number on the processor module m lf the processor module release number is lower than 4 1 the display shows a maximum of 16 characters per line m lf the processor module release numbe
363. rn the control unit on and off several times If the green LEDs on the modules are still out call the hotline In the continental U S help is available at 1 800 628 2888 Outside the continental U S call your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer 6 16 Troubleshooting Multiple Phones Dead No Dial Tone or Lights Possible Cause 1 The LED on one system module is out What to do If the green LED on the front of a module is out try reseating the module in the control unit m Ifthe LED lights the problem is corrected m If the problem remains call the hotline Possible Cause 2 The green LEDs on several system modules are out What to do If the LEDs on the front of several system modules are out try reseating the leftmost module of the ones with the lights out see Replacing System Modules in the PARTNER Communications System Installation guide m Ifthe LEDs light the problem is corrected m If the problem remains call the hotline Other Problems with System This procedure resets the system Use it when you have any problems that are not covered elsewhere in this chapter The following procedure disconnects all calls in progress but does not erase any system settings Possible Cause System needs a hardware reset What to do Unplug the control unit s power cord from the wall Wait 10 seconds then plug it back in If the problem remains call the hotline In the
364. rning Night Service on or off In addition when Night Service is on users in the Night Service Group can dial only numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List 408 and Marked without entering the System Password Night Service with a System Password is useful for controlling unauthorized use of phones after hours If you have a voice messaging system VMS Hunt Schedule 507 determines when outside calls should ring the VMS Hunt Group always day only or night only The status of the Night Service button at extension 10 tells the voice messaging system to operate in day or night mode The Night Service button returns to the status on off it was in before a power failure occurred or System Reset 728 was used Considerations A Night Service button must be programmed on the system phone at extension 10 Night Service must be programmed on a button with lights This feature does not work if it is programmed on a button without lights A user in the Night Service Group can receive an after hours outside call only if it comes in on a line or pool that is assigned to that user s phone Line or pool assignments for extensions in the Night Service Group can vary from one extension to another Dialing restrictions for extensions not in the Night Service Group remain the same as during normal daytime operation m f you reassign the Night Service button it is removed from the button where it was previously assigned Valid Ent
365. rogram System Program la 5 Lo 6 2 Press Next Data until the appropriate value displays 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 198 VMS Hunt Delay 506 VMS Hunt Schedule 507 Description This feature applies only if you have a voice messaging system This System Programming procedure determines whether the outside lines assigned to Hunt Group 7 hunt through the VMS Hunt Group all the time only during Day operation Night Service is off or only during Night operation Night Service is on This feature affects only the Automated Attendant Service of the voice messaging system Related Features m You must use Group Call Distribution 206 to assign lines to Hunt Group 7 m You must use Hunt Group Extensions 505 to assign the extensions associated with the voice messaging system hardware to Hunt Group 7 m f you set the VMS Hunt Schedule for Day Only or Night Only you must use Night Service Button 503 to program a Night Service button for extension 10 Valid Entries 1 Always vY 2 Day Only 3 Night Only Programming To change the VMS Hunt Schedule setting for the voice messaging system s Automated Attendant Service 1 Press Feature Lo Lo System Program System Program la 5 Lo z 2 Press _Next Data until the appropriate value displays 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode VMS Hunt Schedule 507 5 199
366. rogram another i VOICE INTERRUPT ON BUSY DIAL an extension number 10 57 extension DIAL a line number 01 24 DIAL 312 o 5 200 z icti i 10 57 m 882 or 883 paS ERE FORCED ACCOUNT CODE ENTRY pint E a daa 0 57 DIAL 1 lt No Restriction v 3 Incoming Only DIAL 307 2 Not Assigned v a 2 Outgoing Only on No a a DIAL an extension number 10 57 PRESS ext ten to program another a 4 Ne Actos ny ine o1 i DIAL 1 Assigned ere iol Venstoried or Reid eal 2 Not Assigned 7 E eg program PRESS _Next item to program another A M E BS EERE ERR eee ONES PRESS Dex ter Jito program anothar o LINE ACCESS MODE p 5 175 m m 1 Program another extension PS m m PRESS Next Procedure Prev Procedure ee a a DIAL 313 al enter a new extension Next Procedure Prev Procedure DIAL an extension number 10 57 number and repeat a DISTINCTIVE RING 5 bon ead ret Bel above step es DIAL 1 Pool v all extensions g above steps P PS II DIAL 308 a except 10 Slee eR Bee eee DIAL an extension number 10 57 3 2 Key V extension 10 x Acti only DISPLAY LANGUAGE E E nnansaoaannnnnnng l C4 WATNG DIAL 316 DIAL an extension number 10 57 DIAL 1 Assigned DIAL 303 l PRESS Next item to program another DIAL an extension number 10 57 extension DIAL 1 English Y 2 Spanish 2 Not Assigned 3 French PRESS Next item to program another PRESS _Next tem to prog
367. rogrammed to ring or page another extension whenever the button is pressed The button can be used to call the extension or to transfer a call to the extension with one touch the lights next to the button show calling activity for the extension See a so Manual Signaling Intercom call A call that is made to another system extension Internal call See Intercom call GL 4 Glossary Do K Key extension An extension that has line buttons but not pool buttons See also Key mode and Pooled extension Key mode An operating mode in which outside lines are assigned one per line button To access outside lines users press line buttons or enter a Direct Line Pickup code See also Hybrid mode and System E L Line The transmission path between your control unit and the local phone company s central office used for incoming and outgoing calls Line button A button with status lights on a system phone that represents a specific line for making calls See also Key extension and Pooled extension Line hunting See Group Call Distribution Line jack The location on 206 and 400 modules that allows you to connect outside lines to the control unit Line number The number assigned to each line jack on a 206 or 400 module Line numbers run consecutively from 01 through 24 for a two carrier configuration Line pooling See Pool Line Reserve A system feature that lets you reserve a busy line or pool by pressing t
368. rphone the person who answers a doorphone call can then speak with the visitor at the doorphone A doorphone is especially useful for providing access to offices or departments after hours For example you can install a doorphone outside your building entrance to allow visitors to ring telephones inside the building when the receptionist is not there and the front door is locked The system supports up to two Lucent Technologies PARTNER Doorphones or any number of Lucent Technologies Universal Doorphones Universal Doorphones offer a door unlock feature and can be installed in addition to PARTNER Doorphones m Loudspeaker paging systems allow you to broadcast a message over a large area by connecting the paging system directly to the PAGE jack on the primary processor module The system supports all Lucent Technologies paging systems including the entire PagePac line and most paging systems from other manufacturers In addition to its numerous paging features the PARTNER PagePac provides doorspeaker and door unlock capabilities For information on how to use a loudspeaker paging system with the system see Chapter 5 m PARTNER Passage Way Solution allows you to combine your Personal Computer PC running Microsoft Windows 3 1 with your phone You can then use your PC for tasks such as dialing out from an electronic phone list logging phone calls and programming your phone m Music on hold systems allow you to play recorded music o
369. rtification No 230 3756A CSA Certification No LR 60486 Load No 7 FCC and IC Information C 3 Renseignements sur la notification du minist re des Industrie Canada et la r paration L tiquette du minist re des Industrie Canada identifie le mat riel homologu Cette tiquette certifie que le mat riel est conforme a certaines normes de protection d exploitation et de s curit des r seaux de t lecommunications Le Minist re n assure toutefois pas que le mat riel fonctionnera a la satisfaction de Putilisateur Avant d installer ce mat riel l utilisateur doit s assurer qu il est permis de le raccorder aux installations de l entreprise locale de t l communication Le mat riel doit galement tre install en suivant une m thode accept e de peuvent etre prolonges au moyen d un dispositif homologue de raccordement Dans certains cas les fils int rieurs de enterprise utilis s pour un service individuel a ligne unique peuvent tre prolong s au moyen d un dispositif homologu de raccordement cordon prolongateur t l phonique interne L abonn ne doit pas oublier qu il est possible que la conformit aux conditions nonc es ci dessus n emp chent pas la d gradation du service dans certaines situations Actuellement les entreprises de t lecommunication ne permettent pas que l on raccorde leur mat riel a des jacks d abonn sauf dans les cas pr cis pr vus pas les tarifs particuliers
370. s This section suggests several ways you can set up fax machines to work with your system It includes instructions for programming and using a Fax Management button on a system phone in order to monitor the status of a fax machine and transfer calls to it with a single touch transferring calls to the fax machine extension and using a Lucent Technologies fax machine s Notify feature Using Fax Machines Fax Management Feature On any system phone you can program a button with lights to serve as a Fax Management button The lights next to this button tell you when the fax machine is in use available or not answering for example when it is out of paper You can also use the button to transfer calls from your extension to the fax machine with a single touch Programming for Fax Management To program a Fax Management button first assign the fax machine extension using Fax Machine Extensions 601 See Chapter 5 for details Then program the fax machine extension number on an Auto Dial button For more information see Auto Dialing in Chapter 5 Using the Fax Management Button The lights next to the Fax Management button show what is happening at the fax machine see Table 4 1 Table 4 1 Fax Management Button Light Patterns Light Pattern Indicates Red broken Fax trouble The fax machine is not answering If broken flutter flutter occurs because the fax machine is out of paper refill the paper The
371. s PRESS Feature 0 Z RECALL o 5 160 PRESS a programmable button PRESS Feature 0 3 SAVE NUMBER REDIAL o 5 165 PRESS a programmable button PRESS Feature 0 4 SIMULTANEOUS PAGING PRESS a programmable button PRESS left intercom x z Lo STATION LOCK p 5 175 PRESS a programmable button PRESS Feature 2 1 TOUCH TONE ENABLE p 5 187 PRESS a programmable button PRESS Feature o 8 VMS COVER p 5 195 PRESS a programmable button with lights PRESS Feature 1 5 Ce VOICE INTERRUPT ON BUSY TALK BACK PRESS a programmable button with lights PRESS Feature 1 8 VOICE MAILBOX TRANSFER PRESS a programmable button PRESS Feature 1 4 System Programming Quick Reference Place the Programming Overlay on the dialpad of the system display phone at extension 10 or 11 TO START SYSTEM PROGRAMMING TO END SYSTEM PROGRAMMING PRESS Feature o 0 TO USE A SPECIFIC PROCEDURE PRESS Feature 0 o PRESS _System Program PRESS _System Program SYSTEM DATE DIAL 101 DIAL the date in MMDDYY form AUTOMATIC SYSTEM ANSWER BUTTON DIAL 111 DIAL 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned 3 Select Button then press SYSTEM DAY a programmable button p 5 179 DIAL 102 DIAL 1 Sunday Y 5 Thursday 2 Monday 6 Friday 3 Tuesday 7 Saturday 4 Wednesday DIRECT EXTENSION DIAL DELAY DIAL 112 0 5 62 DIAL a
372. s for example regulate phone use in guest rooms and schedule wake up calls for guests Easy to use programming procedures making it simple for you to manage your system and telephones System display phones provide messages and prompts during programming Two system programming extensions allowing you to program the system from one extension without interrupting call activity at the other programming extension usually the receptionist s extension Modular connections to the control unit making it simple to reconfigure your system or to add lines and or extensions as your business grows Direct connections for industry standard devices including most standard phones fax machines answering machines modems and credit card scanners Optional equipment support including doorphones loudspeaker paging systems music on hold call reporting often referred to as Station Message Detail Recording or SMDR devices PARTNER Attendants and extra alerts System Components Modular hardware design makes the system easy to install and expand Figure 1 1 shows an example of system components If you use music on hold to broadcast certain copyrighted music or material including songs or other material from radio broadcasts you may be required to obtain the permission of the copyright owner One way to obtain permission is to contact ASCAP BMI and or similar performing rights organizations to obtain a license Or you can pu
373. s use Automatic System Answer Delay 110 You must use Automatic System Answer Record Playback to record the greeting callers hear when the system answers an incoming call For callers to hear music on hold Music On Hold 602 must be Active and an audio source must be connected to the primary processor module You can setiSMDR Talk Time 611 to Active to include the Talk field on call reports For an incoming outside call answered by Automatic System Answer this field shows the call duration minus the time the greeting played and the caller waited for someone to answer the call The Automatic System Answer button returns to the status on off it was in before a power failure occurred or System Reset 728 was used Automatic System Answer Mode should not be set to Hold or Ring if the disconnect signal from the local telephone company is not recognized by Hold Disconnect Time 203 Direct Extension Dialljis an alternative system answering feature that lets outside callers dial an extension or Hunt Group number directly without the aid of the receptionist Automatic System Answer Button 111 5 21 Considerations An Automatic System Answer button must be programmed on a button with lights on the system display phone at extension 10 This feature will not work if it is programmed on a button without lights Automatic System Answer can handle up to three outside calls simultaneously Valid Entries WON
374. s packaged with the PARTNER Attendant Make sure that the unit is in backup call answering mode When callers call the main number for your company the receptionist normally picks up the call If the receptionist is busy the PARTNER Attendant answers and plays a recorded message such as Please hold for the receptionist or dial an extension number now 4 24 Using Auxiliary Equipment To Program 1 If your system is configured for Hybrid mode use Line Access Mode 313 to change extension X from Pooled to Key Use Line Assignment 301 to assign all the lines to extension X that you want the PARTNER Attendant to cover Set Line Ringing for all lines assigned to extension X to Delayed Ring Make sure extension X is not assigned as a Call Waiting 316 extension Set the PARTNER Attendant to pick up within a specific number of rings so if the receptionist does not pick up a call the PARTNER Attendant will Using Auxiliary Equipment 4 25 Voice Messaging Systems Two voice messaging systems are compatible with your system You can install one or the other depending on your business needs The PARTNER MAIL Voice Messaging System is an auxiliary device that connects to the system through extension jacks The PARTNER MAIL VS Voice Messaging System which physically resembles a 206 module resides in the control unit Both voice messaging systems offer your business complete call processing features Specific
375. s shown in Figure 4 5 You can install a credit card scanner on an extension by itself or combine it with a system phone or a standard phone on the same extension see Combination Extensions in the PARTNER Communications System Installation guide Telephone Lines optional Figure 4 5 Credit Card Scanner To Use When you make a call on the credit card scanner an outside line is automatically selected If you combine the credit card scanner with a system phone or standard phone you cannot use the phone while the credit card scanner is operating You can use only one of the devices at a time To Program 1 If extension X is a key extension use Line Assignment 301 to assign the lines you want the scanner to use to extension X If extension X is a pooled extension use Pool Extension Assignment 314 to assign the pools you want the scanner to use to extension X Also use Line Assignment 301 to assign any individual lines you want the scanner to use to extension X 2 Set Automatic Line Selection for extension X to select the pools and outside lines that the scanner is to use Set Automatic Extension Privacy 304 for extension X to Assigned Make sure extension X is not assigned as a Call Waiting 316 extension If the scanner has an auto answer feature turn it off oa fF Q For multiple scanners repeat Steps 1 5 for each extension 4 12 Using Auxiliary Equipment Fax Machine
376. ser may need to dial touch tone digits while on a call to a bank by phone service Related Procedures You must use Dial Mode 201 to identify rotary lines to the system To activate this feature from within a number stored on an Auto Dial button or as part of a Speed Dial number press _Transfr when storing the number see Special Dialing Functions Considerations m This feature is needed only when dialing on a rotary line Use Touch Tone Enable only after a call is connected For example use this feature after dialing a bank by phone service that requires you to dial touch tone digits m You can program a Touch Tone Enable button on a system phone to turn on Touch Tone Enable with one touch Programming To program a Touch Tone Enable button 1 2 3 4 5 Using Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button Press Feature Lo La Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode From a system phone press the programmed button or press Feature 0 8 when you need to dial touch tone digits Touch Tone Enable stays in effect until you hang up Touch Tone Enable F08 5 187 Transferring Calls Description This section explains how to transfer calls using the _transir button on a system phone or the switchhook o
377. sfer A Manual Signaling button does not initiate an intercom call unless you lift the handset or press _Spkr and press _intercom first To respond to a signal the target extension must place an intercom call to the person signaling 5 132 Manual Signaling F13XX or F13 XX Programming Using To program a Manual Signaling button 1 Press Feature Lo Lo System Program System Program Central Tel Program Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button Press Feature 1 3 a e oO bP Dial the two digit extension number of the target extension For example to identify extension 22 as the target extension press 2 2 Enter x before the extension number if you want to use the button for voice signaling 6 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode m 10 beep the target extension 1 While the handset is in the cradle press the programmed button The extension beeps for as long as the button is pressed m To ring or voice signal the target extension 1 Lift the handset or press _Spkr 2 Press Intercom 3 Press the programmed button m To transfer a call to the target extension 1 While active on the call press _Transtr 2 Press the programmed button Manual Signaling F13XX or F13 XX 5 133 Message Light Off F 10XX Description This feature turns off the message light at a specified exte
378. side calls from the locked extension Station Message Detail Recording SMDR See Call_ reporting Subscriber 1 On a voice messaging system a user who has a mailbox in the system 2 A user who has access to an outside line with special features such as Caller ID System The Lucent Technologies control unit and system phones that you purchased plus all other telecommunications devices that are connected to your control unit System Answer See Automatic System Answer System Manager The person in your business who is responsible for managing your system including system programming System mode One of two operating modes Key or Hybrid that determines how users access outside lines from their phones The system mode is determined by a hardware setting in the processor module See also Hybrid mode and Key mode System phones The Lucent Technologies telephones that are specifically designed for use with PARTNER systems Models include the PARTNER 34D PARTNER 18D PARTNER 18 PARTNER 6 MLS 34D MLS 18D MLS 12D MLS 12 MLS 6 MLC 6 MDC 9000 and MDW 9000 phones System Programming Procedures that allow you to customize system settings for your business System Programming requires a system display phone and must be done from extension 10 or 11 ME SSS T Talk Back See Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back Telephone Programming Customizes extensions to meet the needs of individual users including the
379. signed to the extension If itis enter a valid account code m If you can make a call the problem is solved m f Forced Account Code Entry is not assigned go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 Dial Mode is set incorrectly What to do Find out if you have touch tone or rotary service Then set the Dial Mode 201 to Touch Tone or Rotary as appropriate m If you can make a call the problem is solved m lf the Dial Mode is set correctly go to Possible Cause 3 Possible Cause 3 Someone changed the Outgoing Call Restriction setting for the extension What to do If calls could be made without trouble before find out if someone changed the Outgoing Call Restriction 401 for the extension m If someone changed the Outgoing Call Restriction setting verify that the change was an appropriate one m f no one changed the Outgoing Call Restriction setting go to Possible Cause 4 Possible Cause 4 Station Lock was used to lock the extension What to do Use Station Unlock from extension 10 to unlock the extension m If you can make a call the problem is solved m If the extension was not locked go to Possible Cause 5 In the continental U S help is available at 1 800 628 2888 Outside the continental U S call your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer 6 8 Troubleshooting Possible Cause 5 Local phone company is not accurately receiving the dialing signals What to do Isola
380. sion X to Assigned Make sure extension X is not assigned as a Call Waiting 316 extension Pickup Group Extension 501 Calling Group Extension 502 Night Service Group Extension 504 or Hunt Group Extension 505 6 To monitor the fax machine use Fax Machine Extensions 601 to identify extension X as a fax extension and program a Fax Management button by programming the fax machine extension number on an Auto Dial button 4 16 Using Auxiliary Equipment Fax Line Saver If you do not use your fax machine enough to justify paying for its own outside line you can put the machine on its own extension With this setup you must transfer calls to it manually If you have programmed a Fax Management button you can transfer a call to the fax machine with a single touch as well as monitor the status of the fax machine ese rex Management Eacture dearter in this chapter Figure 4 7 shows the setup contTROL E X cay UNIT Figure 4 7 Fax Line Saver Setup To Use When a person answers a call and hears a fax machine signaling on the other end the person can transfer the call to extension X the fax machine extension To send a fax transmission simply lift the handset on the fax machine an outside line will be automatically selected To Program 1 If extension X is a key extension use Line Assignment 301 to assign all lines to extension X If extension X is a pooled extension use
381. speak to another user who is busy on a call and who has the Voice interrupt On Busy 312 feature activated When you use Voice Interrupt on Busy the interrupted user hears two beeps before hearing your voice Be aware that the third party to whom the interrupted user is speaking will probably hear the two beeps and the faint sound of your voice Therefore the message you deliver with the interruption should be brief and discreet If the interrupted user wants to answer you he or she can press a programmed Talk Back button the interrupted user s response cannot be heard by the third party in this case Learning About Telephones 3 7 Speakerphone Performance Tips The speaker on your system phone has a sensitive sound activated switch Room acoustics and background noise can affect the proper operation of the speakerphone To ensure that your speakerphone works effectively follow these guidelines Avoid placing your phone in areas with high background noise caused by loud voices radios printers copiers typewriters other noisy office equipment and heater and air conditioning fans Avoid talking before the other person is finished speaking When you both talk at the same time only one person s voice comes through Do not use your speaker to make announcements over a loudspeaker paging system connected to your phone system When talking always face your phone and stay within two feet of it Place your phone at least six in
382. ss Mode 313 to change extensions Z1 and Z2 from Pooled to Key 2 _Use Group Call Distribution 206 to assign all outside lines to the Hunt Group 7 the VMS hunt group to provide Automated Attendant Service on these lines 3 Use Transfer Return Extension 306 for extensions Z1 and Z2 to ensure that calls transferred by the PARTNER MAIL system return to extension 10 if they are not answered 4 _Use Hunt Group Extensions 505 to assign extensions Z1 and Z2 to Hunt Group 7 the VMS hunt group 5 Set the VMS Hunt Delay 506 to Delayed 6 Setthe VMS Hunt Schedule 507 to Always Using Auxiliary Equipment 4 27 7 Make sure that a Night Service Button 503 is assigned at extension 10 the receptionist s extension When Night Service is on callers hear the night menu when no one is available to answer their calls 8 Program a Voice Mailbox Transfer button at extension 10 to enable the receptionist to transfer calls directly to extension X s and Y s mailboxes without first ringing their phones This is useful when the receptionist knows that the users at extensions X and Y are away from their desks 9 Program an Auto Dial button for the VMS hunt group _intercom z z z at extensions X and Y to allow the subscribers to call in for their messages with one touch 4 28 Using Auxiliary Equipment Feature Reference Contents Overview 5 1 AA Extensions 607 5 3 Abbreviated Ringin
383. stem phone Related Features You can use the Auto Dial button instead of dialing the two digit extension number required for these features Follow Me Call Park Message Light On Message Light Off Station Unlock To set up a Fax Management button program the fax extension number on an Auto Dial button with lights Special light patterns on the Auto Dial button for the fax extension indicate fax machine status Chapter 4 provides more information on using a Fax Management button Identify fax extensions using Fax Machine Extensions 601 You can include special functions such as a Pause in the Auto Dial number see Special Dialing Functions for more information Considerations If you program an extension number on a button with lights the lights show calling activity at the extension see in Chapter 3 You can connect an Intercom Autodialer to the system phones at extension 10 and 11 to have Auto Dial buttons for all of the extensions in your system Each user can have only one Auto Dial button either on the system phone oron the Intercom Autodialer for another extension in the system That button can be programmed for intercom ringing intercom voice signaling or manual signaling When programming emergency numbers for Auto Dialing and or making test calls to those numbers you should 1 Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call before hanging up and 2 Perform
384. striction 302 to limit an extension s access to the line Additionally the system automatically assigns the new line as the last line in the Automatic Line Selection sequence If you want to change the order use Automatic Line Selection Centralized Telephone Programming IMPORTANT Do not use Number of Lines 104 if you add lines to the system after initial setup because it changes and Line Ringing for existing lines back to factory settings To change line assignments without affecting other settings use Line Assignment 301 2 6 Programming Pooled Extensions Use this section if your system is configured for Hybrid mode to add new lines to existing pools To assign a new line to a pooled extension as an individual line follow the procedures in Key Extensions on the previous page If you add an outside line to your system for use in an existing pool use Dial Mode 201 if the new line is a rotary line andj Pool Line Assignment 207 to add the line to an existing pool IMPORTANT Do not use Number of Lines 104 if you add lines to the system after initial setup because it changes Selection and Line Ringing for existing pools back to factory settings Additionally it changes Line Assignment 301 Line Access Restriction 302 Automatic Line Selection and Line Ringing for individual lines back to factory settings To change pool assignments without affecting other settings
385. such activities in the off peak hours such as early morning or late evening Auto Dial buttons do not override dialing restrictions for an extension PARTNER 6 MDC 9000 and MDW 9000 system phones have only four buttons available for lines pools and or Auto Dial numbers 5 14 Auto Dialing m For PBX or Centrex systems that require a dial out code to make calls Examples outside the PBX or Centrex system include the dial out code followed by one or more pauses if available on an Auto Dial button for a number outside the PBX or Centrex system See Changing Settings to Support PBX or Centrex Services in Chapter 2 for more information The examples below show some possible entries for an Auto Dial number in Step 4 of Programming m Outside Phone Number Enter the phone number up to 28 digits exactly as you would dial it For example to program 555 2398 press 5 5 5 2 3 2 Le Extension Number Press the left intercom button and enter the two digit extension number Press x before the extension number to program the Auto Dial button to voice signal an extension For example to program extension 20 for voice signaling press left intercom x 2 Lo The display reads Intercom 20 Feature Code Enter the appropriate code For example to program a button to turn on the message light at extension 20 press _Feature o0 2 2 Lo When you press the programmed button the Message Ligh
386. swer Mode 121 5 27 m f Automatic System Answer Mode is set to Hold or Disconnect you can intercept a call while the message is playing the light for the call will be steady red To intercept the call press the line button and lift the handset The message will stop playing when the call is retrieved m f Automatic System Answer Mode is set to Ring the line button on which an outside call rings shows green flash continuously even while the system answers the call and plays the Automatic System Answer greeting To answer the call lift the handset If the message was playing it stops automatically Valid Entries 1 Hold Y 2 Disconnect 3 Ring Programming To change the Automatic System Answer Mode 1 Press Feature o 0 System Program _System Program 1 2 1 2 To change the mode press _Next Data until the appropriate value displays see Valid Entries 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 28 Automatic System Answer Mode 121 Automatic System Answer Record Playback 1891 Description This feature lets you record and play back the message that callers hear when a call is answered by the Automatic System Answer feature The maximum length of the message is 10 seconds Related Features m After the Automatic System Answer greeting plays the system either places the call on hold provides continuous ringing or disconnects the call depending on the settin
387. swering Machines 4 4 m Single Answering Machine 4 5 Multiple Answering Machines 4 6 m Personal Answering Machine 4 7 Call Reporting Devices SMDR 4 8 Credit Card Scanners 4 12 m Using Fax Machines 4 13 Transferring a Call to the Fax Machine 4 14 m Send and Receive Fax Machines 4 18 m Serial Printers 4 11 m Call Accounting Devices 4 11 Modems 4 20 m Stand Alone Modem for Placing Calls Onl 4 20 m Send and Receive Modem 4 21 Contents Night Service with Auxiliary Equipment 4 22 PARTNER Attendant 4 24 m Backup for Receptionist 4 24 Voice Messaging Systems 4 26 m Delayed Call Handling 4 26 Using Auxiliary Equipment Overview There are many ways to set up auxiliary equipment the setup you choose depends upon your needs and the number of devices you have This chapter presents some common setups It does not cover how to physically connect the equipment or how to program the features See the PARTNER Communications System Installation guide for installation instructions Chapter 5 for programming instructions and the equipment manufacturer s documentation for complete details on the device you connect This chapter shows various applications for the following types of equipment 7 m Fax Machines m Modems Using Auxiliary Equipment 4 1 In addition you can connect the following devices to your system m Doorphones allow visitors to signal extensions by pressing a button on the doo
388. system extensions is three rings so callers can leave a message Related Features To manually change an extension s VMS Cover state users can program the VMS Cover feature on a button with lights Users can then press the VMS Cover button to activate the feature green light on or deactivate the feature green light off If Automatic VMS Cover is Assigned at an extension the green light is lit automatically after programming the VMS Cover button to indicate that VMS Cover is currently active If this is the case and the VMS Cover button is pressed the feature is deactivated To activate VMS Cover again you must press the button Automatic VMS Cover also applies to outside calls on lines assigned ownership with Line Coverage Extension 208 Use VMS Cover Rings 117 to change the number of times intercom and transferred calls or outside calls on lines assigned ownership ring at all system extensions before they are sent to the voice messaging system Users with Automatic VMS Cover turned on can activate Do Not Disturb to Send All Calls immediately to their voice mailbox If an extension has Automatic VMS Cover and Call Coverage active calls ring at the covering extension after the specified number of Call Coverage Rings 116 If the covering extension does not answer the call is routed to the voice mailbox of the extension that activated Call Coverage after the specified amount of VMS cover rings If an extensio
389. t Press to quickly update the display on the handset On Off Button MDC 9000 and MDW 9000 Handset Press to turn the handset on and off You must turn the handset on to make calls Mute Button MDW 9000 Handset Press to have a private conversation with someone near you while on a call Talk Indicator MDC 9000 Base Lights when the handset is lifted and turned on Charge Indicator MDC 9000 and MDW 9000 Base Lights when the handset is placed on the base and the handset batteries are charging Spare Charge Indicator MDW 9000 Base Lights when the spare battery is charging Learning About Telephones 3 3 Lights Each line or pool button has a green light and a red light The meaning of these lights varies depending on whether the button is used to access an outside line or pool is programmed with a system feature or is programmed for Auto Dialing an extension number intercom Auto Dial button Auto Dial buttons for fax extensions show additional information these Fax Management buttons are described in Chapter 4 When a phone is in programming mode the lights show information about programmed settings see Chapter 2 for details Table 3 1 shows the meanings of the various light patterns for each possible button assignment Table 3 1 Light Patterns for System Phones Intercom Auto Light Pattern Line Button Pool Button Feature Dial Manual Button Signaling Button Steady On Line is in use Pool is in use Gree
390. t press _Next Data until a display similar to the following appears Pool Ext Assign 15 P881 2 Not Assigned m For auxiliary pools only if you want to assign the pool to a specific button press 3 A display similar to the following appears Pool Ext Assign 15 P881 3 Select a Button Then press a button with lights to assign the auxiliary pool to that button If you use option 3 after an auxiliary pool has been assigned the auxiliary pool moves from the old button to the new button you select 5 A m To assign another pool for this extension press _Next item or _Prev item until the pool access code shows on the display Then repeat Step 4 this point m TO program another extension press _Next Procedure _Prev Procedure and begin at Step 2 6 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 156 Pool Extension Assignment 314 Pool Line Assignment 207 Description This procedure applies only to systems configured for Hybrid mode This System Programming procedure assigns lines to or removes lines from the main and auxiliary pools supported for Hybrid mode You can change line assignments in the main pool 880 or in any of three auxiliary pools 881 882 or 883 Related Features m You can use Pool Extension Assignment 314 to assign pools created with this procedure to specific extensions m f you want to prevent a user at an extension from accessing all lines ina s
391. t transferred calls return to the originating extension if they are not answered You can use Transfer Return Extension 306 to specify a different return extension for the extension that transfers a call If you program Hunt Group Extensions 505 make sure this setting is four or more rings This setting allows the call to continue hunting to other group extensions if it is not answered by the first group extension where it rings If an extension has VMS Cover active unanswered calls to that extension are routed to the voice messaging system rather than to the transfer return extension For transferred calls that are sent to a covering extension with if the covering extension does not answer within the specified number of Call Coverage Rings 116 the call rings the specified number of Transfer Return Rings 105 before it transfer returns If the covering extension has Do Not Disturb active the call rings one more time after the specified number of Call Coverage Rings 116 before it transfer returns Considerations m If you have a fax machine or an answering machine connected to the system set Transfer Return Rings to a number greater than the number of rings at which these devices answer Doing so prevents a call transferred to a fax or answering machine from returning before it is answered The system does not start counting the number of rings for a transferred call to determine when it goes to the
392. t Disturbjactive the call rings one more time after the specified number of Call Coverage Rings 116 before it transfer returns Considerations m An unanswered transferred call returns to the transfer return extension identified for the extension transferring the call not the extension receiving the call m Do not designate an extension associated with PARTNER Attendant or voice messaging system hardware as the transfer return extension for any user extension m Transfer return calls do not receive call coverage or voice mail coverage Valid Entries Extension transferring call Any extension 5 192 Transfer Return Extension 306 Programming To change the Transfer Return Extension for a specific extension 1 Press Feature 0 o System Program System Program 3 0 6 2 Dial the number of the originating extension 3 Dial the number of the extension to which the call should return if it is not answered 4 To program another extension press _Next Item or _Prev Item until the extension number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Transfer Return Extension 306 5 193 Transfer Return Rings 105 Description This System Programming procedure which applies to all system extensions defines the number of times a transferred call rings before it goes to the transfer return extension Related Features m By defaul
393. t Technologies and its affiliates and suppliers for any claims losses damages or expenses from any cause whatsoever including acts or omissions of third parties regardless of the form of action whether in contract tort or otherwise shall not exceed the lesser of 1 the direct damages proven or 2 the repair cost replacement cost license fee annual rental charge or purchase price as the case may be of the equipment that directly gives rise to the claim Except as provided below Lucent Technologies and its affiliates and suppliers shall not be liable for any incidental special reliance consequential or indirect loss or damage incurred in connection with the equipment As used in this paragraph consequential damages include but are not limited to the following lost profits lost revenues and losses arising out of unauthorized use or charges for such use of common carrier telecommunications services or facilities accessed through or connected to the equipment For personal injury caused by Lucent Technologies negligence Lucent Technologies liability shall be limited to proven damages to person No action or proceeding against Lucent Technologies or its affiliates or suppliers may be commenced more than twelve 12 months after the cause of action accrues THIS PARAGRAPH SHALL SURVIVE FAILURE OF AN EXCLUSIVE REMEDY Maintenance B 3 Product Ordering Information Reference Materials In addition to this guide the
394. t at extension 20 turns on Programming To program an Auto Dial button 1 gt O PN Press Feature Lo Lo _System Program System Program Central Program Enter the number of the extension to be programmed Press a programmable button Enter an outside phone number feature code account code or PBX Centrex feature access code or press left _ntercom and enter an extension number Repeat Steps 3 and 4 to program additional Auto Dial buttons or exit programming mode Auto Dialing 5 15 Using From a system phone to dial an outside number or extension number you can lift the handset or press _Spkr first but you do not have to do so 1i If you want to call on a specific line press the line button or press _ntercom 8 and dial the two digit line number If you did not lift the handset the lights next to Sokr and _Mic HFAl go on and you are active on the speakerphone If you want to call using a specific pool on a pooled extension press the pool button or press intercom and dial the three digit pool access code If you did not lift the handset the lights next to _Spkr and _Mic HEAL go on and you are active on the speakerphone Press the Auto Dial button on which the outside number or extension number is programmed The system automatically selects a line if you did not specify one turns on the speaker if you did not lift the handset and dials the Auto Dial number
395. t button Then press the line pool or intercom button next to the flashing green light to view the number of the extension from which a coverage call is being sent Standard Phone If your standard phone has a button labeled Recall or Flash use this button whenever you are instructed to press the switchhook m To answer a call When the telephone is ringing lift the handset You are connected to the incoming call m To answer a call when you are already on a call you hear a call waiting tone two beeps 1 Press the switchhook The call you are on is placed on hold and you are connected to the new call To return to the first call press the switchhook again You can continue to press the switchhook to move back and forth between the two calls You cannot transfer either party conference in additional parties or use feature codes while both calls are active Answering Calls 5 13 Auto Dialing Description Auto Dial buttons can be programmed only on system phones This Telephone Programming procedure lets system phone users dial outside numbers extension numbers feature codes or account codes with a single touch by pressing a programmed button If an extension number is stored on an Auto Dial button the user can dial signal or transfer calls to the extension by pressing the button An Auto Dial number can be stored on any programmable button a button with no line or pool assigned on a sy
396. t depends on your PBX or Centrex system For more information on such features see the documentation for your PBX or Centrex system When your Centrex or PBX documentation tells you to use a switchhook flash use the Recall feature instead Outside parties may be harder to hear on a conference call than ona two party call depending on the number of parties and the outside lines connected to the system 5 54 Conference Calls Using System Phone 1 5 Set up the call to the first party You can call the party pick up the call from hold or answer an incoming call You are connected with the first party Press Conf The first party is now on hold Set up the call to the second party You are connected with the second party If you are adding an inside party to a call you must wait until the party answers If you are active on a call using a pool button and you want to set up a conference call using one of the other lines in that pool you can press intercom and dial the pool s access code to gain access to another line in that pool Press Conf again to add the second party to the call You can now speak with the first and second parties Repeat Steps 2 through 4 to add one or two more parties Standard Phone 1 Set up the call to the first party You can call the party pick up the call from hold or answer an incoming call You are connected with the first party Press the switchhook down on
397. t is generated for a call that is left on hold for longer than one minute The tone sounds once every minute until the held call is retrieved or until the caller hangs up Glossary GL 3 Hotline phone A standard phone at an extension which rings another extension automatically when the handset is lifted See a so External Hotline Hunt Group A group of extensions that takes incoming or transferred calls in round robin fashion Calls to the Hunt Group go to the first available extension in the group with the extension that answered most recently being the last one in the hunt order See also Calling Group and VMS Hunt Group Hybrid mode An operating mode in which outside lines are grouped together in pools To access outside lines users press pool buttons on their phones or enter the pool access code In this mode users do not know which lines they are using to make and receive calls See also Key mode and System ICLID See Caller ID Industry standard device A telephone or other telecommunications device that can be connected directly to the public telephone network See BEEE and Inside call See Intercom call Intercom Autodialer An auxiliary device that can be connected to the system phones at extensions 10 and 11 The device has Auto Dial buttons for all of the extensions in the system which can be used for dialing or transferring calls to extensions with one touch Intercom Auto Dial button A button that is p
398. t programming mode To enter or change an optional account code iE From a system phone if a password is programmed for the system you must enter it before lifting the handset See System Password 403 for more information After lifting the handset or while already active on an outside call press the programmed Account Code Entry button or press Feature 1 2 If the Account Code Entry button has lights the green light turns on Enter an account code using one of the following methods m Dial it manually using the phone s dialpad m Dial a System or Personal Speed Dial number programmed with the account code m Press an Auto Dial button programmed with the account code Press the programmed Account Code Entry button or press _Feature 1 2 to indicate the end of the code If the Account Code Entry button has lights the green light turns off Make the call if you are not already on a call To change the account code repeat Steps 2 through 4 5 6 Account Code Entry F12 To enter or change a forced account code 1 From a system phone if a password is programmed for the system you must enter it before lifting the handset See System Password 403 for more information Lift the handset or press _Spxr Press the programmed Account Code Entry button or press Feature 1 2 If the Account Code Entry button has lights the green light turns on Enter an account
399. t ring on lines programmed with Automatic System Answer are picked up after two rings as a default To change this number use Automatic System Answer Delay 110 You must use Automatic System Answer Record Playback to record the greeting callers hear when the system answers an incoming call If there is no message recorded for Automatic System Answer the caller will be placed on hold immediately after the system answers m You can set SMDR Talk Time 611 to Active to include the Talk field on call reports For an incoming outside call answered by Automatic System Answer this field shows the call duration minus the time the greeting played and the caller waited for someone to answer the call m For callers to hear music on hold Music On Hold 602 must be Active and an audio source must be connected to the primary processor module Considerations m All lines programmed with Automatic System Answer should be assigned to extension 10 m Only outside calls on Automatic System Answer lines are answered automatically Intercom transferred and transfer return calls are not answered automatically Valid Entries 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned Y Automatic System Answer Lines 204 5 25 Programming To identify the lines on which outside calls should be answered by the system 1 Press Feature 0 o System Program System Program 2 o 4 2 Enter the two digit line number 01 24 of the desi
400. t to program an outside number on a feature phone s auto dial button you must add a 9 and one or more pauses if available before each outside number The 9 gets an outside line and each pause allows a few seconds to get an outside dial tone Note that the feature phone s last number redial button may not work for an outside call To redial the last number use the system s Last Number Redial feature by pressing 4 Lo 5 Learning About Telephones 3 11 Combination Extensions 3 12 A combination extension is an extension with two devices connected to it either two standard devices or a system phone and a standard device but not two system phones For instructions on how to install a combination extension see the PARTNER Communications System Installation guide The following are examples of useful combination extensions m System phone plus standard phone for power failure backup on extensions 10 16 22 28 34 40 46 and 52 m System phone plus answering machine m System phone plus fax machine m System phone plus headset m System phone plus an external alert such as a bell or chime Using the telephones in a combination extension is fairly simple The main point to understand is that the two telephones share a single extension in the same way several home telephones share a single line A system phone works like it always does and a standard phone works like it always does when connected to the sys
401. te the problem Use the telephone to make calls on different lines Then make calls on different phones using the same line m If you cannot make calls from one phone on all lines follow the procedure for System Phone Does Not Work Possible Cause 2 m f you cannot make calls using different phones go to Possible Cause 6 Possible Cause 6 Too many standard devices are trying to dial simultaneously If the problem is on a system phone go to Possible Cause 7 What to do Stay on the line and wait for dial tone or try to call later m If you can make a call you may want to increase the number of touch tone receivers by adding 206 1 receiver or 400 2 receivers modules to avoid future problems Call the hotline m f you wait 30 seconds and still do not hear a dial tone go to Possible Cause 7 Possible Cause 7 Local phone company line is faulty What to do One at a time unplug each outside line from each 206 400 and 200 module in the control unit Then plug each line into a standard telephone and try to make a call m Ifthe trouble occurs on the standard phone try another line cord if the trouble persists report it to your local phone company m lf the trouble does not occur on the standard phone the trouble is with your control unit Call the hotline Trouble Making Outside Calls from Pool Buttons on Pooled Extensions Trouble making outside calls from a pool button could be one of the following m You h
402. telephone programming that lets users program their own extensions from their system phones See also Centralized Telephone External Hotline A standard phone that is programmed to dial a predetermined outside number when a user lifts the handset See also Hotline phone C F Fax Management button A system phone button with lights that is programmed with the extension number of a fax machine A user can monitor the lights next to this button to determine when the fax machine is in use available or not answering Feature phone An industry standard phone that includes programmable buttons or other built in features Forced Account Code Entry A system setting that forces users at specified extensions to enter an account code before making a call See also Account code and Forced Account Code List Forced Account Code List An optional list of account codes that the system checks when a user enters a forced account code If the forced account code entered by the user is on the list valid the user gets access to an outside line if not the user is denied access 400 module The Lucent Technologies equipment component that has line jacks for connecting up to four outside lines to the control unit D G Group Call Distribution A system setting that automatically directs incoming calls on specific lines to a Hunt Group See also and VMS Hunt Group Ei H Hold Reminder Tone On system phones a short beep tha
403. tem Only one phone or device can be used at a time unless you want to join the two on a single call the same way two people can pick up the same call on different telephones at home Furthermore m Both phones share the same extension number m Both phones share the same voice path that is when either phone is busy the extension is busy m Calls ring at both phones m A second call can ring at the system phone while the standard phone is busy but do not use the system phone to answer the second call until the standard phone is idle or the first call will be disconnected m f you make a voice signaled intercom call to a combination extension with a system phone only the system phone signals m Call Waiting 316 does not work on a standard phone in combination with a system phone m The lights on the system phone show what the standard phone is doing as well as what the system phone is doing For an explanation of light patterns see Lights at the beginning of this chapter m f Privacylis active at a combination extension no other extension can join a call in progress at either a system phone or a standard device However a phone can interrupt a call on a standard device at the same extension For example if a system phone and modem are combined at an extension picking up the handset of the system phone could interrupt a modem transmission even if Privacy is active Learning About Telephones While on
404. tem Phone To use Group Pickup when programmed on a button press the programmed button To use manually 1 Lift the handset and press intercom You hear intercom dial tone 2 Dial 6 6 and a group number 1 4 to pick up a call ringing at any extension in the group Standard Phone To use Group Pickup 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Dial 6 6 and a group number 1 4 to pick up a call ringing at any extension in the group Group Pickup l66G 5 103 Hold Description This section explains how to place and retrieve calls on hold using either the Hold button on a system phone or the switchhook on a standard phone The user can make and receive other calls on another line or pool while a call is on hold Related Features System phone users can use Exclusive Hold to put calls on hold that can be retrieved only from their own extension Placing a call on Exclusive Hold also prevents other users from accessing Caller ID information for the held call If you put a call on a line in a pool on hold and another user picks up that call it will no longer be available to you To ensure that no one else can retrieve your held call on a pooled line use Exclusive Hold Use Call Park to put a call on a special type of hold so it can be picked up from any phone in the system This type of hold typically is used for pooled extensions in Hybrid mode because it allows the user to retrie
405. tem Program System Program 1 1 3 If you want to assign Direct Extension Dial to the first available button press Next Data until a display similar to the following appears DXD Button 1 Assigned Ext10 If you want to unassign Direct Extension Dial press _Next Data until a display similar to the following appears DXD Button 2 Not Assigned If you want to assign Direct Extension Dial to a specific button press 3 The display reads DXD Button 3 Select a Button Then press a programmable button with lights to assign Direct Extension Dial to that button Select another procedure or exit programming mode Label the Direct Extension Dial button at extension 10 5 60 Direct Extension Dial Button 113 Using To turn Direct Extension Dial on Press the Direct Extension Dial button at extension 10 The green light is on steady and Direct Extension Dial is on If calls are ringing when Direct Extension Dial is turned on the calls will be answered immediately by the system To turn Direct Extension Dial off Press the Direct Extension Dial button at extension 10 The green light goes off and Direct Extension Dial is off Any calls in the process of being answered by the system will continue to hear the recorded message and will be prompted to enter a destination extension Direct Extension Dial Button 113 5 61 Direct Extension Dial Delay 112 Description This System Programming pro
406. tem and a fax call comes in ona line covered by the PARTNER MAIL system its Automated Attendant Service can be programmed to automatically transfer the call to a fax extension or if you have multiple fax machines to the extension Hunt Group for the fax machines There are four ways to transfer the call to the fax extension m If you have a Fax Management button simply press the button When the fax machine answers hang up m f you do not have a Fax Management button press _Transtr plus the fax machine s extension number When the fax machine answers hang up m On a standard phone rapidly press and release the switchhook to place the call on hold then dial the fax extension number and hang up m If you have multiple fax machines in an extension Hunt Group press Transfr then intercom 7 z plus the fax extension Hunt Group number When a fax machine answers hang up Using the Fax Machine s Notify Feature Some fax machines for example models 5300 5350 9025 Plus and 9035 Plus have a feature called Notify After such a machine receives a fax call it automatically dials a number and plays a recorded message such as You have just received a fax If you need to know exactly when a fax comes in or if your fax machine is located in an isolated part of your building you can use Notify in any of the following ways m Program the fax machine to make a ringing or voice signaled intercom call to an in
407. tension press 3 2 A display similar to the following appears Internal Hotline Ext 33 Data 32 4 Atthis point m To change the hotline and alert extension numbers you just entered repeat Steps 2 and 3 m To delete the existing hotline and alert extension numbers press Remove m To identify another hotline and alert extension pair press _Next Item or Prev Item until the new hotline extension number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Using To use the hotline phone 1 Lift the handset of the hotline phone The designated alert extension rings 2 When the call is answered speak into the handset 5 108 Hotline 603 Hunt Group Extensions 505 Description This System Programming procedure lets you assign any number of extensions to a Hunt Group The system supports up to seven Hunt Groups however Hunt Group 7 is used exclusively for the voice messaging system Related Features for Hunt Groups 1 6 m For instructions on ringing or paging extensions in a Hunt Group or transferring calls to a Hunt Group see Group Hunting m If a ringing call to the Hunt Group is not answered within three rings the call moves to the next available extension in the Hunt Group If users in the Hunt Group leave their desks they should turn on Do Not Disturbjat their extensions so calls move immediately to the next available extension
408. tension cannot place calls on that line either by pressing the line button or by using Direct Line Pickup ldle Line Likewise if the extension s access to a line is set to No Access or Out Only the extension cannot receive calls on that line that are ringing at other extensions either by pressing the line button or by using Direct Line Pickup Active Line When a user has access to an outside line for outgoing calls dialing E TET can be customized for the user s extension by using Outgoing Call Restriction 401 Restriction 401 and Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 Caller ID information does not display for ringing calls on lines programmed for Out Only or No Access Considerations If a line is assigned to a phone but is restricted to No Access the line button lights show calling activity but the line cannot be used to place or receive calls Valid Entries 1 No Restriction calls permitted on that line v 2 Out Only can only make outside calls not receive them on that line 3 In Only can only receive calls not make them on that line 4 No Access cannot receive or make calls but can join calls receive 5 116 transferred calls or pick up calls on hold on that line Line Access Restriction 302 Programming To restrict an extension from making calls on a specific line 1 2 Press _Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 2 o 2 At the Extension prompt ente
409. tercom 8 and the two digit line number If you want to call on a line in a specific pool at a pooled extension press the pool button or press intercom and dial the three digit pool access code 880 881 882 or 883 2 Press Feature 3 Dial the three digit System Speed Dial code 600 699 If you did not specify an outside line or pool the system automatically selects one turns on the speaker if the handset is in the cradle and dials the number The number being dialed shows on a display phone unless it is a Marked System Speed Dial number Standard Phone 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Press 3 Dial the three digit System Speed Dial code 600 699 The system automatically selects an outside line and dials the number 5 184 System Speed Dial Numbers System Time 103 Description This System Programming procedure sets the time that appears on system display phones Considerations m Enter the time in 24 hour notation In this scheme the hours of the day are 0000 12 midnight to 2359 11 59 p m Since each time must have four digits use leading zeros when necessary For example to set the time to 9 00 a m enter o 2 Lo Lo For 4 45 p m enter 1 Le 4 5 m The time appears on system display phones as a m or p m not in 24 hour notation Programming To change the System Time 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program
410. termined outside number is dialed automatically The external number might be for example a frequently called service bureau The external hotline must be a standard phone not a system phone After you identify an external hotline extension you must store the external phone number for the hotline extension as Personal Speed Dial code 80 Both procedures are included in Programming on the next page Related Features Use Hotline 603 to identify an internal hotline extension Use Line Assignment 301 to assign outside lines to the external hotline extension Pool Extension Assignment 314 to assign pools to the external Hotline extension and Automatic Line Selection to set the extension to select outside lines or pools first If your use of the external hotline requires immediate dialing of the programmed number dedicate a line for use by this extension do not assign the line to any other extension or use the line for any other purpose You can set Line Ringing to No Ring for all lines or pools assigned to the external hotline to prevent incoming calls from ringing at the extension Make sure there are no call line or pool restrictions assigned to an external hotline because they will prevent the outside number from being dialed See Outgoing Call Restriction 401 jLine Access Restriction 302 and Pool Access Restriction 315 Do not use Station Lock at an external hotline bec
411. th the system refer to the documentation that shipped with those phones for information specific to the MLS models System phones have several buttons in common volume control buttons and the Feature Conf _Transtr Hola Mic HEAL and _Spkr buttons In addition each phone has programmable buttons that can be used for outside lines pools extension numbers outside phone numbers or system features Outside lines and pools as well as some system features require buttons with status lights Programmable buttons without lines or pools assigned to them can be programmed with numbers or features so you can use the feature or dial the number with one touch The number in each PARTNER model name indicates the number of programmable buttons with status lights plus two _intercom buttons If the PARTNER model phone has a display indicated by a D in the model name users receive messages and prompts when making calls and programming More information about the display is provided in A system display phone is required for system programming Table 1 1 summarizes system phone features Table 1 1 System Phones PARTNER PARTNER PARTNER PARTNER MDC MDW 34D 18D 18 6 9000 9000 Total Number of Programmable Buttons 36 16 4 4 4 Key Mode Line Button x Capacity Number of 24 16 4 4 4 Programmable Buttons with Status Lights Hybrid Mode Pool 5 5 4 4 4 Button Capacity Intercom Buttons 2 2 2 2 2 Dis
412. than the default display appear for approximately 15 seconds Marked System Speed Dial numbers do not display when they are dialed The display contrast can be adjusted by pressing x then using the up volume control button to increase the brightness or the down volume control button to decrease the brightness Adjust the contrast while the phone is idle and the handset is in the cradle The angle of the display is adjustable to three positions low medium and high Display 5 75 Display Language 303 Description This System Programming procedure identifies the language in which display messages appear if the extension has a system display phone The language is set for each extension so phones in the same system can display different languages Considerations If SMDR is used the call report header is printed in the language specified for extension 10 Valid Entries 1 English 2 Spanish 3 French Programming To change the Display Language setting for an extension 1 Press Feature Lo Lo System Program System Program la 3 Lo 3 2 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed For example to program extension 11 press 1 4 The current display language displays 3 To change the display language press _Next Data until the appropriate value displays 4 To change the display language for another extension press _Next item or Prev Item until the ext
413. that are answered by pressing a pool button can be held conference or transferred however pool buttons cannot be used to join calls If you are using an MDC 9000 or MDW 9000 phone make sure the handset is on before using the instructions in How to Answer Calls Ringing at Your Extension There are several ways to access a line for answering calls On either a system phone or a standard phone lift the handset to answer a ringing call if more than one call is ringing at a system phone you get the call that has been ringing for the longest time Ona system phone press a specific line pool or Intercom button You can also use Direct Line Pickup to pick up a ringing or held call or to join an active call by dialing _intercom 6 8 and the two digit line number Ona standard phone you can use Direct Line Pickup to pick up a ringing or held call or to join an active call on a specific line at intercom dial tone dial 6 8 and the two digit line number Display phones can show the type of call that is ringing at the extension For standard and non display system phones the user can identify the type of call by the system s ringing patterns See Ringing Patterns in Chapter 3 Note that there are no unique ringing patterns for coverage calls or forwarded calls Answering Calls 5 11 How to Answer Calls Ringing at Your Extension System Phone You can answer a call on any line or pool that
414. that has the line For additional information on line ringing options see Programming a Receptionist s Extension Jlater in this chapter Programming 2 3 Automatic Line Selection Centralized Telephone Programming to specify the order in which the system selects an available line intercom or outside when a user at the extension lifts the handset or presses _spxr to make a call For extensions with standard phones set Automatic Line Selection to intercom first This enables standard phones to access system features including intercom calling When users lift the handsets on standard phones they hear intercom dial tone To access an outside line they must dial 9 Pooled Extensions Use this section if your system is configured for Hybrid mode to change the assignment of lines in pools and to assign auxiliary pools to or remove the main pool from pooled extensions If a pooled extension also has an individual line refer to Key Extensions on the previous page to assign that individual line For initial setup only use Number of Lines 104 to specify the number of lines that will be assigned to the main pool Then use the following procedures as needed Dial Mode 201 to identify any rotary lines the default for all lines is touch tone Pool Line Assignment 207 to remove lines from the main pool and assign lines to auxiliary pools Line Access Mode 313 to change a specific extension
415. the account code assigned to incoming or outgoing calls prints on call reports See Call Reporting Devices SMDR in Chapter 4 for more information on call reporting For forced account code entry if a Forced Account Code List exists only valid account codes are printed on the call report Forced account codes are not required to answer incoming calls at the extensions programmed with this feature 5 90 Forced Account Code Entry 307 Valid Entries 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned Y Programming To program an extension for Forced Account Code Entry 1 2 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 3 Lo Zz Atthe Extension prompt enter the number of the extension to be programmed For example to program extension 15 press 1 5 To assign or unassign Forced Account Code Entry press _Next Data until the appropriate value displays To program another extension press Next item or _Prev Item until the extension number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Forced Account Code Entry 307 5 91 Forced Account Code List 409 Description This System Programming procedure lets you identify a list of up to 99 account code verification entries for extensions that are forced to enter account codes Once a list is created any user at an extension programmed for Forced Account Code Entry must enter a valid accou
416. the risk of accidental damage m Keep the system modules in an area free of dust smoke and moisture and do not block the air vents by placing objects on top of the system carriers m Do not place telephones near a heating duct radiator or other heat source and do not drop or expose them to excessive shock or vibration m Unplug the telephone if its cord is damaged if liquid is spilled into it or if its housing becomes cracked or otherwise damaged m To clean your telephone wipe the outside housing with a soft dust free cloth If absolutely necessary you may use a cloth slightly dampened with a mild soap and water solution Dry quickly with a soft cloth A caution Your telephone contains sensitive electronic parts Never submerge it in any kind of liquid and never use detergents alcohols solvents abrasive cleaners or an excessive amount of water when cleaning the housing and faceplate To do so could result in irreparable damage Repair Information Outside the continental U S contact your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer for warranty and repair information applicable to your system Maintenance B 1 In Warranty Repairs If you purchased or leased your system directly from Lucent Technologies Lucent Technologies will repair it free of charge during the one year warranty period Simply call the hotline and ask for service Business Day service is standard during the warranty perio
417. tification to the Telephone Companies Before connecting this equipment you or your equipment supplier must notify your local telephone company s business office of the following The telephone number s you will be using with this equipment The system s operating mode KF for Key mode or MF for Hybrid mode and its FCC registration number which can be found on the right hand side of the primary carrier The ringer equivalence number REN which also can be found on the right hand side of the primary carrier The facility interface code which is O2LS2 You also must notify your local telephone company if and when this equipment is permanently disconnected from the line s m REN Information The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices which may be connected to the same telephone line Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to incoming calls In most but not all areas the sum of RENs should not exceed five 5 0 To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line as determined by the total RENs contact the local telephone company Repair Instructions If you experience trouble because your equipment is malfunctioning the FCC requires that you disconnect the equipment from the network and not use it until the problem has been corrected Repairs to this equipment can only be made by the manufacturer its authorized agents or by others
418. til the extension number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for all extensions that you want to change 6 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Line Access Mode 313 5 115 Line Access Restriction 302 Description This System Programming procedure restricts an extension from receiving and or making outside calls on specific lines For example you may want a secretary to answer calls on a manager s line but not to make any outgoing calls on the line in this case you can assign the manager s line to the secretary s extension and restrict it to In Only Related Features This procedure is the most extreme way to restrict dialing For example an extension with a line set to In Only or No Access cannot select the line to dial out even for numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List 406 See Dialing Restrictions and Permissions in Chapter 2 for a summary of all dialing restrictions For pooled extensions use Pool Access Restriction 315 to assign restrictions to all the lines assigned to a specific pool Pool Access Restriction overrides Line Access Restriction For individual lines on pooled extensions use Line Access Restriction To prevent an extension from using a line restrict the line even if it is not assigned to the extension so it cannot be accessed using Pickup it an extension s access to a line is set to No Access or In Only the ex
419. tion The green light next to the Auto Dial button is on steady m Inside Only The red light next to the Auto Dial button is on steady a Local Only The green light next to the Auto Dial button flashes 3 Press the Outgoing Call Restriction button at extension 10 or lift the handset and place it back in the cradle The green light next to the Outgoing Call Restriction button goes off and extension 10 resumes normal operation Outgoing Call Restriction Button 114 5 147 Outside Conference Denial 109 Description This System Programming procedure determines whether users can include more than one outside party in a conference call Related Features m For instructions on making conference calls see Conference Calls m Use to drop the last outside party added to the conference Considerations a This feature setting applies to all system users m A conference call connects up to five parties including the conference originator If outside conference is allowed you can have up to two outside parties and up to three inside parties If outside conference is disallowed you can have one outside party and up to four inside parties Valid Entries 1 Allow conference calls with up to two outside parties w 2 Disallow conference calls with two outside parties Programming To allow or disallow conferences with multiple outside parties 1 Press Feature Lo Lo System Program System Program la 1 Lo 9 2 To a
420. tion and Privacy button return to the status on or off determined by the programmed setting of Automatic VMS Cover 310 and Automatic Extension Privacy 304 respectively For example If Automatic Extension Privacy is Assigned and the Privacy button is on when a system reset occurs the Privacy button will be on again after the system reset However if Automatic Extension Privacy is Not Assigned and the Privacy button is on when a system reset occurs the Privacy button will be off after the system reset m All other active features at an extension are reset to the default settings For example if an extension has calls forwarded to another extension resetting the system turns off Call Forwarding if the feature is programmed on a button with lights the reset also turns off the light for the Call Forwarding button Considerations Using m Resetting the system disconnects all active calls m This procedure is skipped in the sequence of programming procedures when cycling To use this procedure enter the code directly m The system reset begins immediately and takes only a few seconds m You cannot interrupt the reset process or use any telephones in the system during the reset process To reset the system Press Feature 0 Lo System Program System Program z 2 Le A display similar to the following appears Reset Save All When the reset is completed the system is no longer in programming
421. to 4 rings and answering machine 2 to 6 rings If you can t adjust the two answering machines to answer on a different number of rings assign some lines to Immediate Ring at extension X and other lines to Immediate Ring at extension Y 4 6 Using Auxiliary Equipment Personal Answering Machine A personal answering machine is used to answer all the calls that ring at a certain extension Figure 4 3 This setup is useful in both Key and Hybrid modes for the following situations When you do not want to dedicate an extension to an answering machine When the extension receives a lot of intercom calls When outside calls come through a receptionist and are transferred to the extension When an extension has a private line Lines Ext X ANS Figure 4 3 Personal Answering Machine To Use m Go to the machine to manually retrieve messages m From any system extension make an intercom call to the extension When the machine answers dial the message retrieval code m From outside the system call in and have someone transfer you to the extension When the machine answers dial the message retrieval code Or call in when no one will answer before the answering machine does To Program 1 Set Line Ringing for all lines and pools assigned to extension X to the desired ring Immediate Delayed or No Ring If the lines assigned to extension X are also assigned to other extensions adjust
422. tomatic Extension Privacy is Not Assigned for the extensions associated with the voice messaging system hardware If this is the case when you join the call the voice messaging system disconnects automatically so you can speak to the caller You cannot put a joined call on hold You can tell when someone has joined a call of yours when the lights next to the line or pool button change to alternately flashing red and green If a system phone joins a call on a standard phone there is a momentary break in the call on the standard phone Joining Calls How to J oin a Call System Phone A steady red light next to a line button indicates a call is in progress at another extension To join a call m Press the line button next to the steady red light and lift the handset or m Lift the handset and press intercom 6 8 and the two digit line number The red and green lights alternately flash You are now joined with the call Standard Phone 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Dial 6 8 and the number of the line on which the call is being conducted Joining Calls 5 113 Last Number Redial F05 Description This feature redials the last outside number dialed maximum 28 digits It is useful for immediately redialing a busy number Related Features m You can use Save Number Redial to temporarily save the last number dialed The difference between Last Number Redial and Save Number Redia
423. tomatic Line Selection press x x 6 Press Central Tel Program and enter a new extension number or exit programming mode 5 20 Automatic Line Selection Automatic System Answer Button 111 Description This feature is available only on the system phone at extension 10 This System Programming procedure identifies a button to be used to turn Automatic System Answer ASA on and off This feature helps the receptionist answer calls during busy periods When an outside call rings on a line programmed with Automatic System Answer the system answers it after a specified number of rings and plays a short user recorded greeting to the caller Then depending on ETE System Answer Mode 121 is programmed the system either m places the call on hold at extension 10 the light next to the line button winks green at extension 10 and winks red at all other extensions that have the line the outside caller hears music on hold if it is available m continues to ring all extensions that have access to the line the green light next to the line button at those extensions flash the outside caller hears music on hold if it is available m disconnects the call Related Features Automatic System Answer affects incoming calls only on lines identified using Automatic System Answer Lines 204 Calls that ring on lines programmed with Automatic System Answer are picked up after two rings as a default To change the number of ring
424. triction it goes to the next one if necessary When a number violates a restriction the call is stopped and the user hears a reorder tone fast busy signal IMPORTANT While procedures that restrict dialing are very effective absolute protection against misuse cannot be guaranteed System phones give more protection than standard phones Therefore we strongly recommend that you install system phones where restricting phone use is important Locking an Extension The system offers a Station Lock feature that lets users enter a four digit code on their telephone dialpad to lock their extensions This helps prevent other users from making outside calls at those extensions Restricting Access to Outside Lines or Pools A user can access a line or pool by lifting the handset pressing the line or pool button on the phone or by dialing the Direct Line Pickup feature code or a pool access code If you do not want a user to access a specific outside line or pool you can use or Pool Access Restriction 315 to control an extension s access to a certain line or pool whether the line or pool is assigned to the extension or not Table 2 1 provides examples of settings that can be used to restrict an extension s access to specific outside lines or pools Programming 2 9 NOTE If Forced Account Code Entry 307 is programmed for an extension that extension is required to enter an account code before dialing an outside number
425. ts you unlock a specific user s locked extension Use this feature when a user forgets the code he or she used to lock the extension Related Features Use Station Lock to lock an extension Considerations It is recommended that you do not program this feature on a button Using System Phone From extension 10 or 11 only 1 Press Feature 2 2 2 Dial the extension number or use an Auto Dial or Manual Signaling button for the extension that you want to unlock The extension is unlocked If that extension used a Station Lock button with lights to activate the feature the green light goes off Standard Phone From extension 10 or 11 only 1 Press 2 2 2 Dial the number of the extension that you want to unlock The extension is unlocked Station Unlock F22 5 177 System Date 101 Description This System Programming procedure sets the month day and year The system displays only the month and day on display phones when the phone is idle the month day and year print on SMDR call reports Considerations Include leading zeros for single digit months or days Programming To change the System Date 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 1 Lo 4 2 Enter today s date in the form MMDDYY For example to enter April 26 1997 press 0 4 2 Le 9 z A display similar to the following appears System Date Data 042697 3 Select anot
426. tton 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program 2 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature 3 Press a programmable button 4 Press Feature 2 1 5 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using System Phone You can lock an extension when the phone is idle or while active on an intercom or outside call using the handset or speakerphone 1 Press the Station Lock button or press Feature 2 1 On a programmed button with lights the green light flashes 2 Enter a four digit code using digits 0 9 3 Re enter the four digit code Station Lock F21 5 175 If the code entered in matches the code entered in the extension is locked On a button with lights the green light changes to on steady On a display phone the display shows If the code entered in Step 3 does not match the code entered in the extension remains unlocked On a button with lights the green light turns off Repeat the locking procedure on the previous page To unlock a locked extension 1 Press the Station Lock button or press _Feature 2 4 On a programmed button with lights the green light flashes 2 Enter the four digit code that you used to lock the extension If the code entered in Step 2 matches the code used to lock the extension the extension is unlocked On a button with lights the green light turns off I
427. u can use Touch Tone Enablejto send touch tone signals over a rotary line for example to access bank by phone services Valid Entries 1 Touch Tone line vY 2 Rotary line Programming To change the Dial Mode setting for a specific line 1 Press Feature o o System Program System Program 2 Lo 2 2 Enter the first line to be programmed For example to program line 8 press 0 2 To change the dial mode press _Next Data until the appropriate value displays To program another line press _Next item or _Prev item until the line number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for all lines that you want to change 6 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 58 Dial Mode 201 Direct Extension Dial Button 113 Description This feature is available only on the system phone at extension 10 This System Programming procedure identifies a button to be used to turn Direct Extension Dial DXD on and off This feature permits an outside caller to dial an extension or Hunt Group directly without the aid of the receptionist It is ideal for outside callers who frequently talk with specific employees or service groups and know the extension number they are trying to reach When an outside call rings on a line programmed with Direct Extension Dial the system picks it up after a specified number of rings and plays a short message prompting the caller t
428. up m A user in the Night Service Group can receive an after hours outside call only if it comes in on a line or pool that is assigned to that user s phone Line or pool assignments for extensions in the Night Service Group can vary from one extension to another Valid Entries 1 Assigned to group 2 Not Assigned to group Y Programming To change a Night Service Group assignment 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 5 o 4 2 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed For example to program extension 13 press 1 3 3 To assign or unassign the extension press _Next Data until the appropriate value displays 4 To assign or unassign another extension press _Next Item or _Prev item until the extension number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 142 Night Service Group Extensions 504 Number of Lines 104 Description This System Programming procedure determines in Key mode the number of outside lines that are automatically assigned to all system extensions in Hybrid mode it determines the number of lines assigned to the main pool This number does not have to match the actual number of lines connected at the control unit This feature should be used only for initial system setup Related Features In Hybrid mode do not use this procedure if you add lines to the system after initial setup
429. ure is useful when a user needs to answer calls on lines or pools not assigned to his or her phone The system supports up to four Pickup Groups Related Features For instructions on answering calls in a Pickup Group see Group Pickup Considerations m An extension can be assigned to as many as four different Pickup Groups m Extensions where extra alerts such as a loud bell are installed can be assigned to a Pickup Group to enable anyone who hears the alert to answer the call Valid Entries 1 Assigned to group 2 Not Assigned to group Y Programming To assign extensions to a Pickup Group 1 Press Feature Lo Lo System Program System Program Le 5 Lo 1 2 Atthe Group prompt enter a group number 1 4 For example to select group 1 press 1 A display similar to the following appears Pickup Group 1 Extension 3 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed For example to program extension 29 press 2 2 4 To assign or unassign the extension press _Next Data until the appropriate value displays 5 Atthis point m To assign or unassign another extension press _Next item or _Prev item until the extension number shows on the display Then repeat Step 4 m To program another group press _Next Procedure Prev Procedure and enter a new group number Then repeat Steps 3 and 4 6 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Pickup Group Extensions 501
430. use Voice Mailbox Transfer to transfer a caller directly to a subscriber s voice mailbox m An extension programmed with Call Waiting 316 cannot transfer either of two active calls Considerations 5 188 m When you press _Transtr the call is put on hold and its associated green light winks m A transferred call appears on the destination extension s intercom button unless the destination extension has a line button for the line on which the call was received m When a call you transferred is answered if you began the call on an individual line the red light next to the line button goes on if you began the call on a line in a pool the call no longer appears on your phone m lf you transfer a call to an extension for which you have an Auto Dial button and the call is unanswered the green light next to the Auto Dial button flutters when the call returns to your extension Transferring Calls Calls can be transferred to Calling Groups and Hunt Groups When you transfer a call from a display phone the number to which you are transferring the call briefly appears on the display If a transferred call is unanswered the number of the extension that is returning the transferred call also appears on display phones If you are using the system behind a PBX or Centrex system the PBX or Centrex system may include a call transfer feature that lets you transfer a call to another Centrex extension so that the line on which th
431. ve a call without having to know which line the call is on Callers on hold hear Music On Hold 602 if it is active and an audio source is connected to the primary processor module Standard phone users can put a call on hold to retrieve a second call provided Call Waiting 316 is programmed for their extensions Considerations 5 104 Hold For system phones if a call is left on hold for longer than one minute the extension at which the call is held generates a short Hold Reminder Tone This tone sounds once every minute until the held call is retrieved or until the caller hangs up Only one party on an intercom call can put the call on hold If both parties try to put the call on hold the call is disconnected If you are using the system behind a PBX or Centrex system the PBX or Centrex system may include a call hold feature that lets you place a call on hold and place another call on the same line For more information see the documentation for your PBX or Centrex system When your Centrex or PBX documentation tells you to use a switchhook flash use the Recall feature instead Hold acts differently on feature phones When you press a Hold button on a feature phone the call is held at the phone itself This means other phones in the system cannot see that the call is on hold it appears as a busy line Also callers on hold at a feature phone will not hear the system s music on hold Using System Phone T
432. want to program backup answering features to assist the receptionist in handling calls consider the following features m Useful during peak calling periods to answer outside calls while the receptionist is busy on other calls When activated this feature answers incoming calls after a specified number of rings and plays a customized greeting Then depending on how Automatic System Answer Mode 121 is programmed the system either places the call on hold at extension 10 the light next to the line button winks green at extension 10 and winks red at all other extensions that have the line the outside caller hears music on hold if it is available continues to ring all extensions that have access to the line the green light next to the line button at those extensions flash the outside caller hears music on hold if it is available disconnects the call The first two options provide audible and or visual indication of incoming calls waiting to be answered The third option is not applicable as a backup answering feature however it is useful for making brief announcements such as temporary closings or hours of business m Direct Extension Dial Useful for routing outside callers directly to a specific extension or Hunt Group When activated this feature answers incoming calls after a specified number of rings and plays a customized message prompting the caller to dial the digits of the designated extension
433. work effectively with the system Requirements An industry standard device must meet the following conditions m t must be non proprietary That is it cannot be made specifically for use on a particular telephone system For example you cannot connect a Lucent Technologies MERLIN system phone because it is specifically designed for use on a MERLIN system m Its Ringer Equivalence Number REN cannot be greater than 2 0 The REN is shown on a label on the device usually on the bottom m You can connect a standard two line device to the system but for best results it should be installed and used as if it were a single line device Connecting Standard Devices You can connect a standard device so that it is on an extension by itself or so that it shares an extension with another piece of equipment either another standard device or a system phone as long as the REN of the two devices together does not exceed 2 0 System phones have 0 0 REN For example you can connect a standard phone and an answering machine to the same extension An extension with two devices connected to it is called a combination extension You cannot connect two system phones on one extension The PARTNER Communications System Installation guide provides installation instructions REN is a measure of the power it takes to ring a phone The typical home phone line handles 4 0 5 0 RENs each extension jack in your system handles up to 2 0 RENs 1 10
434. x This example includes two user extensions X and Y which are not automatically covered by the PARTNER MAIL system This allows the receptionist to give the caller more personalized service if the receptionist transfers a call to extension X or Y and that extension does not answer the call returns to the receptionist The receptionist can then take a message or send the call to the extension s mailbox if the caller prefers 4 26 Using Auxiliary Equipment PARTNER MAIL System Lines Ext Z1 not automatically PARTNER MAL TJ Ext Y System J Ext X Ext 10 Receptionist s Desk Figure 4 13 Delayed Call Handling To Use Follow the instructions packaged with the PARTNER MAIL system to install it During normal business hours the PARTNER MAIL system uses delayed call handling the receptionist picks up all calls at extension 10 If the receptionist cannot answer within four rings the system routes the call to the PARTNER MAIL system where the day greeting and menu play to the caller Outside of business hours when Night Service is activated at extension 10 outside calls are answered directly by the PARTNER MAIL system Any user who is still in the office can pick up calls before the PARTNER MAIL system answers To Program The following list summarizes the PARTNER II system programming procedures you use to implement the previous example 1 If your system is configured for Hybrid mode use Line Acce
435. x machines credit card scanners modems or auto attendants because the call waiting tone will interrupt the data connection You cannot transfer either party connected using Call Waiting conference in additional parties or use feature codes while both calls are active Transfer return group call distribution hunt group and wake up calls are not considered incoming calls for this feature Valid Entries 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned Programming To change the Call Waiting setting for an extension 1 2 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 3 1 6 Enter the number of the extension to receive Call Waiting For example to program extension 11 press 1 1 To assign or unassign Call Waiting press _Next Data until the appropriate value displays To program another extension press _Next item or _Prev Item until the extension number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Call Waiting 316 5 47 Caller ID Description Caller ID also known as ndividual Calling Line Identification or ICLID is available on system display phones on all lines for which you subscribe to Caller ID service Caller ID information is the caller s telephone number or name if available When active on a call a user automatically receives Caller ID information for the call When an extension is idle a user receives Caller ID i
436. xt 21 Ext 22 Line a o o o o o Programmable ae al o mi oL__ oL __ Buttons Ext 11 Ext 12 Ext 13 Ext 14 Ext 15 Ext 16 o o o o o o Atiy unused GA SEES e ee e See E programmable Line 7 Line 8 Line 9 Line 10 Line 11 Line 12 o a a o o AN FO e Nt eee E eee E Linet Line 2 Line 3 Line 4 Line 5 Line 6 Figure 2 5 Example of Button Programming for Receptionist s Phone Alternatively the receptionist can use an Intercom Autodialer for the extensions the receptionist dials most frequently This leaves buttons on the phone free for more features and phone numbers 2 22 Programming Using Telephone Programming There are two ways to program a telephone Centralized Telephone Programming from extension 10 or 11 see below and Extension Programming from a users own extension see page 2 26 Telephone Models illustrates a PARTNER 18D phone set up as a key extension and illustrates a PARTNER 6 phone set up as a pooled extension As you program buttons mark their functions on the phone s labeling sheet see the examples in Figures and NOTE A PARTNER 6 phone only has four buttons available for lines or pools If four lines are assigned it has no programmable buttons If the main pool is assigned it has two programmable buttons The MDC 9000 and MDW 9000 phones look just like a PARTNER 6 phone when you program them centrally Using Centralized Telephone Programming Use Centralized Telephone Progr
437. xtension s Outgoing Call Restriction setting See Outgoing Call Restriction Button 114 for information m You can use Line Access Restriction 302 to restrict extensions from making or receiving calls on specific lines Pool Access Restriction 315 to restrict extensions from making or receiving calls on all lines belonging to a specific pool and Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 to specify telephone numbers that users cannot dial m If you program an extension for Forced Account Code Entry 307 the user at that extension must enter an account code before accessing an outside line This feature is not available on standard phones Considerations m While procedures that restrict dialing are very effective absolute protection against misuse cannot be guaranteed System phones give you more protection against such misuse than standard phones Therefore we strongly recommend that you install system phones where restricting phone use is important m If the system is connected to a PBX or Centrex system and a dial out code usually 9 is needed to place calls outside the PBX or Centrex system the control unit may not be able to prevent calls for extensions restricted to Local Only If dialing restrictions are needed on Centrex lines use Centrex restrictions instead Valid Entries 1 No Restriction can make long distance local and intercom calls wv 2 Inside intercom Only 3 Local intercom and local
438. xtension Dial is answering a call When you want to record or play a message turn off Automatic System Answer and Direct Extension Dial and wait for any calls in the process of being answered by the system to be completed Automatic System Answer Record Playback 1891 5 29 Programming To record an Automatic System Answer message 1 Turn off Automatic System Answer and Direct Extension Dial and wait for any calls in the process of being answered by these features to be completed 2 Lift the handset of the system display phone at extension 10 or 11 Press Intercom Dial e 2 4 The current time of day remains on the second line of the display for the duration of this procedure The top line of the display reads ASA 1 Record If a message was recorded previously a display similar to the following appears ASA 1 Record 2 Play 5 Press 1 A display similar to the following appears for three seconds Record at the tone After three seconds you hear a confirmation tone and you can begin recording your message While you are recording a display similar to the following appears Press to stop 6 Press when you are done recording If the allotted time 10 seconds for the message is completed before you press you hear a tone to let you know that the system has stopped recording When you finish recording a display similar to the following appears ASA 1 Record 2 Play 7 Atthis point m To re record th
439. xtension were programmed on the button Call Coverage is activated on a button with lights the green light is on Skip Steps 2 and 3 If no originating extension was programmed dial your extension number If no covering extension was programmed dial the extension number of the covering extension Call Coverage is activated on a button with lights the green light is on To remove Call Coverage using the programmed button 1 Press the programmed button If an originating extension and a covering extension were programmed on the button Call Coverage is deactivated on a button with lights the green light is off Skip Steps 2 and 3 2 f no originating extension was programmed dial your extension number 3 If no covering extension was programmed dial your extension number again Call Coverage is deactivated on a button with lights the green light is off 5 38 Call Coverage F20 XX XX Standard Phone To send your calls for coverage 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Press 2 Lo 3 Dial your extension number 4 Dial the extension number of the covering extension To remove Call Coverage 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Press 2 Lo 3 Dial your extension number twice Call Coverage F20 XX XX 5 39 Call Coverage Rings 116 Description This System Programming procedure which applies to all system extensions programmed for Call Coverage defi
440. your lease To upgrade to Around the Clock service call 1 800 247 7000 in the continental U S only Around the Clock service is not available for phones If you purchased or leased your system through a Lucent Technologies Authorized Dealer contact your dealer for repairs Lucent Technologies Limited Warranty and Limitation of Liability Lucent Technologies warrants to you the customer that your system will be in good working order on the date Lucent Technologies or its authorized reseller delivers or installs the system whichever is later Warranty Date If you notify Lucent Technologies or its Authorized Dealer within one year of the Warranty Date that your system is not in good working order Lucent Technologies will without charge to you repair or replace at its option the system components that are not in good working order Repair or replacement parts may be new or refurbished and will be provided on an exchange basis If Lucent Technologies determines that your system cannot be repaired or replaced Lucent Technologies will remove the system and at your option refund the purchase price of your system or apply the purchase price towards the purchase of another Lucent Technologies system B 2 Maintenance If you purchased your system directly from Lucent Technologies Lucent Technologies will perform warranty repair in accordance with the terms and conditions of the specific type of Lucent Technologies maintenance

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

続きはこちら - 株式会社インターリスク総研  Bedienungsanleitung  lire les premières pages  スーパーカブ110用スモークテールレンズ取扱説明書 ご使用前に必ずお  Avaya Business Communications Manager - Configuration - Remote Worker Configuration manual  Nokia 3360 User Guide  LISST-Deep - Sequoia Scientific, Inc.  Dale Tiffany TT10823 Instructions / Assembly  Zenoah RedMax Sweeper EX-RMS User's Manual  IQ-BUG USERS MANUAL  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file